US20110176325A1 - Viscoelastic lightguide - Google Patents

Viscoelastic lightguide Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20110176325A1
US20110176325A1 US13/003,208 US200913003208A US2011176325A1 US 20110176325 A1 US20110176325 A1 US 20110176325A1 US 200913003208 A US200913003208 A US 200913003208A US 2011176325 A1 US2011176325 A1 US 2011176325A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
light
substrate
viscoelastic lightguide
lightguide
viscoelastic
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US13/003,208
Inventor
Audrey A. Sherman
Michael A. Meis
Kevin R. Schaffer
Marie A. Boulos
Soemantri Widagdo
Thu-Van T. Tran
Ellen O. Aeling
Patrick J. Yeshe
Wendi J. Winkler
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
3M Innovative Properties Co
Original Assignee
3M Innovative Properties Co
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 3M Innovative Properties Co filed Critical 3M Innovative Properties Co
Priority to US13/003,208 priority Critical patent/US20110176325A1/en
Assigned to 3M INNOVATIVE PROPERTIES COMPANY reassignment 3M INNOVATIVE PROPERTIES COMPANY ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: WIDAGDO, SOEMANTRI, AELING, ELLEN O., BOULOS, MARIE A., SCHAFFER, KEVIN R., TRAN, THU-VAN T., YESHE, PATRICK J., WINKLER, WENDI J., MEIS, MICHAEL A., SHERMAN, AUDREY A.
Publication of US20110176325A1 publication Critical patent/US20110176325A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/0001Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
    • G02B6/0011Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
    • G02B6/0065Manufacturing aspects; Material aspects
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21LIGHTING
    • F21SNON-PORTABLE LIGHTING DEVICES; SYSTEMS THEREOF; VEHICLE LIGHTING DEVICES SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR VEHICLE EXTERIORS
    • F21S43/00Signalling devices specially adapted for vehicle exteriors, e.g. brake lamps, direction indicator lights or reversing lights
    • F21S43/20Signalling devices specially adapted for vehicle exteriors, e.g. brake lamps, direction indicator lights or reversing lights characterised by refractors, transparent cover plates, light guides or filters
    • F21S43/235Light guides
    • F21S43/236Light guides characterised by the shape of the light guide
    • F21S43/239Light guides characterised by the shape of the light guide plate-shaped
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/0001Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
    • G02B6/0011Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
    • G02B6/0013Means for improving the coupling-in of light from the light source into the light guide
    • G02B6/0015Means for improving the coupling-in of light from the light source into the light guide provided on the surface of the light guide or in the bulk of it
    • G02B6/0018Redirecting means on the surface of the light guide
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/0001Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
    • G02B6/0011Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
    • G02B6/0033Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide
    • G02B6/0035Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide provided on the surface of the light guide or in the bulk of it
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/0001Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
    • G02B6/0011Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
    • G02B6/0033Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide
    • G02B6/0035Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide provided on the surface of the light guide or in the bulk of it
    • G02B6/0045Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide provided on the surface of the light guide or in the bulk of it by shaping at least a portion of the light guide
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/0001Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
    • G02B6/0011Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
    • G02B6/0033Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide
    • G02B6/005Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide provided by one optical element, or plurality thereof, placed on the light output side of the light guide
    • G02B6/0055Reflecting element, sheet or layer
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/0001Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
    • G02B6/0011Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
    • G02B6/0033Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide
    • G02B6/0058Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide varying in density, size, shape or depth along the light guide
    • G02B6/006Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide varying in density, size, shape or depth along the light guide to produce indicia, symbols, texts or the like
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/0001Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
    • G02B6/0011Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
    • G02B6/0033Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide
    • G02B6/0058Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide varying in density, size, shape or depth along the light guide
    • G02B6/0061Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide varying in density, size, shape or depth along the light guide to provide homogeneous light output intensity
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F13/00Illuminated signs; Luminous advertising
    • G09F13/04Signs, boards or panels, illuminated from behind the insignia
    • G09F13/0409Arrangements for homogeneous illumination of the display surface, e.g. using a layer having a non-uniform transparency
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01HELECTRIC SWITCHES; RELAYS; SELECTORS; EMERGENCY PROTECTIVE DEVICES
    • H01H13/00Switches having rectilinearly-movable operating part or parts adapted for pushing or pulling in one direction only, e.g. push-button switch
    • H01H13/70Switches having rectilinearly-movable operating part or parts adapted for pushing or pulling in one direction only, e.g. push-button switch having a plurality of operating members associated with different sets of contacts, e.g. keyboard
    • H01H13/83Switches having rectilinearly-movable operating part or parts adapted for pushing or pulling in one direction only, e.g. push-button switch having a plurality of operating members associated with different sets of contacts, e.g. keyboard characterised by legends, e.g. Braille, liquid crystal displays, light emitting or optical elements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01HELECTRIC SWITCHES; RELAYS; SELECTORS; EMERGENCY PROTECTIVE DEVICES
    • H01H2219/00Legends
    • H01H2219/054Optical elements
    • H01H2219/062Light conductor

Definitions

  • This disclosure relates to optical articles and devices, particularly lightguides used to facilitate distribution of light in electronic devices.
  • the lightguides are made with viscoelastic materials.
  • Lightguides are used to facilitate distribution of light from a light source over an area much larger than the light source.
  • Lightguides comprise optically transmissive materials and may have different forms such as slab, wedge, and pseudo-wedge forms. Most lightguides are designed to accept light at an edge surface and allow this light to propagate by total internal reflection between a back surface and an output surface, toward an opposing edge surface from which the light enters. Light is emitted uniformly from the output surface using extracting features that are positioned in various types of patterns on the output surface.
  • an optical device having a light source and a viscoelastic lightguide. Light from the light source enters the viscoelastic lightguide and is transported within the lightguide by total internal reflection.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may comprise a pressure sensitive adhesive.
  • the optical device may be used in a variety of constructions wherein the device emits light being transported within the viscoelastic lightguide. Constructions include those used for signs, markings, illumination devices, display devices, keypad assemblies and tail light assemblies for vehicles.
  • FIGS. 1 a and 1 b are schematic cross sections of layers illustrating principles of geometric optics.
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic cross section of an exemplary optical device.
  • FIGS. 3 a - b , 4 a - b , 5 a - 5 c and 6 a - b show schematic cross sections of exemplary viscoelastic lightguides.
  • FIGS. 7-12 show schematic perspective views of exemplary viscoelastic lightguides.
  • FIG. 13 shows a schematic cross section of an exemplary viscoelastic lightguide.
  • FIGS. 14 and 15 a - l show schematic cross sections of exemplary optical articles.
  • FIGS. 16 and 17 show schematic perspective views of exemplary optical articles.
  • FIGS. 18 a - b show schematic cross sections of exemplary optical articles.
  • FIGS. 19-25 show schematic drawings of exemplary signs and markings comprising exemplary optical articles.
  • FIGS. 26 a - c show schematic cross sections of exemplary illumination devices comprising exemplary optical articles.
  • FIG. 27 comprises a display device comprising an exemplary optical article.
  • FIG. 28 comprises a keypad assembly comprising an exemplary optical article.
  • FIG. 29 comprises a multilayer graphic comprising an exemplary optical article.
  • the optical device disclosed herein includes a light source that emits light, and the light is managed by a viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the optical device may provide one or more advantages.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide is generally soft and compliant such that the light source may be easily coupled to the lightguide so that light can enter the lightguide.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a PSA which is generally tacky at room temperature. The light source may then be coupled to the viscoelastic lightguide such that it is adhered to the lightguide. This may facilitate assembly of the optical device itself or constructions in which the device is used.
  • Light is typically extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide at one or more desired locations or areas of the lightguide.
  • an extractor may be used to extract light from the viscoelastic lightguide. Again, due to the soft and compliant properties of the viscoelastic lightguide, the extractor may be easily coupled to the lightguide so that light can enter the lightguide. If the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a PSA, the extractor can be directly adhered to the lightguide without the need for additional materials to bond the two together.
  • the optical device may be used to provide light anywhere it is desired.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be designed for interior and/or exterior use.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be designed for household, commercial and/or industrial use.
  • the optical device may be used and/or provided in a construction so that it is portable, i.e., it is a portable source of light.
  • Lighted tapes, signs, labels, stickers, cut-outs, etc. are examples of portable constructions that may be made using the optical device.
  • the optical device may also be used and/or provided in a more stationary construction such as in an electronic display device.
  • the optical device may also be used to provide “light on demand”, e.g., the light source may be activated only under certain conditions such as when parking a vehicle.
  • the optical device may be used to provide exterior lighting of a vehicle, e.g., for tail lights, replacing tail light cavities and their lighting assemblies and which are very space consuming.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide can be used in place of a conventional lightguide used to light display devices.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may be used to replace a solid or hollow lightguide that distributes light from one or more substantially linear or point light sources.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide can be assembled in a display device without the need for additional materials to bond the lightguide to the display device.
  • the optical device may also be very adaptable, even by a user, so that it can be used in different lighting forms and constructions.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may be provided in roll or sheet form such that it can be cut into various shapes and sizes.
  • the light source may also be interchangeable with the viscoelastic lightguide, for example, if the light source should become unusable or if a different color of light is desired. Further, if used in a sign construction, graphics can be interchanged, for example, if one would like to update an advertisement.
  • the optical device may provide many more advantages.
  • the optical device can be used to provide light that is bright, diffuse, uniform and/or concentrated over particular areas.
  • the optical device may provide advantages by being thin, flexible (can be flexed by hand) and/or lightweight, and it may even be conformable to a particular shape and size.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may be tiled to light large areas which may be made easier if the lightguides can be stuck together. Due to its viscoelastic properties, the viscoelastic lightguide may also dampen stresses experienced by the optical device or construction in which the device is used.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide when disposed on a substrate, may be removable and/or repositionable over time.
  • the optical device may also provide advantages related to cost, because it can be made from commercially available light sources and viscoelastic materials. Additional advantages are described below.
  • the optical device disclosed herein comprises a viscoelastic lightguide and a light source.
  • Light is emitted by the light source, enters the viscoelastic lightguide, and propagates, reflects, and/or refracts according to the law of refraction and the principle of total internal reflection.
  • the behavior of light within the viscoelastic lightguide may depend on a variety of factors such as the surface structure of the lightguide, the presence (or absence) of additional substrate(s) in contact with the viscoelastic lightguide, and/or the material compositions of the viscoelastic lightguide and any additional substrate(s) in contact with the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the behavior of light within the viscoelastic lightguide may depend on the angular distribution of light that enters the lightguide.
  • FIGS. 1 a and 1 b The law of refraction is illustrated in FIGS. 1 a and 1 b for a given pair of first and second layers.
  • Light represented by one or more rays for simplicity
  • the light refracts, at a transmittance angle ⁇ t , into the second layer according to the law of refraction:
  • ⁇ i is the incident angle
  • n 1 and n 2 are the refractive indices of the first and second layers, respectively.
  • FIG. 1 a shows a pair of layers 100 having first layer 110 and second layer 120 with refractive indices n 1 and n 2 , respectively, such that n 1 ⁇ n 2 .
  • Light propagating within the first layer strikes interface 130 at many different incident angles and refracts into the second layer at angles within the transmittance angles ⁇ t .
  • FIG. 1 b shows a pair of layers 140 having first layer 150 and second layer 160 with refractive indices n 1 and n 2 , respectively, such that n 1 >n 2 .
  • Light propagating within the first layer strikes interface 170 at incident angle ⁇ i and refracts at transmittance angle ⁇ t into the second layer according to the law of refraction. Only light having an incident angle less than or equal to critical angle ⁇ c will enter the second layer. All other light incident upon the interface is reflected.
  • the critical angle ⁇ c is defined as:
  • total internal reflection occurs when light having a particular angular component or distribution is incident upon an interface at one or more angles greater than the critical angle ⁇ c .
  • FIG. 2 shows an exemplary optical device 200 .
  • Light source 220 is positioned relative to viscoelastic lightguide 210 such that light emitted by the light source enters viscoelastic lightguide 210 and is transported within the layer by total internal reflection.
  • Light emitted by the light source is represented by rays 230 which enter viscoelastic lightguide 210 through input surface 213 adapted to receive light from the light source.
  • Light within the viscoelastic lightguide is represented by single ray 240 which is transported by total internal reflection. At least a portion of the viscoelastic lightguide has an optically smooth surface 211 and/or 212 .
  • An optically smooth surface means that the surface is smooth enough such that light incident upon the surface is not affected undesirably by the surface, e.g., the surface is free of defects having at least one dimension larger than the wavelength of the incident light.
  • the optically smooth surface allows at least some of the light entering the viscoelastic lightguide to be reflected at the surface such that this light continues to propagate within the layer according to the principle of total internal reflection.
  • the observed reflection angle is within about 10° of the calculated reflection angle.
  • the observed transmittance angle is within about 10° of the calculated transmittance angle.
  • the surfaces of the viscoelastic lightguide may be unstructured as shown in FIG. 2 , or they may have any three-dimensional structure depending on the desired effect.
  • a surface of the viscoelastic lightguide may comprise at least one feature that extends along a portion of the surface and is oriented to extract light from the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the at least one feature comprises a plurality of features, the features comprising protrusions, depressions, or a combination thereof.
  • Exemplary features comprise protrusions and/or depressions having lenticular, prismatic, ellipsoidal, conical, parabolic, pyramidal, square, or rectangular shapes, or a combination thereof.
  • features comprising lenses are particularly useful for directing light to a preferred angular distribution.
  • Exemplary features comprising linear prisms or elongated prisms are also particularly useful.
  • Other exemplary features comprise protrusions and/or depressions having elongated, irregular, variably sloped lenticular, or random columnar shapes, or a combination thereof.
  • Hybrids of any combination of shapes may be used, for example, elongated parabolic, pyramidal prismatic, rectangular-based prismatic, and rounded-tip prismatic shapes.
  • the features may comprise random combinations of shapes.
  • Sizes of the features may be described by their overall shapes in three dimensions.
  • each feature may have a dimension of from about 1 to about 100 um, for example, from about 5 to about 70 um.
  • a viscoelastic lightguide may have features that are all the same shape, but the sizes of the shapes may vary in at least one dimension.
  • a viscoelastic lightguide may also have features that are different shapes, and the sizes of these features may or may not vary in any given dimension.
  • Surface structures of the features may also be varied.
  • Surface structure of a feature generally refers to the sub-structure of the feature.
  • Exemplary surface structures include optically smooth surfaces, irregular surfaces, patterned surfaces, or a combination thereof.
  • each of the features may have the same surface structure.
  • some of the features may have the same surface structure.
  • each of the features may have a different surface structure.
  • the surface structure of a feature may vary over portions of the feature.
  • An optically smooth surface of a feature may form part of the optically smooth surface of the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the optically smooth surfaces of the feature and the viscoelastic lightguide may be continuous or discontinuous with each other. If a plurality of features is used, the surfaces of some extracting features may be completely optically smooth or some may be partially optically smooth.
  • the optically smooth surface may be in contact with an adjacent lightguide or substrate on which the viscoelastic lightguide is disposed.
  • the number of features, if used, for a given viscoelastic lightguide is at least one.
  • a plurality of features, meaning at least two, may also be used.
  • any number of features may be included, e.g., 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 features; greater than 1, greater than 10, greater than 20, greater than 30, greater than 40, greater than 50, greater than 100, greater than 200, greater than 500, greater than 1000, or greater than 2000 features; or from about 1 to about 10, from about 1 to about 20, from about 1 to about 30, from about 1 to about 40, from about 1 to about 50, from about 1 to about 100, from about 1 to about 200, from about 1 to about 500, from about 1 to about 1000, or from about 1 to about 2000 features.
  • the features may be randomly arranged, arranged in some type of regular pattern, or both.
  • the distance between features may also vary.
  • the features may be discreet or they may overlap.
  • the features may be arranged in close proximity to one another, in substantial contact with each other, immediately adjacent each other, or some combination thereof.
  • a useful distance between features is up to about 10 um, or from about 0.05 um to about 10 um.
  • the features may be offset with respect to one another, angularly as well as transversely.
  • the areal density of the features may change over the length, width, or both.
  • the features may be arranged to obtain a desired optical effect.
  • the features may be arranged to extract light uniformly or as a gradient from the viscoelastic lightguide, to hide discrete light sources, or to reduce Moiré.
  • the features may be used to control the amount and/or direction of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide. This can be carried out generally by varying the shape, size, surface structure, and/or orientation of the features. If a plurality of features is used, then the number and/or arrangement of the features may be varied, as well as the orientation of the features relative to each other.
  • the shape of a feature may change the angular component of light which can increase or decrease the amount of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide. This may be the case if light propagates by total internal reflection within the viscoelastic lightguide and strikes a surface of a feature at an angle less than, equal to, or greater than the critical angle for the viscoelastic lightguide and air and/or an adjacent substrate(s). The amount of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide may increase or decrease accordingly.
  • the size of a feature may be changed such that more or less light can reflect off a surface of the feature, thus increasing or decreasing the amount of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the surface structure of a feature may be used to control the distribution of light that is extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • Light having a particular angular distribution may strike a feature and be extracted uniformly and/or randomly from the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • Light may also be extracted uniformly and in a pattern, or randomly and in a pattern.
  • FIG. 3 a shows a schematic cross section of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 310 comprising feature 320 .
  • the feature is a notch-like depression of surface 311 .
  • Surfaces 311 and 312 are optically smooth surfaces.
  • the surfaces of feature 320 are optically smooth surfaces.
  • Exemplary behavior of light within viscoelastic lightguide 310 is shown by rays 330 and 331 .
  • Light represented by ray 330 propagates by total internal reflection within viscoelastic lightguide 310 .
  • Light represented by ray 331 propagates by total internal reflection within viscoelastic lightguide 310 and eventually strikes a surface of feature 320 .
  • the angular component of ray 331 is changed, and light represented by this ray can strike surface 312 at an angle less than the critical angle such that the light is extracted from viscoelastic lightguide 310 .
  • the amount of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide may be increased.
  • the direction in which light may be extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide may be varied by changing the orientation of feature 320 such that the angle at which ray 331 strikes the feature is increased or decreased but remains less than or equal to the critical angle.
  • FIG. 3 b shows a schematic cross section of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 313 comprising features 321 and 322 .
  • the features are notch-like features with one being a protrusion of surface 314 and the other a depression.
  • Surfaces 314 and 315 are optically smooth surfaces.
  • the surfaces of features 321 and 322 are optically smooth surfaces.
  • Exemplary behavior of light within viscoelastic lightguide 313 is shown by rays 332 and 333 . Light represented by ray 332 propagates by total internal reflection within viscoelastic lightguide 313 and eventually strikes a surface of feature 322 .
  • the angular component of ray 332 is changed, and light represented by this ray can strike surface 314 at an angle less than the critical angle such that the light is extracted from viscoelastic lightguide 313 .
  • Light represented by ray 333 propagates by total internal reflection within viscoelastic lightguide 313 and eventually strikes a surface of feature 321 .
  • the angular component of ray 333 is changed, and light represented by this ray can strike surface 314 at an angle less than the critical angle such that the light is extracted from viscoelastic lightguide 313 .
  • the amount of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide may be increased, and the direction(s) in which light may be extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide may be varied by changing the orientation of the feature(s).
  • FIG. 4 a shows a schematic cross section of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 410 comprising features 420 that protrude from surface 411 .
  • Each of the features 420 has an overall hemispherical shape with an irregular surface for diffusing light.
  • Surface 411 is optically smooth and includes the surface around each of the features and is generally continuous. Thus, the surfaces of features 420 are not part of the optically smooth surface 411 .
  • Surface 412 is optically smooth.
  • Exemplary behavior of light within viscoelastic lightguide 410 is shown by rays 430 - 433 . Light represented by ray 430 propagates by total internal reflection within viscoelastic lightguide 410 .
  • Light represented by rays 431 - 433 having different angular components, propagates within the viscoelastic lightguide and strikes features 420 .
  • Light represented by rays 431 and 432 is extracted from viscoelastic lightguide 410 because both rays strike surfaces of features 420 at angles less than that of the critical angle.
  • Light represented by ray 433 having an angular component different from that of rays 431 and 432 , reflects at the surface of feature 420 because the incident angle is greater than the critical angle. The reflected light strikes the surface of the feature again, this time at an angle less than the critical angle, and the light is extracted from viscoelastic lightguide 410 .
  • FIG. 4 b shows the schematic cross section of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 410 .
  • Light (not shown) having a wide angular distribution propagates within viscoelastic lightguide 410 such that it is extracted diffusely from the lightguide as represented by rays 434 .
  • FIGS. 5 a - 5 c show schematic cross sections of exemplary viscoelastic lightguides that may be used.
  • viscoelastic lightguide 500 comprises surface 505 which is irregular such that light represented by rays 515 is diffused upon being extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • Viscoelastic lightguide 500 also comprises opposing surface 510 which may be an optically smooth surface, a non-optically smooth surface, or a partially optically smooth surface.
  • viscoelastic lightguide 520 comprises optically smooth surface 525 which includes the optically smooth surfaces of features 526 .
  • the features comprise discreet convex lenticular features such that light represented by ray 540 is extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide at a predetermined direction.
  • Viscoelastic lightguide 520 also comprises opposing surface 530 which may be an optically smooth surface, a non-optically smooth surface, or a partially optically smooth surface.
  • viscoelastic lightguide 550 comprises optically smooth surface 555 which includes the optically smooth surfaces of features 556 .
  • the features comprise discreet concave lenticular features such that light represented by ray 570 is emitted from the viscoelastic lightguide at a predetermined direction.
  • Viscoelastic lightguide 550 also comprises opposing surface 560 which may be an optically smooth surface, a non-optically smooth surface, or a partially optically smooth surface.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may have opposing surfaces that are configured dependently or independently relative to each other.
  • FIG. 6 a shows a schematic cross section of viscoelastic lightguide 600 comprising optically smooth surfaces 605 and 610 , each surface including individual convex lenticular features. The features of each surface can be aligned or nearly aligned with each other, or at least within about 100 um.
  • FIG. 6 b shows a schematic cross section of viscoelastic lightguide 620 comprising optically smooth surfaces 625 and 630 , each surface including individual concave lenticular features. The features of each surface can be aligned or nearly aligned with each other, or at least within about 100 um.
  • the amount and direction of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide may be controlled, at the very least, by the shape, size, number, arrangement, etc. of the features.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide can be designed such that light may be extracted from the lightguide in at least one predetermined direction, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more predetermined directions; from 1 to about 3 predetermined directions; from 1 to about 5 predetermined directions; from 1 to about 10 predetermined directions; or from 1 to about 100 predetermined directions.
  • the light extracted in at least one predetermined direction may be extracted in a pattern.
  • the light extracted in at least one predetermined direction may be extracted uniformly (at the same or nearly the same intensity) or non-uniformly from the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • Light may also be extracted in random directions from the viscoelastic lightguide and/or at various random intensities from the lightguide.
  • FIGS. 7-11 show perspective views of exemplary viscoelastic lightguides and how light may be extracted therefrom.
  • the viscoelastic lightguides shown in FIGS. 7-11 are depicted generically as sheets having square to rectangular shapes. Many other three-dimensional shapes are contemplated as described below.
  • FIG. 7 shows a perspective view of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 700 wherein light represented by rays 705 is extracted in a predetermined direction from the lightguide.
  • FIG. 8 shows a perspective view of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 800 wherein light represented by rays 805 is extracted in two predetermined directions from the lightguide. Light represented by rays 805 is also extracted in a pattern.
  • FIG. 9 shows a perspective view of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 900 wherein light represented by rays 905 is extracted randomly from the lightguide.
  • FIG. 10 shows a perspective view of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 1000 .
  • Predetermined shape 1005 is shown by a dotted line and shaded area of surface 1010 of the lightguide.
  • Light represented by rays 1015 is extracted from viscoelastic lightguide 1000 such that the predetermined shape is illuminated.
  • the predetermined shape may comprise one or more discrete areas of the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • Light may be extracted from one or more discrete areas of the viscoelastic lightguide, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more discrete areas, or from 1 to about 5 discrete areas, from 1 to about 50 discrete areas, or from 1 to about 500 discrete areas.
  • FIG. 11 shows a perspective view of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 1100 .
  • Predetermined shape 1105 is shown by a dotted line and shaded area of surface 1110 .
  • Predetermined shapes 1115 within predetermined shape 1105 are shown by dotted lines and lightly shaded areas.
  • Light represented by rays 1120 is extracted at different intensities such that light extracted from predetermined shapes 1115 is extracted at a higher intensity as compared to light extracted from predetermined shape 1105 . In this way, predetermined shape 1105 is illuminated and predetermined shapes 1115 are illuminated at higher intensities.
  • FIG. 12 illustrates how light may be extracted from an exemplary viscoelastic lightguide shaped as a film or sheet.
  • FIG. 12 shows a perspective view of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 1200 comprising opposing major surfaces 1205 a and 1205 b (not shown) and edge surfaces 1225 a , 1225 b , and 1225 c (not shown).
  • light may be extracted from one or some combination of surfaces 1205 a , 1205 b , or 1225 a - c .
  • light may be extracted only from major surface 1205 a as shown by ray 1220 a .
  • light may be extracted only from edge surface 1225 b .
  • Light which enters the viscoelastic lightguide is shown by ray 1215 .
  • FIG. 13 shows a schematic cross section of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 1300 comprising input edge 1305 and opposing edge surface 1310 having a lenticular surface for directing light in one or more predetermined directions.
  • Light emitted by a light source (not shown) and represented by ray 1315 enters the lightguide (at a first surface) and is transported by total internal reflection within the lightguide until it is extracted from opposing edge surface 1310 (opposing second surface).
  • Light emitted by a light source may also enter the viscoelastic lightguide at a first surface of the lightguide and be extracted at a second surface, wherein the first and second surfaces are from about 45 to about 135° relative to each other.
  • a surface of the viscoelastic lightguide is microstructured to form air release channels.
  • microstructured refers to a surface having one or more features that are microscopic (from about 1 to about 100 um) in at least one dimension. These channels can facilitate air egress so that few air bubbles remain trapped between a viscoelastic lightguide and a substrate.
  • the microstructured surface with air release channels is may be useful with a viscoelastic lightguide that comprises a PSA.
  • a PSA viscoelastic lightguide may have a composition and/or surface structure the same or nearly the same as ControltacTM products available from 3MTM Company. In this way, a user can dispose the viscoelastic lightguide and substrate in some initial position and slide the two relative to each other such that desired positioning is obtained.
  • the microstructure of the microstructured surface may remain and/or change over time.
  • the microstructured surface with air release channels may comprise a variety of shapes including hemispheres, prisms (such as square prisms, rectangular prisms, cylindrical prisms and other similar polygonal features), pyramids, ellipses, grooves (e.g., V-grooves), channels, and the like. Grooves and channels may or may not extend to the edge of a predetermined area.
  • Another exemplary microstructured surface is described in US 2007/0292650 A1 (Suzuki) wherein a microstructured adhesive layer surface has one or more grooves that exist only in an inner area of the surface and are not open at side surfaces of the layer.
  • These grooves may be in the form of a straight line, branched straight lines, cross, circle, oval, or polygon as viewed from above, and where each form may be composed of plural discontinuous grooves. These grooves may have a width of from 5 to 100 micrometers and a depth of from 5 to 50 micrometers.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide is generally in contact with at least one medium.
  • the medium may comprise air or a substrate, and substrates may be polymeric film, metal, glass, and/or fabric. Particular substrates are described below for a variety of exemplary constructions. For the purpose of convenience, a viscoelastic lightguide in contact with a substrate is described below, but this substrate may comprise any type of medium including air.
  • the law of refraction and the principle of total internal reflection can be applied as described above to determine the amount of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide given a particular substrate directly in contact with the lightguide.
  • the amount of light extracted from the lightguide and by the substrate may be less than about 0.5%, less than about 1%, less than about 2%, less than about 5%, less than about 10%, less than about 20%, less than about 30%, less than about 40%, less than about 50%, less than about 60%, less than about 70%, less than about 80%, or less than about 90% relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide.
  • the amount of light extracted from the lightguide by the substrate may be greater than about 10%, greater than about 20%, greater than about 30%, greater than about 40%, greater than about 50%, greater than about 60%, greater than about 70%, greater than about 80%, or greater than about 90% relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide.
  • the amount of light extracted from the lightguide may be from about 10 to about 50%, from about 20 to about 50%, from about 30 to about 50%, from about 50 to about 70%, from about 50 to about 80%, or from about 10 to about 90% relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide.
  • the law of refraction and the principle of total internal reflection can be applied as described above to determine the direction of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide given a particular substrate in contact with the lightguide.
  • the transmittance angle for light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide by the substrate may be determined for a given incident angle.
  • the transmittance angle for light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide by the substrate may be from greater than about 5° to less than about 95°, greater than about 5° to less than about 60°, or greater than about 5° to less than about 30°.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may have a refractive index greater than that of the substrate.
  • the refractive index of the viscoelastic lightguide may be greater than about 0.002, greater than about 0.005, greater than about 0.01, greater than about 0.02, greater than about 0.03, greater than about 0.04, greater than about 0.05, greater than about 0.1, greater than about 0.2, greater than about 0.3, greater than about 0.4, or greater than about 0.5, as compared to the refractive index of the substrate.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may have a refractive index less than that of the substrate.
  • the refractive index of the viscoelastic lightguide may be less than about 0.002, less than about 0.005, less than about 0.01, less than about 0.02, less than about 0.03, less than about 0.04, less than about 0.05, less than about 0.1, less than about 0.2, less than about 0.3, less than about 0.4, or less than about 0.5, as compared to the refractive index of the substrate.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide and the substrate may have the same or nearly the same refractive index such that light can be extracted into the substrate with little or no change to the light.
  • the refractive index difference of the viscoelastic lightguide and the substrate may be from about 0.001 to less than about 0.002.
  • the refractive index difference of the viscoelastic lightguide and the substrate may be from about 0.002 to about 0.5, from about 0.005 to about 0.5, from about 0.01 to about 0.5, from about 0.02 to about 0.5, from about 0.03 to about 0.5, from about 0.04 to about 0.5, from about 0.05 to about 0.5, from about 0.1 to about 0.5, from about 0.2 to about 0.5, from about 0.3 to about 0.5, or from about 0.4 to about 0.5.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may have any bulk three-dimensional shape as is needed for a given application.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may be in the form of a square or rectangular layer, sheet, film, etc. as shown in FIGS. 7-11 .
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may be cut or divided into shapes as described below.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may also be tapered such that it is thicker at one end as compared to an opposing end; tapered shapes are sometimes referred to as wedges or pseudo-wedges as described in the Boyd et al., Gardiner et al., Kinder et al., and Sahlin et al. references cited above.
  • the thickness of the viscoelastic lightguide is not particularly limited as long as it can function as desired.
  • the thickness of the viscoelastic lightguide may be selected based on or in conjunction with the light source. For example, design parameters may limit or even require that a particular light source(s) be used, and there may be a minimum amount, or range of amounts, of light that is required to enter the viscoelastic lightguide. Thus, the thickness of the viscoelastic lightguide may be selected so that the required amount of light from a given light source can enter the lightguide.
  • a maximum thickness of the viscoelastic lightguide may be required for use in optical devices designed to be particularly thin. Exemplary thicknesses for the viscoelastic lightguide range from about 0.4 mil to about 1000 mil, from about 1 mil to about 300 mil, from about 1 mil to about 60 mil, or from about 0.5 mil to about 30 mil.
  • the amount and direction of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide may be controlled, at the very least, by the shape, size, number, arrangement, etc. of the features, the refractive indices of the viscoelastic lightguide and any optional substrate(s), the shape and size of the viscoelastic lightguide, and the angular distribution of light that is allowed to enter the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • variables may be selected such that less than about 0.5%, less than about 1%, less than about 2%, less than about 5%, less than about 10%, less than about 20%, less than about 30%, less than about 40%, less than about 50%, less than about 60%, less than about 70%, less than about 80%, or less than about 90% of light is extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide.
  • variables may be selected such that greater than about 10%, greater than about 20%, greater than about 30%, greater than about 40%, greater than about 50%, greater than about 60%, greater than about 70%, greater than about 80%, or greater than about 90% of light is extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide.
  • variables may be selected such that from about 10 to about 50%, from about 20 to about 50%, from about 30 to about 50%, from about 50 to about 70%, from about 50 to about 80%, or from about 10 to about 90% of light is extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide comprises one or more viscoelastic materials.
  • viscoelastic materials exhibit both elastic and viscous behavior when undergoing deformation.
  • Elastic characteristics refer to the ability of a material to return to its original shape after a transient load is removed.
  • One measure of elasticity for a material is referred to as the tensile set value which is a function of the elongation remaining after the material has been stretched and subsequently allowed to recover (destretch) under the same conditions by which it was stretched. If a material has a tensile set value of 0%, then it has returned to its original length upon relaxation, whereas if the tensile set value is 100%, then the material is twice its original length upon relaxation.
  • Tensile set values may be measured using ASTM D412.
  • Useful viscoelastic materials may have tensile set values of greater than about 10%, greater than about 30%, or greater than about 50%; or from about 5 to about 70%, from about 10 to about 70%, from about 30 to about 70%, or from about 10 to about 60%.
  • Viscous materials that are Newtonian liquids have viscous characteristics that obey Newton's law which states that stress increases linearly with shear gradient. A liquid does not recover its shape as the shear gradient is removed. Viscous characteristics of useful viscoelastic materials include flowability of the material under reasonable temperatures such that the material does not decompose.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may have properties that facilitate sufficient contact or wetting with at least a portion of a substrate such that the viscoelastic lightguide and the substrate are optically coupled. Light can then be extracted out of the viscoelastic lightguide and into the substrate.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide is generally soft, compliant and flexible.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may have an elastic modulus (or storage modulus G′) such that sufficient contact can be obtained, and a viscous modulus (or loss modulus G′′) such that the layer doesn't flow undesirably, and a damping coefficient (G′′/G′, tan D) for the relative degree of damping of the layer.
  • Useful viscoelastic materials may have a storage modulus, G′, of less than about 300,000 Pa, measured at 10 rad/sec and a temperature of from about 20 to about 22° C.
  • Useful viscoelastic materials may have a storage modulus, G′, of from about 30 to about 300,000 Pa, measured at 10 rad/sec and a temperature of from about 20 to about 22° C.
  • Useful viscoelastic materials may have a storage modulus, G′, of from about 30 to about 150,000 Pa, measured at 10 rad/sec and a temperature of from about 20 to about 22° C.
  • Useful viscoelastic materials may have a storage modulus, G′, of from about 30 to about 30,000 Pa, measured at 10 rad/sec and a temperature of from about 20 to about 22° C.
  • Useful viscoelastic materials may have a storage modulus, G′, of from about 30 to about 150,000 Pa, measured at 10 rad/sec and a temperature of from about 20 to about 22° C., and a loss tangent (tan d) of from about 0.4 to about 3.
  • Viscoelastic properties of materials can be measured using Dynamic Mechanical Analysis according to, for example, ASTM D4065, D4440, and D5279.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a PSA layer as described in the Dalquist criterion line (as described in Handbook of Pressure Sensitive Adhesive Technology, Second Ed., D. Satas, ed., Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York, 1989.)
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may have a particular peel force or at least exhibit a peel force within a particular range.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may have a 90° peel force of from about 50 to about 3000 g/in, from about 300 to about 3000 g/in, or from about 500 to about 3000 g/in. Peel force may be measured using a peel tester from IMASS.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide comprises an optically clear lightguide having high light transmittance of from about 80 to about 100%, from about 90 to about 100%, from about 95 to about 100%, or from about 98 to about 100% over at least a portion of the visible light spectrum (about 400 to about 700 nm).
  • the viscoelastic lightguide has a haze value of less than about 5%, less than about 3%, or less than about 1%.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide has a haze value of from about 0.01 to less than about 5%, from about 0.01 to less than about 3%, or from about 0.01 to less than about 1%. Haze values in transmission can be determined using a haze meter according to ASTM D1003.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide comprises an optically clear lightguide having high light transmittance and a low haze value.
  • High light transmittance may be from about 90 to about 100%, from about 95 to about 100%, or from about 99 to about 100% over at least a portion of the visible light spectrum (about 400 to about 700 nm), and haze values may be from about 0.01 to less than about 5%, from about 0.01 to less than about 3%, or from about 0.01 to less than about 1%.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may also have a light transmittance of from about 50 to about 100%.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide is hazy and diffuses light, particularly visible light.
  • a hazy viscoelastic lightguide may have a haze value of greater than about 5%, greater than about 20%, or greater than about 50%.
  • a hazy viscoelastic lightguide may have a haze value of from about 5 to about 90%, from about 5 to about 50%, or from about 20 to about 50%.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may be translucent in that it reflects and transmits light.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may have a refractive index in the range of from about 1.3 to about 2.6, 1.4 to about 1.7, or from about 1.5 to about 1.7.
  • the particular refractive index or range of refractive indices selected for the viscoelastic lightguide may depend on the overall design of the optical device, e.g., the presence or absence of substrates in contact with the lightguide and the particular application in which the device may be used.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide generally comprises at least one polymer.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may comprise at least one PSA.
  • PSAs are useful for adhering together adherends and exhibit properties such as: (1) aggressive and permanent tack, (2) adherence with no more than finger pressure, (3) sufficient ability to hold onto an adherend, and (4) sufficient cohesive strength to be cleanly removable from the adherend.
  • Materials that have been found to function well as pressure sensitive adhesives are polymers designed and formulated to exhibit the requisite viscoelastic properties resulting in a desired balance of tack, peel adhesion, and shear holding power. Obtaining the proper balance of properties is not a simple process.
  • a quantitative description of PSAs can be found in the Dahlquist reference cited above.
  • PSAs include those based on natural rubbers, synthetic rubbers, styrene block copolymers, (meth)acrylic block copolymers, polyvinyl ethers, polyolefins, and poly(meth)acrylates.
  • (meth)acrylic refers to both acrylic and methacrylic species and likewise for (meth)acrylate.
  • PSAs include (meth)acrylates, rubbers, thermoplastic elastomers, silicones, urethanes, and combinations thereof.
  • the PSA is based on a (meth)acrylic PSA or at least one poly(meth)acrylate.
  • (meth)acrylate refers to both acrylate and methacrylate groups.
  • Particularly preferred poly(meth)acrylates are derived from: (A) at least one monoethylenically unsaturated alkyl(meth)acrylate monomer; and (B) at least one monoethylenically unsaturated free-radically copolymerizable reinforcing monomer.
  • the reinforcing monomer has a homopolymer glass transition temperature (Tg) higher than that of the alkyl(meth)acrylate monomer and is one that increases the Tg and cohesive strength of the resultant copolymer.
  • Tg homopolymer glass transition temperature
  • copolymer refers to polymers containing two or more different monomers, including terpolymers, tetrapolymers, etc.
  • Monomer A which is a monoethylenically unsaturated alkyl(meth)acrylate, contributes to the flexibility and tack of the copolymer.
  • monomer A has a homopolymer Tg of no greater than about 0° C.
  • the alkyl group of the (meth)acrylate has an average of about 4 to about 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably, an average of about 4 to about 14 carbon atoms.
  • the alkyl group can optionally contain oxygen atoms in the chain thereby forming ethers or alkoxy ethers, for example.
  • Examples of monomer A include, but are not limited to, 2-methylbutyl acrylate, isooctyl acrylate, lauryl acrylate, 4-methyl-2-pentyl acrylate, isoamyl acrylate, sec-butyl acrylate, n-butyl acrylate, n-hexyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, n-octyl acrylate, n-decyl acrylate, isodecyl acrylate, isodecyl methacrylate, and isononyl acrylate.
  • Benzyl acrylate may also be used.
  • poly-ethoxylated or -propoxylated methoxy(meth)acrylates such as acrylates of CARBOWAX (commercially available from Union Carbide) and NK ester AM90G (commercially available from Shin Nakamura Chemical, Ltd., Japan).
  • Preferred monoethylenically unsaturated (meth)acrylates that can be used as monomer A include isooctyl acrylate, 2-ethyl-hexyl acrylate, and n-butyl acrylate. Combinations of various monomers categorized as an A monomer can be used to make the copolymer.
  • Monomer B which is a monoethylenically unsaturated free-radically copolymerizable reinforcing monomer, increases the Tg and cohesive strength of the copolymer.
  • monomer B has a homopolymer Tg of at least about 10° C., for example, from about 10 to about 50° C. More preferably, monomer B is a reinforcing (meth)acrylic monomer, including an acrylic acid, a methacrylic acid, an acrylamide, or a (meth)acrylate.
  • Examples of monomer B include, but are not limited to, acrylamides, such as acrylamide, methacrylamide, N-methyl acrylamide, N-ethyl acrylamide, N-hydroxyethyl acrylamide, diacetone acrylamide, N,N-dimethyl acrylamide, N,N-diethyl acrylamide, N-ethyl-N-aminoethyl acrylamide, N-ethyl-N-hydroxyethyl acrylamide, N,N-dihydroxyethyl acrylamide, t-butyl acrylamide, N,N-dimethylaminoethyl acrylamide, and N-octyl acrylamide.
  • acrylamides such as acrylamide, methacrylamide, N-methyl acrylamide, N-ethyl acrylamide, N-hydroxyethyl acrylamide, diacetone acrylamide, N,N-dimethyl acrylamide, N,N-diethyl acrylamide
  • monomer B examples include itaconic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, 2,2-(diethoxy)ethyl acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate or methacrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl acrylate or methacrylate, methyl methacrylate, isobornyl acrylate, 2-(phenoxy)ethyl acrylate or methacrylate, biphenylyl acrylate, t-butylphenyl acrylate, cyclohexyl acrylate, dimethyladamantyl acrylate, 2-naphthyl acrylate, phenyl acrylate, N-vinyl formamide, N-vinyl acetamide, N-vinyl pyrrolidone, and N-vinyl caprolactam.
  • Preferred reinforcing acrylic monomers that can be used as monomer B include acrylic acid and acrylamide. Combinations of various reinforcing monoethylenically unsaturated monomers categorized as a B monomer can be used to make the copolymer.
  • the (meth)acrylate copolymer is formulated to have a resultant Tg of less than about 0° C. and more preferably, less than about ⁇ 10° C.
  • Such (meth)acrylate copolymers preferably include about 60 to about 98% by weight of at least one monomer A and about 2 to about 40% by weight of at least one monomer B, both relative to the total weight of the (meth)acrylate copolymer.
  • the (meth)acrylate copolymer has about 85 to about 98% by weight of at least one monomer A and about 2 to about 15% by weight of at least one monomer B, both relative to the total weight of the (meth)acrylate copolymer.
  • Useful rubber-based PSAs are generally of two classes, natural rubber-based or synthetic rubber-based.
  • Useful natural rubber-based PSAs generally contain masticated natural rubber, for example, from about 20 to about 75% by weight of one or more tackifying resins, from about 25 to about 80% by weight of natural rubber, and typically from about 0.5 to about 2.0% by weight of one or more antioxidants, all relative to the total weight of the masticated rubber.
  • Natural rubber may range in grade from a light pale crepe grade to a darker ribbed smoked sheet and includes such examples as CV-60, a controlled viscosity rubber grade and SMR-5, a ribbed smoked sheet rubber grade.
  • Tackifying resins used with natural rubbers generally include but are not limited to wood rosin and its hydrogenated derivatives; terpene resins of various softening points, and petroleum-based resins, such as, the ESCOREZ 1300 series of C5 aliphatic olefin-derived resins from Exxon.
  • Antioxidants may be used with natural rubbers in order to retard oxidative attack on the rubber which can result in loss of cohesive strength of the adhesive.
  • Useful antioxidants include but are not limited to amines, such as N—N′ di-beta-naphthyl-1,4-phenylenediamine, available as AGERITE Resin D from R.T.
  • Vanderbilt Co., Inc. phenolics, such as 2,5-di-(t-amyl)hydroquinone, available as SANTOVAR A, available from Monsanto Chemical Co.; tetrakis[methylene 3-(3′,5′-di-tert-butyl-4′-hydroxyphenyl)propianate]methane, available as IRGANOX 1010 from Ciba-Geigy Corp.; 2,2′-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-tert butyl phenol), known as Antioxidant 2246; and dithiocarbamates, such as zinc dithiodibutyl carbamate. Curing agents may be used to at least partially vulcanize (crosslink) the PSA.
  • Useful synthetic rubber-based PSAs include adhesives that are generally rubbery elastomers, which are either self-tacky or non-tacky and require tackifiers.
  • Self-tacky synthetic rubber PSAs include, for example, butyl rubber, a copolymer of isobutylene with less than 3 percent isoprene, polyisobutylene, a homopolymer of isoprene, polybutadiene, or styrene/butadiene rubber.
  • Butyl rubber PSAs often contain an antioxidant such as zinc dibutyl dithiocarbamate. Polyisobutylene PSAs do not usually contain antioxidants.
  • Synthetic rubber PSAs which generally require tackifiers, are also generally easier to melt process as compared to natural rubber PSAs which typically having very high molecular weights. They comprise polybutadiene or styrene/butadiene rubber, from 10 parts to 200 parts of a tackifier, and generally from 0.5 to 2.0 parts per 100 parts rubber of an antioxidant such as IRGANOX 1010.
  • An example of a synthetic rubber is AMERIPOL 101 1A, a styrene/butadiene rubber available from BF Goodrich.
  • Tackifiers that may be used with synthetic rubber PSAs include derivatives of rosins such as FORAL 85, a stabilized rosin ester from Hercules, Inc.; the SNOWTACK series of gum rosins from Tenneco; the AQUATAC series of tall oil rosins from Sylvachem; synthetic hydrocarbon resins such as the PICCOLYTE A series, polyterpenes from Hercules, Inc.; the ESCOREZ 1300 series of C5 aliphatic olefin-derived resins; and the ESCOREZ 2000 Series of C9 aromatic/aliphatic olefin-derived resins. Curing agents may be added to at least partially vulcanize (crosslink) the PSA.
  • rosins such as FORAL 85, a stabilized rosin ester from Hercules, Inc.
  • SNOWTACK series of gum rosins from Tenneco the AQUATAC series of tall oil rosins from Sylvachem
  • thermoplastic elastomer PSAs include styrene block copolymer PSAs which generally comprise elastomers of the A-B or A-B-A type, where A represents a thermoplastic polystyrene block and B represents a rubbery block of polyisoprene, polybutadiene, or poly(ethylene/butylene), and resins.
  • block copolymers useful in block copolymer PSAs include linear, radial, star and tapered styrene-isoprene block copolymers such as KRATON D1107P, available from Shell Chemical Co., and EUROPRENE SOL TE 9110, available from EniChem Elastomers Americas, Inc.; linear styrene-(ethylene-butylene) block copolymers such as KRATON G1657, available from Shell Chemical Co.; linear styrene-(ethylene-propylene) block copolymers such as KRATON G1750X, available from Shell Chemical Co.; and linear, radial, and star styrene-butadiene block copolymers such as KRATON D1118X, available from Shell Chemical Co., and EUROPRENE SOL TE 6205, available from EniChem Elastomers Americas, Inc.
  • the polystyrene blocks tend to form domains in the shape of spheroids,
  • Resins that associate with the rubber phase may be used with thermoplastic elastomer PSAs if the elastomer itself is not tacky enough.
  • rubber phase associating resins include aliphatic olefin-derived resins, such as the ESCOREZ 1300 series and the WINGTACK series, available from Goodyear; rosin esters, such as the FORAL series and the STAYBELITE Ester 10, both available from Hercules, Inc.; hydrogenated hydrocarbons, such as the ESCOREZ 5000 series, available from Exxon; polyterpenes, such as the PICCOLYTE A series; and terpene phenolic resins derived from petroleum or terpentine sources, such as PICCOFYN A100, available from Hercules, Inc.
  • thermoplastic phase associating resins include polyaromatics, such as the PICCO 6000 series of aromatic hydrocarbon resins, available from Hercules, Inc.; coumarone-indene resins, such as the CUMAR series, available from Neville; and other high-solubility parameter resins derived from coal tar or petroleum and having softening points above about 85° C., such as the AMOCO 18 series of alphamethyl styrene resins, available from Amoco, PICCOVAR 130 alkyl aromatic polyindene resin, available from Hercules, Inc., and the PICCOTEX series of alphamethyl styrene/vinyl toluene resins, available from Hercules.
  • polyaromatics such as the PICCO 6000 series of aromatic hydrocarbon resins, available from Hercules, Inc.
  • coumarone-indene resins such as the CUMAR series, available from Neville
  • Useful silicone PSAs include polydiorganosiloxanes and polydiorganosiloxane polyoxamides.
  • Useful silicone PSAs include silicone-containing resins formed from a hyrosilylation reaction between one or more components having silicon-bonded hydrogen and aliphatic unsaturation. Examples of silicon-bonded hydrogen components include high molecular weight polydimethylsiloxane or polydimethyldiphenylsiloxane, and that contain residual silanol functionality (SiOH) on the ends of the polymer chain.
  • aliphatic unsaturation components include siloxanes functionalized with two or more (meth)acrylate groups or block copolymers comprising polydiorganosiloxane soft segments and urea terminated hard segments. Hydrosilylation may be carried out using platinum catalysts.
  • Useful silicone PSAs may comprise a polymer or gum and an optional tackifying resin.
  • the tackifying resin is generally a three-dimensional silicate structure that is endcapped with trimethylsiloxy groups (OSiMe 3 ) and also contains some residual silanol functionality.
  • OSiMe 3 trimethylsiloxy groups
  • Examples of tackifying resins include SR 545, from General Electric Co., Silicone Resins Division, Waterford, N.Y., and MQD-32-2 from Shin-Etsu Silicones of America, Inc., Torrance, Calif.
  • Useful silicone PSAs may also comprise a polydiorganosiloxane polyoxamide and an optional tackifier as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,361,474 (Sherman et al.).
  • the polydiorganosiloxane polyoxamide may comprise at least two repeat units of Formula I:
  • each R 1 is independently an alkyl, haloalkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, aryl, or aryl substituted with an alkyl, alkoxy, or halo, wherein at least 50 percent of the R 1 groups are methyl; each Y is independently an alkylene, aralkylene, or a combination thereof; G is a divalent residue equal to a diamine of formula R 3 HN-G-NHR 3 minus the two —NHR 3 groups; R 3 is hydrogen or alkyl or R 3 taken together with G and with the nitrogen to which they are both attached forms a heterocyclic group; n is independently an integer of 40 to 1500; and p is an integer of 1 to 10; and an asterisk (*) indicates a site of attachment of the repeat unit to another group in the copolymer.
  • the copolymer may have a first repeat unit where p is equal to 1 and a second repeat unit where p is at least 2.
  • G may comprise an alkylene, heteroalkylene, arylene, aralkylene, polydiorganosiloxane, or a combination thereof.
  • the integer n may be an integer of 40 to 500.
  • Useful tackifiers include silicone tackifying resins as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,090,922 B2 (Zhou et al.). Some of these silicone-containing PSAs may be heat activated.
  • the PSA may be crosslinked to the extent that the crosslinks do not interfere with desired properties of the viscoelastic lightguide. Generally, the PSA may be crosslinked to the extent that the crosslinks do not interfere with the viscous characteristics of the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • Crosslinking is used to build molecular weight and strength of the PSA. The degree of crosslinking may be selected based upon the application for which the lightguide is intended.
  • Crosslinking agents may be used to form chemical crosslinks, physical crosslinks or a combination thereof. Chemical crosslinks include covalent bonds and ionic bonds. Covalent crosslinks may be formed by incorporating a multi-functional monomer in the polymerization process, followed by curing using, e.g., ultraviolet radiation, heat, ionizing radiation, moisture, or a combination thereof.
  • Physical crosslinks include noncovalent bonds and are generally thermally reversible.
  • Examples of physical crosslinks include high Tg (i.e., those having a Tg higher than room temperature, preferably higher than 70° C.) polymer segments included, for example, in thermoplastic elastomer block copolymers. Such segments aggregate to form physical crosslinks that dissipate upon heating. If a physically crosslinked PSA is used such as a thermoplastic elastomer, the embossing typically is carried out at temperature below, or even substantially below, the temperature at which the adhesive flows.
  • Hard segments include the styrene macromers of U.S. Pat. No.
  • crosslinking agents are also disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,737,559 (Kellen), U.S. Pat. No. 5,506,279 (Babu et al.), and U.S. Pat. No. 6,083,856 (Joseph et al.).
  • the crosslinking agent can be a photocrosslinking agent, which, upon exposure to ultraviolet radiation (e.g., radiation having a wavelength of from about 250 to about 400 nm), causes the copolymer to crosslink.
  • the crosslinking agent is used in an effective amount, by which is meant an amount that is sufficient to cause crosslinking of the PSA to provide adequate cohesive strength to produce the desired final adhesion properties.
  • the crosslinking agent is used in an amount of about 0.1 part to about 10 parts by weight, based on the total weight of monomers.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a PSA formed from a (meth)acrylate block copolymer as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,255,920 B2 (Everaerts et al.).
  • these (meth)acrylate block copolymers comprise: at least two A block polymeric units that are the reaction product of a first monomer composition comprising an alkyl methacrylate, an aralkyl methacrylate, an aryl methacrylate, or a combination thereof, each A block having a Tg of at least 50° C., the methacrylate block copolymer comprising from 20 to 50 weight percent A block; and at least one B block polymeric unit that is the reaction product of a second monomer composition comprising an alkyl(meth)acrylate, a heteroalkyl(meth)acrylate, a vinyl ester, or a combination thereof, the B block having a Tg no greater than 20° C., the (meth)acryl
  • the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a clear acrylic PSA, for example, those available as transfer tapes such as VHBTM Acrylic Tape 4910F from 3M Company and 3MTM Optically Clear Laminating Adhesives (8140 and 8180 series).
  • a clear acrylic PSA for example, those available as transfer tapes such as VHBTM Acrylic Tape 4910F from 3M Company and 3MTM Optically Clear Laminating Adhesives (8140 and 8180 series).
  • the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a PSA formed from at least one monomer containing a substituted or an unsubstituted aromatic moiety as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,663,978 B1 (Olson et al.):
  • Ar is an aromatic group which is unsubstituted or substituted with a substituent selected from the group consisting of Br y and R 6 z wherein y represents the number of bromine substituents attached to the aromatic group and is an integer of from 0 to 3, R 6 is a straight or branched alkyl of from 2 to 12 carbons, and z represents the number of R 6 substituents attached to the aromatic ring and is either 0 or 1 provided that both y and z are not zero; X is either O or S; n is from 0 to 3; R 4 is an unsubstituted straight or branched alkyl linking group of from 2 to 12 carbons; and R 5 is either H or CH 3 .
  • the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a copolymer as described in U.S. Ser. No. 11/875,194 (63656US002, Determan et al.), comprising (a) monomer units having pendant bephenyl groups and (b) alkyl(meth)acrylate monomer units.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a copolymer as described in U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/983,735 (63760US002, Determan et al.), comprising (a) monomer units having pendant carbazole groups and (b) alkyl (meth)acrylate monomer units.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide comprises an adhesive as described in U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/986,298 (63108US002, Schaffer et al.), comprising a block copolymer dispersed in an adhesive matrix to form a Lewis acid-base pair.
  • the block copolymer comprises an AB block copolymer, and the A block phase separates to form microdomains within the B block/adhesive matrix.
  • the adhesive matrix may comprise a copolymer of an alkyl(meth)acrylate and a (meth)acrylate having pendant acid functionality, and the block copolymer may comprise a styrene-acrylate copolymer.
  • microdomains may be large enough to forward scatter incident light, but not so large that they backscatter incident light. Typically these microdomains are larger than the wavelength of visible light (about 400 to about 700 nm). In some embodiments the microdomain size is from about 1.0 to about 10 um.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may comprise a stretch releasable PSA.
  • Stretch releasable PSAs are PSAs that can be removed from a substrate if they are stretched at or nearly at a zero degree angle.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide or a stretch release PSA used in the viscoelastic lightguide has a shear storage modulus of less than about 10 MPa when measured at 1 rad/sec and ⁇ 17° C., or from about 0.03 to about 10 MPa when measured at 1 rad/sec and ⁇ 17° C.
  • Stretch releasable PSAs may be used if disassembling, reworking, or recycling is desired.
  • the stretch releasable PSA may comprise a silicone-based PSA as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,569,521 B1 (Sheridan et al.) or U.S. Provisional Application Nos. 61/020,423 (63934US002, Sherman et al.) and 61/036,501 (64151US002, Determan et al.).
  • silicone-based PSAs include compositions of an MQ tackifying resin and a silicone polymer.
  • the stretch releasable PSA may comprise an MQ tackifying resin and an elastomeric silicone polymer selected from the group consisting of urea-based silicone copolymers, oxamide-based silicone copolymers, amide-based silicone copolymers, urethane-based silicone copolymers, and mixtures thereof.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may comprise an aerogel.
  • An aerogel is a low-density solid state material derived from gel in which the liquid component of the gel has been replaced with air. Silica, alumina and carbon aerogels are exemplary aerogels that may be used.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide can optionally include one or more additives such as filler, particles, plasticizers, chain transfer agents, initiators, antioxidants, stabilizers, fire retardants, viscosity modifying agents, foaming agents, antistats, colorants such as dyes and pigments, fluorescent dyes and pigments, phosphorescent dyes and pigments, fibrous reinforcing agents, and woven and non-woven fabrics.
  • additives such as filler, particles, plasticizers, chain transfer agents, initiators, antioxidants, stabilizers, fire retardants, viscosity modifying agents, foaming agents, antistats, colorants such as dyes and pigments, fluorescent dyes and pigments, phosphorescent dyes and pigments, fibrous reinforcing agents, and woven and non-woven fabrics.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may be made hazy and/or diffusive by including particles such as nanoparticles (diameter less than about 1 um), microspheres (diameter 1 um or greater), or fibers. Exemplary nanoparticles include TiO 2 . Haze and diffusive properties can also be incorporated into the viscoelastic lightguide by incorporating bubbles into the lightguide. The bubbles may have a diameter of from about 0.01 to about 1 um. Bubbles may be introduced by adding, e.g., foaming agents. Examples of additional additives that may be added to the viscoelastic lightguide include glass beads, reflective particles, and conductive particles.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may comprise a PSA matrix and particles as described in U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/097,685 (64740US002, Sherman et al.), comprising an optically clear PSA and silicon resin particles having a refractive index less than that of the PSA.
  • the presence of particles, bubbles, air, etc. increases the scatter and uniformity of light.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide provides an image as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 .
  • An image may be made by structuring a surface of the lightguide as described above.
  • surface 1010 of FIG. 10 may be structured to provide the image.
  • An image may be made by including or embedding material such as particles in the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the image may also be made by forming an image on a surface of the lightguide, e.g., on surface 1010 . More than one surface of the lightguide may comprise an image.
  • Surfaces of the viscoelastic lightguide may be imaged by printing or marking, e.g., by inkjet printing, laser printing, electrostatic printing and the like.
  • Images may be monochrome such as black and white, or they may be colored.
  • the materials used to form the images may reflect all or some light within a particular range of wavelengths, e.g., in the visible region.
  • the materials used to form the images may function as color filters allowing light within a particular range of wavelengths, e.g., in the visible region, to be transmitted.
  • Exemplary materials include colorants such as pigments and dyes.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide provides an image by from holes in the lightguide. Holes may be made, e.g., by drilling through the lightguide.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide is adapted to receive at least some light emitted by the light source.
  • a specially designed input surface may not be needed because the light source can be pressed into the viscoelastic lightguide such that optical coupling occurs.
  • the light source may stick to the viscoelastic lightguide, for example, if the lightguide comprises a PSA.
  • the light source may be embedded in the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide comprises an input surface adapted to receive light from the light source.
  • the input surface may have a variety of topographies depending on the optical coupling means and/or the particular light source.
  • the input surface may have an appropriate curvature.
  • the input edge comprising the input surface may have a particular cavity, for example a concave hemispherical cavity, to receive a convex lens of a light source.
  • the input surface may have refractive structures such as prisms or lenses to optically couple light from the light source into the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • an extractor article disposed between the light source and the input edge may be used to facilitate optical coupling with at least some of the light emitted by the light source.
  • Useful extractor articles may have an appropriate curvature for extracting light from the light source.
  • a coupling material for matching refractive indices of the viscoelastic lightguide and some element of the light source may be used.
  • a crosslinkable material may be used for attaching the viscoelastic lightguide to some part of the light source, and subsequently cured using heat and/or light to form the crosslinked material.
  • the coupling material may comprise silicone gel.
  • the silicone gel may be crosslinked.
  • the silicone gel may be mixed with a silicone oil.
  • the silicone gel may comprise one or more silicone materials such as, for example, dimethylsilicone, diphenylsilicone, or phenylmethylsilicone.
  • the silicone gel may comprise phenylmethylsilicone moieties that are cross-linked.
  • the silicone gel may comprise phenylmethylsilicone moieties which are cross-linked and phenylmethylsilicone oil.
  • the silicone gel may comprise phenylmethylsilicone moieties which are cross-linked and phenylmethylsilicone oil in a weight ratio from 0.2:1 to 5:1.
  • the silicone gel may comprise crosslinked phenylmethylsilicone. Exemplary use of silicone gels is described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,315,418 (DiZio et al.).
  • the light source may be optically coupled to the viscoelastic lightguide such that at least some of the light from the light source can enter the lightguide.
  • a light source may be optically coupled to the viscoelastic lightguide such that greater than 1, greater than 10, greater than 20, greater than 30, greater than 40, greater than 50, greater than 90%, or about 100% of light emitted by the light source enters the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • a light source may be optically coupled to the viscoelastic lightguide such that from about 1 to about 10%, from about 1 to about 20%, from about 1 to about 30%, from about 1 to about 40%, from about 1 to about 50%, from about 1 to about 100%, from about 1 to about 100%, from about 50 to about 100%, or from about 1 to about 100% of light emitted by the light source enters the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the light source may emit light having a random or a particular angular distribution.
  • the light source may comprise any suitable light source.
  • Exemplary light sources include linear light sources such as cold cathode fluorescent lamps and point light sources such as light emitting diode (LEDs).
  • Exemplary light sources also include organic light-emitting devices (OLEDs), incandescent bulbs, fluorescent bulbs, halogen lamps, UV bulbs, infrared sources, near-infrared sources, lasers, or chemical light sources.
  • OLEDs organic light-emitting devices
  • incandescent bulbs incandescent bulbs
  • fluorescent bulbs halogen lamps
  • UV bulbs infrared sources
  • near-infrared sources lasers
  • chemical light sources In general, the light emitted by the light source may be visible or invisible.
  • At least one light source may be used. For example, from 1 to about 10,000 light sources may be used.
  • the light source may comprise a row of LEDs positioned at or near an edge of the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the light source may comprise LEDs arranged on a circuit such that light emitted from the LEDs lights up continuously or uniformly the viscoelastic lightguide throughout a desired area.
  • the light source may comprise LEDs that emit light of different colors such that the colors can mix within the viscoelastic lightguide. In this way, a graphic could be designed to appear differently at different times during its use.
  • the light source may be powered by any suitable means.
  • the light source may be powered using a battery, a DC power supply, an AC to DC power supply, an AC power supply, or a solar photovoltaic cell.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide can be used in a variety of multilayer constructions depending on the particular application. Some of these embodiments are described below.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may be disposed on a substrate or between two substrates. Any one of the surfaces described above for the viscoelastic lightguide may be an interface formed between the lightguide and a substrate.
  • FIG. 14 shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1400 comprising first substrate 1402 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1401 ; first interface 1403 formed between the two may be any one of the surfaces described above for the lightguide.
  • Exemplary optical article 1400 also comprises optional second substrate 1405 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1401 opposite first substrate 1402 ; second interface 1406 formed between the two may be any one of the surfaces described above for the lightguide. Any of the surfaces described above for the viscoelastic lightguide may be used in combination for first interface 1403 and second interface 1406 .
  • Exemplary optical article 1400 also comprises first outer surface 1404 opposite first interface 1403 , and second outer surface 1407 opposite second interface 1406 .
  • Any one of the surfaces described above for the viscoelastic lightguide may be first and/or second outer surfaces, 1404 and 1407 , respectively.
  • any of the surfaces described above for the viscoelastic lightguide may be used in combination for first interface 1403 , second interface 1406 , first outer surface 1404 and second outer surface 1407 .
  • FIG. 15 a shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1500 comprising first substrate 1502 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1501 (or vice versa). Any one of the surfaces described above for the viscoelastic lightguide may be first interface 1503 and/or first outer surface 1504 . Surface 1505 of the viscoelastic lightguide may have any type of surface described above for the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • first interface 1503 , first outer surface 1504 and surface 1505 of viscoelastic lightguide 1501 are unstructured as shown in FIG. 15 a .
  • First substrate 1502 may have a refractive index less than that of viscoelastic lightguide 1501 such that the first substrate functions as a light containing substrate for light propagating within the lightguide. If the first substrate is a light containing substrate, then the first interface may be optically smooth such that light propagating within viscoelastic lightguide 1501 is transported by total internal reflection.
  • the amount of light extracted from the lightguide and by the substrate may be less than about 0.5%, less than about 1%, less than about 2%, less than about 5%, or less than about 10% relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide.
  • at least a portion of surface 1505 is optically smooth such that light propagating within viscoelastic lightguide 1501 is transported by total internal reflection.
  • first substrate 1502 may have a refractive index greater than that of viscoelastic lightguide 1501 such that the first substrate may function as a light extracting substrate.
  • the amount of light extracted from the lightguide and by the substrate may be greater than about 10%, greater than about 20%, greater than about 30%, greater than about 40%, greater than about 50%, greater than about 60%, greater than about 70%, greater than about 80%, or greater than about 90% relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide.
  • first substrate 1502 may have the same or nearly the same refractive index as that of viscoelastic lightguide 1501 . In either embodiment, at least portions of first interface 1503 and surface 1505 are optically smooth such that light propagating within viscoelastic lightguide 1501 is transported by total internal reflection.
  • FIG. 15 b shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1510 comprising first substrate 1512 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1511 (or vice versa).
  • first interface 1513 is structured irregularly such that the first substrate is able to extract light from the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • First substrate 1512 may have a refractive index greater than, less than, or nearly the same as that of viscoelastic lightguide 1511 .
  • the first substrate may function as a light extracting substrate.
  • the amount of light extracted from the lightguide and by the substrate may be greater than about 10%, greater than about 20%, greater than about 30%, greater than about 40%, greater than about 50%, greater than about 60%, greater than about 70%, greater than about 80%, or greater than about 90% relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide.
  • At least portions of first interface 1513 and surface 1515 are optically smooth such that light propagating within the viscoelastic lightguide may be transported by total internal reflection.
  • one surface of the viscoelastic lightguide is unstructured or the first outer surface is unstructured; the other two surfaces are structured.
  • the first interface and the first outer surface may be structured, and the other surface of the viscoelastic layer unstructured.
  • the first interface and first outer layer may be structured such that the features of each are configured dependently within about 100 um.
  • the first interface and first outer layer may be structured such that the features of each are configured independently not within about 100 um.
  • FIG. 15 c shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1520 comprising first substrate 1522 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1521 (or vice versa).
  • first interface 1523 is structured with prismatic features such that the first substrate is able to extract light from the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • First outer surface 1524 is structured with lenticular features such that light can be emitted from the first substrate.
  • the lenticular features and the prismatic features are configured dependently such that the period of repetition or pitch P for each pair of features (lenticular and prismatic) is about the same or at least within about 100 um.
  • the curvature of the lenticular feature may be such that its focal point coincides with the vertex of the prismatic feature.
  • First substrate 1522 may have a refractive index greater than or less than that of viscoelastic lightguide 1521 .
  • refractive index greater than or less than that of viscoelastic lightguide 1521 .
  • Useful configurations of lenticular and prismatic features are described in U.S. 2005/0052750 A1 (King et al.) and U.S. 2005/0276071 (Sasagawa et al.).
  • At least a portion of first interface 1523 and a portion of surface 1525 are optically smooth such that light propagating within the viscoelastic lightguide may be transported by total internal reflection.
  • the first substrate may function as a light extracting and light emitting substrate.
  • the amount of light extracted from the lightguide and by the substrate may be greater than about 10%, greater than about 20%, greater than about 30%, greater than about 40%, greater than about 50%, greater than about 60%, greater than about 70%, greater than about 80%, or greater than about 90% relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide.
  • the amount of light emitted from the first substrate may be less than about 0.5%, less than about 1%, less than about 2%, less than about 5%, less than about 10%, less than about 20%, less than about 30%, less than about 40%, less than about 50%, less than about 60%, less than about 70%, less than about 80%, or less than about 90% relative to the total amount of light that enters the substrate; the amount of light emitted from the first substrate may be greater than about 10%, greater than about 20%, greater than about 30%, greater than about 40%, greater than about 50%, greater than about 60%, greater than about 70%, greater than about 80%, or greater than about 90% relative to the total amount of light that enters the substrate; or the amount of light emitted from the first substrate may be from about 10 to about 50%, from about 20 to about 50%, from about 30 to about 50%, from about 50 to about 70%, from about 50 to about 80%, or from about 10 to about 90% relative to the total amount of light
  • FIG. 15 d shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1530 which also comprises first substrate 1522 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1521 .
  • tips of the prismatic structures that form surface 1532 of first substrate 1522 are in contact with viscoelastic lightguide 1521 such that the two are optically coupled.
  • Corresponding pockets 1531 are formed between the prismatic features and the lightguide.
  • Surface 1532 may comprise any of those described above for the interfaces and outer surfaces.
  • the refractive index of viscoelastic lightguide 1521 may be greater than that of the pocket material in pockets 1531 , but less than that of first substrate 1522 .
  • the refractive index difference between the first substrate and the viscoelastic lightguide may be from about 0.002 to about 1; and the refractive index difference between viscoelastic lightguide 1521 and pocket material in pockets 1531 may be from about 0.002 to about 1.
  • the pockets may comprise air.
  • the pockets may comprise a soft, compliant material such as any of the viscoelastic materials described above.
  • the pockets may comprise a PSA.
  • the pockets may comprise a silicone PSA.
  • the first substrate may comprise the film described in King et al. and Sasagawa et al.
  • the first substrate comprises more than one substrate.
  • FIG. 15 e shows a schematic cross section of optical article 1540 comprising first substrate 1541 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1521 .
  • Additional first substrate 1522 is disposed on first substrate 1541 opposite the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the additional substrate is not optically coupled directly with the viscoelastic lightguide, however, it may be optically coupled indirectly, i.e., by extracting light from the first substrate.
  • the refractive index of first substrate 1541 may be greater than that of viscoelastic lightguide 1521 , and the refractive index of additional first substrate 1522 may be may be greater than, less than, or about the same as that of the lightguide.
  • the refractive index difference between the first substrate and the viscoelastic lightguide may be from about 0.002 to about 1; and the refractive index difference between the additional first substrate and the lightguide may be from about 0.002 to about 1.
  • the first substrate may comprise a light emitting layer as described above.
  • the amount and direction of light emitted from the first substrate may be controlled, at the very least, by the shape, size, number, arrangement, etc. of the features that form the first outer surface.
  • the first substrate can be designed such that light may be emitted from the substrate as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • light may be emitted from the first substrate in at least one predetermined direction, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more predetermined directions; from 1 to about 3 predetermined directions; from 1 to about 5 predetermined directions; from 1 to about 10 predetermined directions; or from 1 to about 100 predetermined directions.
  • the light emitted in at least one predetermined direction may be emitted in a pattern.
  • the light emitted in at least one predetermined direction may be emitted uniformly (at the same or nearly the same intensity) or non-uniformly from the first substrate.
  • Light may also be emitted in random directions from the first substrate and/or at various random intensities from the substrate.
  • FIG. 16 shows a perspective view of exemplary optical article 1600 comprising first substrate 1602 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1601 .
  • Light represented by rays 1603 is emitted in a predetermined direction from the first substrate.
  • Light may also be emitted in more than one predetermined direction, randomly, in one or more shapes, in discrete areas, at different intensities, etc.
  • FIG. 17 illustrates how light may be emitted from an exemplary optical article comprising a first substrate and a viscoelastic lightguide, both shown in the shape of a film or sheet.
  • FIG. 17 shows a perspective view of exemplary optical article 1700 comprising a first substrate disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1701 .
  • the first substrate comprises major surface 1702 and edge surfaces 1703 a - d ( 1703 c and 1703 d not shown).
  • Light may be emitted from any one or some combination of surfaces 1702 and 1703 a - d .
  • light may be emitted only from major surface 1702 as shown by ray 1704 .
  • light may be emitted only from edge surface 1703 b.
  • Exemplary optical article 1700 also comprises a major surface of viscoelastic lightguide 1701 , the major surface being opposite major surface 1702 of the first substrate.
  • Exemplary optical article 1700 also comprises edge surfaces 1705 a - c ( 1703 c not shown). Light may be emitted from the first substrate and/or the viscoelastic lightguide, in any one or some combination of major surfaces and edge surfaces. Light which enters the viscoelastic lightguide is shown by ray 1706 .
  • a surface of the first substrate is microstructured with air release channels as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the first substrate may have any bulk three-dimensional shape as is needed for a given application.
  • the first substrate may be commensurate in size with the viscoelastic lightguide, or it may be larger, smaller, thicker, thinner, etc. than the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the first substrate may be in the form of a square or rectangular layer, sheet, film, etc. as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 .
  • the thickness of the first substrate is not particularly limited as long as it can function as desired.
  • the thickness of the first substrate may be selected such that it can extract and emit light as desired.
  • a maximum thickness of the first substrate may be required for use in particular optical devices designed to be particularly thin.
  • Exemplary thicknesses for the first substrate range from about 0.4 mil to about 1000 mil, from about 1 mil to about 300 mil, from about 1 mil to about 60 mil, or from about 0.5 mil to about 30 mil.
  • the first substrate is viscoelastic and comprises any one or more of the viscoelastic materials described above for the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • a viscoelastic first substrate may need to comprise appropriate tensile strength values, viscous characteristics, and properties that facilitate sufficient optical coupling with at least a portion of a viscoelastic lightguide.
  • a viscoelastic first substrate is generally soft, compliant and flexible.
  • a viscoelastic first substrate may have an elastic modulus, viscous modulus, and damping coefficient as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the first substrate comprises a PSA layer as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the first substrate may have a particular peel force or at least exhibit a peel force within a particular range as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the first substrate comprises an optically clear substrate having high light transmittance of from about 80 to about 100%, from about 90 to about 100%, from about 95 to about 100%, or from about 98 to about 100% over at least a portion of the visible light spectrum. In some embodiments, the first substrate has a haze value of less than about 5%, less than about 3%, or less than about 1%. In some embodiments, the first substrate has a haze value of from about 0.01 to less than about 5%, from about 0.01 to less than about 3%, or from about 0.01 to less than about 1%.
  • the first substrate comprises an optically clear substrate having high light transmittance and a low haze value.
  • High light transmittance may be from about 90 to about 100%, from about 95 to about 100%, or from about 98 to about 100% over at least a portion of the visible light spectrum, and haze values may be from about 0.01 to less than about 5%, from about 0.01 to less than about 3%, or from about 0.01 to less than about 1%.
  • the first substrate is hazy and diffuses light, particularly visible light.
  • a hazy first substrate may have a haze value of greater than about 5%, greater than about 20%, or greater than about 50%.
  • a hazy first substrate may have a haze value of from about 5 to about 90%, from about 5 to about 50%, or from about 20 to about 50%.
  • the first substrate has low light transmittance, for example, from about 0.1 to about 70%, from about 0.1 to about 50%, or from about 0.1 to about 20%.
  • the first substrate may be translucent in that it reflects and transmits light.
  • the first substrate may have a refractive index in the range of from about 1.3 to about 2.6, 1.4 to about 1.7, or from about 1.5 to about 1.7.
  • the particular refractive index or range of refractive indices selected for the first substrate may depend on the overall design of the optical article or device, e.g., the presence or absence of any additional substrates in contact with the first substrate and the particular application in which the article or device may be used.
  • the first substrate comprises one or more viscoelastic materials as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide. In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises a PSA as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide. In some embodiments, the first substrate and the viscoelastic lightguide comprise viscoelastic materials. In some embodiments, the first substrate and the viscoelastic lightguide comprise PSAs.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a clear acrylic PSA
  • the first substrate comprises a silicone PSA.
  • the silicone PSA may comprise a stretch releasable PSA as described above.
  • the refractive index of the clear acrylic PSA may be greater than that of the silicone PSA, e.g., the refractive index difference may be from about 0.04 to about 0.09.
  • Exemplary clear acrylic PSAs are available as transfer tapes such as VHBTM Acrylic Tape 4910F from 3M Company and 3MTM Optically Clear Laminating Adhesives (8140 and 8180 series).
  • Silicone PSAs include any of those described above such as the silicone PSAs comprising polydiorganosiloxane polyoxamide.
  • the first substrate comprises an adhesive that is useful for adhering the viscoelastic lightguide to an article such as a dashboard of a vehicle or a painted wall.
  • Useful adhesives include optically clear adhesives, optically diffuse adhesives, radiation cured adhesives, thermal cured adhesives, hot melt adhesives, cold seal adhesives, heat activated adhesives, adhesives that cure at room temperature and structural adhesives having an adhesive bond strength of at least about 6 MPa, and the like.
  • Structural adhesives are available as 3MTM SCOTCH-WELDTM Adhesives.
  • the first substrate is not viscoelastic.
  • the first substrate comprises a polymer. In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises a polymeric film.
  • Useful polymeric films include cellulose acetate, poly(meth)acrylate (acrylate and/or methacrylate), polyether sulfone, polyurethane, polyester, polycarbonate, polymethyl methacrylate, polyvinyl chloride, syndiotactic polystyrene, cyclic olefin copolymer, polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, copolymer or blend based on naphthalene dicarboxylic acids, or some combination thereof.
  • the first substrate comprises a poly(meth)acrylate having a refractive index greater than that of the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the first substrate may be a reflector that reflects incident light being transported within the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the reflector comprises a specular reflector wherein light propagating within the viscoelastic lightguide is reflected at a surface of the specular reflector according to the law of reflection.
  • the law of reflection states that for light incident upon a surface and reflected by the surface, the reflection angle, ⁇ r , is the same as or nearly the same as the incident angle, ⁇ t , wherein both angles are defined relative to a plane of the surface.
  • the reflection angle of light is within about 16° of the incident angle.
  • a specular reflector may be fully or near fully specular as a reflector over some range of incident angles.
  • specular reflectors may be from about 85 to about 100% reflective, from about 90 to about 100%, or from about 95 to about 100%, across a particular region of the electromagnetic spectrum, for example, the visible region.
  • Suitable specular reflectors include mirrors such as a plane mirrors comprising a film of reflecting material, typically a metal, coated on glass.
  • Suitable reflectors include mirrors that are multilayer optical films.
  • Useful multilayer optical films comprise films having from about 10 to about 10,000 alternating layers of first and second polymer layers wherein the polymer layers comprise polyesters. Exemplary multilayer optical films are described in U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • Exemplary specular reflectors include those available from 3MTM Company, for example, 3MTM High Intensity Grade Reflective Products such as High Reflective Visible Mirror Film and High Transmission Mirror Film, and VikuitiTM films such as VikuitiTM Enhanced Specular Reflector.
  • the reflector comprises a diffuse reflector wherein light propagating within the viscoelastic lightguide is reflected and scattered at a surface of the diffuse reflector.
  • a diffuse reflector For a diffuse reflector, light of a given incident angle reflects with multiple reflection angles wherein at least some of the reflection angles are greater than about 16° of the incident angle.
  • a diffuse reflector may be fully or near fully reflective over some range of incident angles. Also, diffuse reflectors may be from about 85 to about 100% reflective, from about 90 to about 100%, or from about 95 to about 100%, across a particular region of the electromagnetic spectrum, for example, the visible region.
  • a diffuse reflector may comprise an irregular surface with respect to the wavelength of light being reflected. Light may be reflected at the surface.
  • the diffuse reflector may comprise a layer of organic, inorganic or hybrid organic/inorganic particles disposed on a substrate.
  • the particles may have a diameter of from greater than about 0.01 to about 100 um, from greater than about 0.05 to about 100 um, or from greater than about 0.05 to about 50 um.
  • the particles may be polymeric particles, glass beads, inorganic particles, metal oxide particles, or hybrid organic/inorganic particles.
  • the particles may be solid, porous or hollow.
  • the particles may comprise microspheres having a polymeric shell with a blowing agent such as isobutene or isopentane inside the shell, for example, microspheres available as EXPANCEL microspheres from Expancel Co.
  • the particles may be dispersed in a polymeric material or binder.
  • Binders include one or more polymers and may be, for example, any of the viscoelastic materials and adhesive materials (cold seal adhesives, etc.) described above.
  • the binder may comprise a PSA.
  • the binder and particles may be coated onto a substrate such that the thickness of the binder is greater than, less than or about the same as the diameter of the particles.
  • the substrate may comprise a polymer, metal, specular reflector, and the like.
  • the diffuse reflector may comprise a layer of barium sulfate particles loaded in a polyethylene terephalate film.
  • Other constructions that provide a reflective surface are described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,481,563 (David et al.).
  • the binder is light transmissive such that at least some of the light incident upon the layer enters the layer and becomes diffused. This diffused light is reflected upon being incident on a substrate that is a reflector.
  • the diffusive material may comprise particles dispersed in a binder as described above.
  • the refractive indices of the particles and binder may be different.
  • the refractive indices of the particles and binder may differ from about 0.002 to about 1, or from about 0.01 to about 0.5.
  • This type of diffuse reflector may be from about 85 to about 100% reflective, from about 90 to about 100%, or from about 95 to about 100%, across a particular region of the electromagnetic spectrum, for example, the visible region. Exemplary light diffusing materials are described in U.S. Pat.
  • the particles may comprise hollow glass spheres having a mean diameter of about 18 um (SPHERICEL Grade 60P18 from Potters Industries Inc.), and the binder may comprise a PSA such as a silicone PSA.
  • the first substrate comprises a multilayer optical film.
  • Multilayer optical films that are mirrors are described above.
  • Other types of multilayer optical films may also be used, for example, the multilayer optical film may be a reflective film, a polarizer film, a reflective polarizer film, a diffuse blend reflective polarizer film, a diffuser film, a brightness enhancing film, a turning film, a mirror film, or a combination thereof.
  • Exemplary multilayer optical films include 3MTM VikuitiTM films available from 3MTM Company. Exemplary multilayer optical films are described in the references cited above for multilayer optical films that are mirrors.
  • the first substrate comprises a polymeric film, metal, glass, ceramic, paper, fabric, or a combination thereof.
  • the first substrate comprises metal such as aluminum.
  • the first substrate comprises glass which generally comprises a hard, brittle, amorphous solid, including, soda-lime glass, borosilicate glass, acrylic glass, sugar glass, and the like.
  • the first substrate comprises a ceramic comprising some amount of crystalline structure and made, for example, from inorganic non-metallic materials.
  • the first substrate comprises paper, for example, paper made from cellulose pulp.
  • the first substrate comprises fabric, for example, leather, woven fabrics, non-woven fabrics.
  • the first substrate comprises a release liner.
  • Release liners typically have a low adhesion surface for contact with an adhesive layer.
  • Release liners may comprise paper such as Kraft paper, or polymeric films such as poly(vinyl chloride), polyester, polyolefin, cellulose acetate, ethylene vinyl acetate, polyurethane, and the like.
  • the release liner may be coated with a layer of a release agent such as a silicone-containing material or a fluorocarbon-containing material.
  • the release liner may comprise paper or a polymeric film coated with polyethylene which is coated with a silicone-containing material.
  • Exemplary release liners include liners commercially available from CP Films Inc. under the trade designations “T-30” and “T-10” that have a silicone release coating on polyethylene terephthalate film.
  • Exemplary release liners include structured release liners.
  • Exemplary release liners include any of those referred to as microstructured release liners.
  • Microstructured release liners are used to impart a microstructure on the surface of an adhesive layer. The microstructured surface can aid air egress between the adhesive layer and the adjacent layer. In general, it is desirable that the microstructure disappear over time to prevent interference with optical properties.
  • Microstructures are generally three-dimensional structures that are microscopic in at least two dimensions (i.e., the topical and/or cross-sectional view is microscopic). The term “microscopic” as used herein refers to dimensions that are difficult to resolve by the human eye without aid of a microscope.
  • the microstructures may assume a variety of shapes. Representative examples include hemispheres, prisms (such as square prisms, rectangular prisms, cylindrical prisms and other similar polygonal features), pyramids, ellipses, grooves (e.g., V-grooves), channels, and the like. In some cases, it may be desirable to include topographical features that promote air egress at the bonding interface when the article is laminated to a substrate. In this regard, V-grooves and channels that can extend to the edge of the article are particularly useful. The particular dimensions and patterns characterizing the microstructures are selected based upon the specific application for which the article is intended.
  • microstructured adhesive layer surface has one or more grooves that exist only in an inner area of the surface and are not open at side surfaces of the layer.
  • These grooves may be in the form of a straight line, branched straight lines, cross, circle, oval, or polygon as viewed from above, and where each form may be composed of plural discontinuous grooves.
  • These grooves may have a width of from 5 to 100 micrometers and a depth of from 5 to 50 micrometers.
  • optical articles comprising a viscoelastic lightguide and a first substrate may provide an image.
  • a variety of different constructions of the viscoelastic lightguide and the first substrate may be made to provide an image.
  • An image may be made by structuring a surface of the first substrate as described above.
  • first substrate 1602 of FIG. 16 may be structured to provide the image.
  • FIG. 15 f shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1550 that may be used to provide an image.
  • Exemplary optical article 1550 comprises first substrate 1552 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1551 .
  • the first substrate comprises two different materials used to form regions 1553 and 1554 which are arranged to form the image.
  • Light propagating within the viscoelastic lightguide behaves differently upon striking the interface between the first substrate and the lightguide, depending on whether the interface is formed between the lightguide and region 1553 or 1554 . For example, light incident upon an interface with region 1553 may be reflected, and light incident upon an interface with region 1554 may be extracted. For another example, light incident upon an interface with region 1553 may be reflected, and light incident upon an interface with region 1554 may be extracted selectively for light within a particular range of wavelengths.
  • FIG. 15 g shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1560 that may be used to provide images.
  • Exemplary optical article 1560 comprises first substrate 1562 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1561 .
  • the first substrate comprises an image formed by regions of imaging materials 1563 suspended in bulk material 1564 . Light propagating within the viscoelastic lightguide may be extracted by bulk material 1564 . Regions 1563 may reflect light or transmit light within a particular range of wavelengths depending on the particular imaging materials. Colorants such as pigments and dyes may be used as the imaging materials.
  • FIG. 15 h shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1570 that may be used to provide an image.
  • Exemplary optical article 1570 comprises first substrate 1572 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1571 .
  • Material 1573 is deposited onto the first substrate such that an image is formed by reflection of light within the first substrate and/or transmission of light within a particular range of wavelengths.
  • An image may be made by depositing material between the first substrate and the viscoelastic lightguide wherein the material is arranged to form the image.
  • Exemplary optical article 1580 comprises first substrate 1582 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1581 .
  • Material 1583 is deposited between the lightguide and the first substrate such that an image is formed by reflection of light within viscoelastic lightguide 1581 and/or extraction of light into first substrate 1582 wherein the extracted light may be within a particular range of wavelengths.
  • imaging materials may be deposited by printing or marking, e.g., by inkjet printing, laser printing, electrostatic printing and the like.
  • Images may be monochrome such as black and white images, or they may be colored images. Images may comprise one or more colors throughout, e.g., a uniform layer of color. Images that provide a general or custom surface may be used. For example, an image may be designed such that the optical article appears as plastic, metal or wood grain; fabric, leather, non-woven, etc. The image may also comprise white dots which may be disposed on a surface or interface.
  • the white dots may be arranged as described for extraction features of conventional solid lightguides, e.g., as described in Kinder et al.
  • Useful imaging materials include those that reflect all or some light within a particular range of wavelengths.
  • Useful imaging materials include those that transmit all or some light within a particular range of wavelengths.
  • Exemplary imaging materials include colorants such as pigments and dyes. Imaging materials may also comprise photonic crystals.
  • first substrates 1552 , 1562 , 1572 and 1582 may comprise a polymeric film. Any one of the polymeric films may be translucent. Any one of these first substrates may be an adhesive wherein useful adhesives include optically clear adhesives, optically diffuse adhesives, radiation cured adhesives, hot melt adhesives, cold seal adhesives, heat activated adhesives, and structural adhesives having an adhesive bond strength of at least about 6 MPa, and the like.
  • any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 f - i may comprise a clear acrylic PSA as the viscoelastic lightguide. Any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 f - i may comprise a clear acrylic PSA as the viscoelastic lightguide and a polymeric film as the first substrate. Any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 f - i may comprise a clear acrylic PSA as the viscoelastic lightguide and a translucent polymeric film as the first substrate. Any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 f - i may comprise a clear acrylic PSA as the viscoelastic lightguide and an adhesive layer as the first substrate.
  • any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 f - i may comprise a second substrate disposed on the viscoelastic lightguide opposite the first substrate.
  • the second substrate may comprise a reflector.
  • any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 f - i may comprise a clear acrylic PSA as the viscoelastic lightguide, a translucent polymeric film as the first substrate, and a second substrate comprising a reflector. Any of the diffuse and specular reflectors described above may be used. Constructions that may be used to provide an image are also shown in FIGS. 15 j - l.
  • FIG. 15 j shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1585 comprising first substrate 1587 disposed between viscoelastic lightguide 1586 and additional substrate 1588 .
  • Surface 1589 of additional substrate 1588 is structured to form an image.
  • FIG. 15 k shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1590 comprising first substrate 1592 disposed between viscoelastic lightguide 1591 and additional substrate 1593 .
  • Additional substrate 1593 comprises an overlay, the overlay comprising regions of imaging materials 1594 a suspended in bulk material 1594 b .
  • FIG. 151 shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1595 comprising first substrate 1597 disposed between viscoelastic lightguide 1596 and additional substrate 1598 .
  • Material 1599 is deposited between first substrate 1597 and additional substrate 1598 such that an image is formed by reflection of light within the first substrate and/or transmission of light within a particular range of wavelengths.
  • any one of additional substrates 1588 , 1593 and 1598 may comprise a polymeric film. Any one of the polymeric films may be translucent. Any one of the first substrates 1587 , 1592 and 1597 may be viscoelastic. Any one of the first substrates may comprise a PSA. Any one of the first substrates may comprise a silicone PSA.
  • the first substrates may comprise an adhesive wherein useful adhesives include optically clear adhesives, optically diffuse adhesives, radiation cured adhesives, hot melt adhesives, cold seal adhesives, heat activated adhesives, and structural adhesives having an adhesive bond strength of at least about 6 MPa, and the like.
  • any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 j - l may comprise a polymeric film as the additional layer and an adhesive that is the first substrate. Any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 j - l may comprise a translucent polymeric film as the additional layer and an adhesive that is the first substrate.
  • any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 j - l may comprise a clear acrylic PSA as the viscoelastic lightguide, a silicone PSA as the first substrate, and a polymeric imaged film as the additional layer.
  • any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 j - l may comprise a clear acrylic PSA as the viscoelastic lightguide, a silicone PSA as the first substrate, and a translucent polymeric imaged film as the additional layer.
  • any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 f - i may comprise a second substrate disposed on the viscoelastic lightguide opposite the first substrate.
  • the second substrate may comprise a reflector.
  • any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 f - i may comprise a clear acrylic PSA as the viscoelastic lightguide, a silicone PSA as the first substrate, a translucent polymeric film as the additional substrate, and a second substrate comprising a reflector. Any of the diffuse and specular reflectors described above may be used.
  • FIG. 14 shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1400 comprising viscoelastic layer 1401 disposed between first substrate 1402 and second substrate 1405 .
  • First substrate 1402 forms first interface 1403 with the viscoelastic layer and first outer surface 1404 is disposed opposite the interface.
  • Second substrate 1405 forms second interface 1406 and second outer surface 1407 is disposed opposite the interface.
  • This multiple layer construction can manage light in many ways according to structure, refractive index, and material composition of the first substrate, second substrate and viscoelastic lightguide.
  • one may determine theoretically how varying parameters of optical article 1400 can affect the way by which light is managed by the article. This may be carried out using ray tracing techniques consistent with the law of refraction and the principle of total internal reflection.
  • the first and second substrates may comprise the same substrate such that the same surfaces of the substrates are positioned the same way with respect to the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the first and second substrates may comprise the same substrate such that the same surfaces of the substrates are positioned differently with respect to the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the first and second substrates may comprise different substrates.
  • the first and second substrates may be any combination of first substrates described above.
  • the first and second substrates may be some combination of light containing, light extracting and light emitting substrates.
  • Each of the first and second substrates may be some combination of light containing, light extracting and light emitting substrates.
  • the first substrate may be a light containing substrate, and the second a light extracting substrate.
  • the first substrate may be a light containing substrate, and the second a light extracting and light emitting layer.
  • the first and second substrates may extract and/or emit light as described above for the first substrate of two layer constructions.
  • Parameters that may be varied include the structure of the first and second interfaces and the structure of the first and second outer surfaces.
  • at least portions of the first and second interfaces are optically smooth such that light propagating within the viscoelastic lightguide may be transported by total internal reflection.
  • the first and second interfaces and the first and second outer surfaces are unstructured as shown in FIG. 14 .
  • any one of the first and second interfaces and the first and second outer surfaces is structured as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide and the first substrate.
  • any two of the first and second interfaces and the first and second outer surfaces are structured as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide and the first substrate.
  • the first and second interfaces may be structured with prismatic features for extracting light from the first and second substrates, respectively.
  • any three of the first and second interfaces and the first and second outer surfaces are structured as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide and the first substrate.
  • all four of the first and second interfaces and the first and second outer surfaces are structured as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide and the first substrate.
  • optical article 1400 may comprise any of the structured interfaces and structured surfaces described above for the viscoelastic lightguide and the first substrate, i.e., the first and second interfaces and the first and second outer surfaces may comprise any of the structured interfaces and surfaces described above for the viscoelastic lightguide and the first substrate.
  • FIGS. 18 a and 18 b show exemplary combinations of structured surfaces for three layer optical articles.
  • FIG. 18 a shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1800 comprising viscoelastic lightguide 1801 disposed between first substrate 1802 and second substrate 1805 .
  • First interface 1803 comprises prismatic features, as described above, for extracting light from the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • First outer surface 1804 and second outer surface 1807 comprises unstructured surfaces
  • second interface 1806 comprises an unstructured interface
  • FIG. 18 b shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1810 comprising viscoelastic lightguide 1811 disposed between first substrate 1812 and second substrate 1815 .
  • First interface 1813 and second interface 1816 comprise unstructured surfaces
  • first surface 1814 and second surface 1817 comprises lenticular surfaces, as described above, for emitting light from the first and second substrates, respectively.
  • first and second interfaces may be structured so that light can be extracted on both sides by the first and second substrates. In some embodiments, first and second interfaces may be structured so that light can be extracted on both sides by the first and second substrates, and first and second outer surfaces may be structured so that light can be emitted from the first and second substrates.
  • Parameters that may also be varied include the refractive indices of the first substrate, second substrate and the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the first and second substrates may have refractive indices less than that of the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the first and second substrates may have refractive indices less than that of the viscoelastic lightguide, and the refractive indices of the first and second substrates are the same or nearly the same.
  • the first and second substrates may have refractive indices less than that of the viscoelastic lightguide, and the refractive indices of the first and second substrates may be different.
  • the first and second substrates may have refractive indices less than that of the viscoelastic lightguide, and the refractive index of the first substrate may be greater than that of the second.
  • the first and second substrates may have refractive indices greater than that of the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the first and second substrates may have refractive indices greater than that of the viscoelastic lightguide, and the refractive indices of the first and second substrates are the same or nearly the same.
  • the first and second substrates may have refractive indices greater than that of the viscoelastic lightguide, and the refractive indices of the first and second substrates may be different.
  • the first and second substrates may have refractive indices greater than that of the viscoelastic lightguide, and the refractive index of the first substrate may be greater than that of the second.
  • the first substrate may have a refractive index less than that of the viscoelastic lightguide, and the second substrate greater than that of the lightguide.
  • the refractive index difference of the viscoelastic lightguide and the first substrate may be from about 0.002 to about 0.5, from about 0.005 to about 0.5, from about 0.01 to about 0.5, from about 0.02 to about 0.5, from about 0.03 to about 0.5, from about 0.04 to about 0.5, from about 0.05 to about 0.5, from about 0.1 to about 0.5, from about 0.2 to about 0.5, from about 0.3 to about 0.5, or from about 0.4 to about 0.5.
  • the refractive index difference of the viscoelastic lightguide and the second substrate may be from about 0.002 to about 0.5, from about 0.005 to about 0.5, from about 0.01 to about 0.5, from about 0.02 to about 0.5, from about 0.03 to about 0.5, from about 0.04 to about 0.5, from about 0.05 to about 0.5, from about 0.1 to about 0.5, from about 0.2 to about 0.5, from about 0.3 to about 0.5, or from about 0.4 to about 0.5.
  • Parameters that may also be varied include the compositions of the first substrate, second substrate and the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the first substrate, second substrate and viscoelastic lightguide may comprise the same composition.
  • the first and second substrate compositions may be different from that of the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the first and second substrate compositions may be the same, and different from that of the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the first substrate and viscoelastic layer may comprise the same composition, and different from that of the second substrate.
  • the first substrate, second substrate and viscoelastic lightguide may comprise different compositions.
  • the first and second substrates may comprise first and second viscoelastic layers, respectively.
  • the first substrate may comprise a viscoelastic layer, and the second substrate does not.
  • the first and second substrates may not comprise viscoelastic layers.
  • the first and second substrates may comprise first and second PSAs, respectively.
  • the first substrate may comprise a PSA, and the second substrate does not.
  • the first and second substrates may not comprise PSAs.
  • the first and second substrates may comprise first and second reflectors, respectively.
  • the first substrate may comprise a reflector, and the second substrate does not.
  • the first and second substrates may not comprise reflectors.
  • the first and second substrates may comprise first and second multilayer optical films, respectively.
  • the first substrate may comprise a multilayer, and the second substrate does not.
  • the first and second substrates may not comprise multilayer optical films.
  • the first and second substrates may comprise optically clear substrates that may be the same or different. Each substrate has high light transmittance and a low haze value.
  • High light transmittance may be from about 90 to about 100%, from about 95 to about 100%, or from about 99 to about 100% over at least a portion of the visible light spectrum (about 400 to about 700 nm), and haze values may be from about 0.01 to less than about 5%, from about 0.01 to less than about 3%, or from about 0.01 to less than about 1%.
  • the first substrate comprises a viscoelastic substrate
  • the second substrate comprises a light emitting substrate.
  • the light emitting substrate may comprise a polymeric film having a refractive index greater than that of the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the light emitting substrate may comprise a structured surface that is a second outer surface such that light can be emitted from the light emitting substrate.
  • the first substrate comprises a viscoelastic layer and is a light emitting layer
  • the second substrate does not comprise a viscoelastic layer
  • the first and second substrates comprise release liners.
  • the first substrate may comprise a release liner, and the second substrate does not.
  • the first and second subsubstrates may not comprise release liners.
  • the first substrate may comprise a viscoelastic layer
  • the second substrate may comprise an adhesive layer that is not a PSA (it may be hot melt, cold seal, etc. as described above).
  • the first substrate may comprise a PSA
  • the second substrate may comprise an adhesive layer that is not a PSA (it may be hot melt, cold seal, etc. as described above).
  • an additional substrate may be disposed on the first substrate opposite the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the additional substrate may provide an image as described above.
  • the additional substrate may be translucent.
  • the first and second substrates may comprise silicone PSAs, and the viscoelastic layer may comprise a (meth)acrylic PSA.
  • the first and second substrates may have refractive indices less than that of the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the silicone PSAs may be stretch releasable.
  • This optical article may be disposed between first and second glasses which may or may not be the same glass. The first glass is disposed on the first substrate opposite the viscoelastic lightguide, and the second glass on the second substrate opposite the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the first substrate may comprise a silicone PSA, and the viscoelastic lightguide may comprise a (meth)acrylic PSA.
  • the first substrate may have a refractive index less than that of the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the silicone PSA may be stretch releasable.
  • the second substrate may comprise a diffuse reflector comprising a layer of particles and polymer.
  • the particles may comprise glass microspheres and the polymer may comprise an adhesive, or the particles may comprise glass microspheres and the polymer may comprise a (meth)acrylic PSA.
  • An additional substrate may be disposed on the first substrate opposite the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the additional substrate may provide an image as described above.
  • the additional substrate may be a polymeric film such as a translucent polymeric film.
  • a reflector may be disposed on the diffuse reflector opposite the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the first substrate may comprise a polymeric film having a refractive index greater than that of the viscoelastic lightguide
  • the second substrate may comprise a reflector.
  • the polymeric film may provide an image as described above.
  • the polymeric film may be translucent.
  • An additional substrate may be disposed on the first substrate opposite the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the additional substrate may comprise a polymeric film.
  • the first substrate may comprise a polymeric film having a refractive index greater than that of the viscoelastic lightguide, the second substrate may have a refractive index less than that of the lightguide.
  • the polymeric film may provide an image as described above.
  • the polymeric film may be translucent.
  • the second substrate may comprise a viscoelastic substrate.
  • the second substrate may comprise a PSA.
  • the first substrate may comprise a silicone PSA
  • the second substrate may comprise a reflector
  • the viscoelastic layer may comprise a (meth)acrylic PSA.
  • the first substrate may comprise a (meth)acrylic light extracting and light emitting substrate, for example, as described in King et al. and Sasagawa et al, the first substrate disposed on the viscoelastic lightguide with the tips of the prismatic structures in contact with the lightguide such that the two are optically coupled.
  • the second substrate comprises a reflector.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a (meth)acrylic PSA. Any areas of the first substrate may be filled with a pocket material as described above.
  • the pocket material may comprise a silicone PSA having a refractive index less than that of the first substrate and the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the first substrate may comprise a silicone PSA having a refractive index less than that of the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • An additional substrate may be disposed on the silicone PSA opposite the viscoelastic lightguide; the additional substrate comprising a (meth)acrylic light extracting and light emitting substrate, for example, as described in King et al. and Sasagawa et al. In this case, the tips of the prismatic structures are not in contact with the lightguide.
  • the second substrate comprises a reflector.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a (meth)acrylic PSA.
  • the first and second substrates may comprise (meth)acrylic light extracting and light emitting substrates, for example, as described in King et al. and Sasagawa et al, the substrates disposed on the viscoelastic lightguide with the tips of the prismatic structures in contact with the lightguide such that the two substrates are optically coupled to the lightguide.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a (meth)acrylic PSA. Any gaps between the substrates and the viscoelastic lightguide are filled with a silicone PSA having a refractive index less than that of the (meth)acrylic substrates and the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the first and second substrates may comprise a silicone PSA.
  • a first additional substrate may disposed on the first substrate opposite the viscoelastic layer, and a second additional substrate on the second substrate opposite the viscoelastic layer.
  • the first and second additional substrates may comprise (meth)acrylic films, for example, as described in King et al. and Sasagawa et al.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a (meth)acrylic PSA.
  • the first and second substrates may comprise first and second glasses, respectively, which may or may not be the same glass.
  • the first substrate comprises a viscoelastic layer
  • the second substrate comprises a reflector.
  • the first substrate may comprise a PSA
  • the second substrate may comprise a specular reflector.
  • the first substrate may have a refractive index greater than or less than that of the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the first substrate comprises a light transmissive substrate that is not a viscoelastic layer
  • the second substrate comprises a reflector.
  • the first substrate may comprise a polymeric film.
  • the optical articles described above may have substrates that are interchangeable.
  • a first substrate may comprise an imaged layer that may be exchanged with a different imaged layer.
  • an additional layer disposed on a first substrate may be exchanged with a different additional layer.
  • an adhesive layer may be disposed on a surface of any of the optical articles described herein.
  • Suitable adhesives include PSAs, optically clear PSAs, optically diffuse PSAs such as those described above, radiation cured adhesives, hot melt adhesives, cold seal adhesives, heat activated adhesives, structural adhesives having an adhesive bond strength of at least about 6 MPa, and the like.
  • a release liner may be disposed on the surface of any of the substrates such as the first substrate, second substrate, and/or any additional substrates. Suitable release liners are described above.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may comprise two layers wherein one of the layers comprises particles as described above. In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide may comprise three layers: a first viscoelastic lightguide, a second viscoelastic lightguide disposed on the first viscoelastic lightguide, a polymeric film disposed on the second viscoelastic lightguide opposite the first viscoelastic lightguide, and a third viscoelastic lightguide disposed on the first viscoelastic lightguide opposite the second viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the polymeric film may be designed to emit light.
  • the viscoelastic lightguides may comprise the same polymer, or they may comprise different polymers.
  • the viscoelastic lightguides may have refractive index differences of from about 0.002 to about 0.5, from about 0.005 to about 0.5, from about 0.01 to about 0.5, from about 0.02 to about 0.5, from about 0.03 to about 0.5, from about 0.04 to about 0.5, from about 0.05 to about 0.5, from about 0.1 to about 0.5, from about 0.2 to about 0.5, from about 0.3 to about 0.5, or from about 0.4 to about 0.5.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may be made using any method or process commonly used for making viscoelastic articles. Typical processes comprise those that are continuous processes such as continuous cast and cure, extrusion, microreplication, and embossing methods. Various types of radiation may be used for processes in which a material needs to be cured, e.g., crosslinked. Various types of chemistries, including those that do not require radiation, may be used for materials that need to be cured. If the viscoelastic lightguide is made from a curable material, then the material may be cured before, after or during contact with the light source.
  • the material may be cured before, after or during contact with first and/or second substrates. If a first or second substrate is made from a curable material, then the material may be cured before, after or during contact with the viscoelastic lightguide. If any one or more of the viscoelastic lightguide, first substrate and second substrate is made from a cured material, then the material may be cured using the light source either before, during or after they are optically coupled to the lightguide.
  • Molds may be made by micro-machining and polishing of a mold material to create the desired features, structured surfaces, etc. Mold materials include polymeric, glass and metal materials.
  • the molds may need to be suitable for making optically smooth surfaces of the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the optically smooth surface of the viscoelastic lightguide if made from curable materials, may be formed by simply allowing the material to cure in air or other atmosphere such that the material levels itself. Laser ablation may be used to structure a surface of the viscoelastic lightguide and molds.
  • Optical articles comprising the viscoelastic lightguide and a substrate may be made in a number of ways.
  • the lightguide and substrate may be made separately, contacted and pressed together using finger pressure, a hand roller, an embosser or a laminator.
  • the substrate may be formed on the viscoelastic lightguide by coating a substrate material on the lightguide.
  • the substrate material may then be treated to form the substrate.
  • the substrate material may be extruded onto the viscoelastic lightguide in the form of a layer and cooled to solidify the material to form the substrate.
  • the substrate material may be curable and treated by heating and/or applying radiation to form the substrate.
  • the substrate material may include solvent and the substrate is formed by removing the solvent.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may be formed on the substrate by coating a viscoelastic material on the substrate.
  • the viscoelastic material may then be treated to form the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • the viscoelastic material may be extruded onto the substrate in the form of a layer and cooled to solidify the material to form the lightguide.
  • the viscoelastic material may be curable and treated by heating and/or applying radiation to form the lightguide.
  • the viscoelastic material may include solvent and the lightguide is formed by removing the solvent.
  • an optical article having a partially cured substrate or lightguide, respectively may be made.
  • chemically curing materials may be used such that the material is crosslinked.
  • the material may be cured before, after and/or during contact with another material or the light source.
  • the light source may be optically coupled to the material and curing carried out by injecting light from the light source.
  • a substrate may be used to structure a surface of the viscoelastic lightguide, e.g., the viscoelastic lightguide may not be structured by itself, rather, it becomes structured when contacted with a structured surface of a substrate. It is also possible for the viscoelastic lightguide to have a structured surface such that it deforms a surface of a substrate to create the interface.
  • the optical articles and optical devices disclosed herein may be provided in any number of ways.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be provided as sheets or strips laid flat, or they can be rolled up to form a roll.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be packaged as single items, or in multiples, in sets, etc.
  • the optical articles and light sources may be provided in an assembled form, i.e., as an optical device.
  • the optical articles and light sources may be provided as kits wherein the two are separate from each other and assembled at some point by the user.
  • the optical articles and light sources may also be provided separately such that they can be mixed and matched according to the needs of the user.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be temporarily or permanently assembled to light up.
  • optical articles disclosed herein may be altered depending on a particular use.
  • the optical articles can be cut or divided by any suitable means, e.g., using a scissors or a die cutting method.
  • a particularly useful die cutting method is described in U.S. Provisional Ser. No. 61/046,813 (64033US002, Sherman et al.).
  • the optical articles and devices may be cut or divided into different shapes such as alphabetic letters; numbers; geometric shapes such as squares, rectangles, triangles, stars and the like.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be used for signage such as for graphic arts applications.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be used on or in windows, walls, wallpaper, wall hangings, pictures, posters, billboards, pillars, doors, floormats, vehicles, or anywhere signage is used.
  • Signage may be single-sided or double-sided as shown in FIGS. 15 c and 18 b , respectively.
  • FIG. 19 shows a schematic drawing of exemplary optical article or optical device 1900 in contact with an article having curved surface 1901 .
  • the optical articles and devices may be used for safety purposes wherever light is desired.
  • the optical articles and devices may be used to illuminate one or more steps of a ladder, steps of a stairway, aisles such as in airplanes and movie theatres, walkways, egress, handrails, work zone identification signs and markings.
  • FIG. 20 shows a schematic drawing of exemplary optical article or optical device 2000 in contact with stairs 2001 of a stairway.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be used in a variety of items such as reading lights; party and holiday decorations such as hats, ornaments, string lighting, balloons, gift bags, greeting cards, wrapping paper; desk and computer accessories such as desk mats, mousepads, notepad holders, writing instruments; sporting items such as fishing lures; craft items such as knitting needles; personal items such as toothbrushes; household and office items such as clock faces, wall plates for light switches, hooks, tools.
  • FIG. 21 shows a schematic drawing of an exemplary cut-out article in which the optical article or optical device (not shown) is incorporated.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be used on clothing and clothing accessories for decorative and/or safety purposes.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be used on outerwear for cyclists, or on clothing or headgear for miners.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be used on or in straps and wristbands of watches, or on or in watch faces.
  • FIG. 22 shows a schematic drawing of exemplary optical article or optical device 2200 incorporated into or on wristband 2201 of a watch.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be used anywhere light is needed or desired.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be disposed on a top surface of a shelf such that light from the article or device, respectively, is emitted in an upward direction.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be disposed on a bottom surface of a shelf such that light from the article or device, respectively, is emitted in a downward direction.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may also be disposed on or within a shelf having a light transmissive portion.
  • the articles and devices may be arranged such that light is emitted from the light transmissive portion.
  • FIG. 23 shows a schematic drawing of an exemplary refrigerator shelf in which the optical article or optical device (not shown) is incorporated such that light is emitted in upward and/or downward directions.
  • optical articles and devices may be used as flashlights.
  • optical articles and optical devices may be disposed on the outside or inside of a battery cover plate or other part of an electronic handheld device.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may or may not be hardwired to the electronic device's battery but could have its own power source.
  • the electronic device's battery cover may or may not be removable from the rest of the device comprising the display.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be used for vehicles such as automobiles, marine vehicles, buses, trucks, railcars, trailers, aircraft, and aerospace vehicles.
  • the optical articles and devices may be used on almost any surface of a vehicle including the exterior, interior, or any in-between surface.
  • the optical articles and devices may be used to light up door handles on the exterior and/or interior of a vehicle.
  • the optical articles and devices may be used to illuminate trunk compartments, for example, they may be positioned on the underside of the trunk lid or inside the compartment.
  • the optical articles and devices may be used on bumpers, spoilers, floor boards, windows, on or as tail lights, sill plate lights, puddle lights, emergency flashers, center high mounted stop lights, or side lights and markers.
  • the optical articles and devices may be used to illuminate the inside of engine compartments, for example, they may be positioned on the underside of the hood, inside the compartment, or on an engine part.
  • the optical articles and devices may also be used on the edge surfaces of vehicular doors between the exterior and interior panels of the doors. These optical articles and devices may be used to provide a variety of information for the user, manufacturer, etc.
  • the optical articles and devices may be used to illuminate the instrument panel of a vehicle where lighted areas are typically displayed.
  • the optical articles and devices may be used on other interior items such as cupholders, consoles, handles, seats, doors, dashboards, headrests, steering wheels, wheels, portable lights, compasses, and the like.
  • the optical articles and devices may be used on back or pass areas for reading light or to provide ambient lighting for inside a vehicle.
  • FIG. 24 shows an exemplary automobile and exemplary optical article or optical device 2400 .
  • the optical article or device is disposed on edge surface 2401 of the passenger door.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be used in the manufacture of an item or as a replacement part of an item.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be sold to an automobile manufacturer or automobile repair shop for assembly or repair of some specific part of an automobile.
  • FIG. 25 shows an exemplary automobile having tail light 2500 .
  • An optical article or optical device (not shown) is disposed behind the outside layer of the tail light which is typically red, yellow or clear plastic.
  • the tail light may comprise a cavity with a light bulb or LED as a light source.
  • An optical article or device may be used in the cavity as a replacement for the light source.
  • the tail light may not comprise a cavity or at least comprise a much smaller cavity than is used in today's automobiles.
  • An optical article or optical device may be disposed behind or within the outside layer of the tail light such that the overall size of the tail light is reduced.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be used for traffic safety such as for traffic signs, street signs, highway dividers and barriers, toll booths, pavement markings, and work zone identification signs and markings.
  • the optical articles and devices may be used on license plates for decoration, to provide information such as vehicle registration, etc.
  • the optical articles and devices may also be used to provide light near license plates such that the license plates are lit up from the side, top, etc.
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be used with illumination devices comprising hollow light recycling cavities sometimes referred to as backlight assemblies.
  • Backlight assemblies may be used for signage or general lighting.
  • Exemplary backlight assemblies are disclosed in WO 2006/125174 (Hoffman et al.) and US 2008/0074901 (David et al.).
  • the optical articles and optical devices disclosed herein may be used to replace the light sources described in these references.
  • FIG. 26 a shows a schematic cross section of an exemplary backlight assembly 2600 .
  • the backlight assembly comprises housing 2605 having a plurality of internal surfaces 2606 a - c and two opposing side surfaces 2607 a and b (not shown) substantially parallel to the plane of the cross section. At least one of these internal surfaces 2606 a - c and 2607 a and b is reflective.
  • Backlight assembly 2600 also comprises light emitting film 2610 .
  • Housing 2605 and light emitting film 2610 form an enclosed backlight.
  • Light emitting film 2610 may comprise any material that transmits light from inside the enclosed backlight to outside illumination device 2600 .
  • Light emitting film 2610 may comprise a polymeric film which may be diffusive and/or translucent. The light emitting film may also provide an image as described above.
  • Housing 2605 may comprise metal and/or polymer.
  • Reflective internal surfaces may comprise any of the reflectors and reflective surfaces described above.
  • Backlight assembly 2600 comprises at least one optical article as disclosed herein.
  • the optical article may be disposed on at least one of internal surfaces 2606 a - c , 2607 a - b , and 2611 which is the internal surface of light emitting film 2610 .
  • FIG. 26 a shows optical article 2615 disposed on internal surface 2606 a .
  • the optical article may comprise a viscoelastic lightguide disposed on a polymeric substrate. If the viscoelastic lightguide is a pressure sensitive adhesive, it may be directly adhered to internal surface 2606 a .
  • One or more light sources is disposed such that light emitted by the one or more light sources can enter the viscoelastic lightguide of optical article 2615 .
  • a light source may be disposed along the edge of the optical article that is adjacent internal surface 2606 b.
  • FIG. 26 b shows a schematic cross section of an exemplary backlight assembly 2620 .
  • the enclosed backlight is formed as described above for FIG. 26 a , except that optical articles 2625 a and 2625 b are disposed on opposing internal surfaces 2606 b and c.
  • FIG. 26 c shows a schematic cross section of an exemplary backlight assembly 2630 .
  • the enclosed backlight is formed as described above for FIG. 26 a , except that optical article 2635 is disposed on internal surface 2611 of light emitting film 2610 .
  • Optical article 2635 may comprise a viscoelastic lightguide and light may be emitted from either face of the lightguide, i.e., into the cavity of the assembly or into the light emitting film.
  • the optical articles comprising the viscoelastic lightguide may emit light from one or more surfaces.
  • the optical articles may emit light from one or both faces.
  • Additional films, layers, etc. may be disposed on either side of light emitting film 2610 .
  • a three-quarter mirror comprising a multilayer optical film may be disposed on surface 2611 .
  • Multilayer optical films are described in references cited above. Retrore
  • the optical articles and optical devices may be used on or in display devices such as cell phones, personal digital devices, MP3 players, digital picture frames, monitors, laptop computers, projectors such as mini-projectors, global positioning displays, televisions, etc.
  • the optical articles may be used in place of conventional lightguides used to backlight a display panel of the display device.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide may be used to replace a solid or hollow lightguide that distributes light from one or more substantially linear or point light sources.
  • the display device can be assembled without the need for adhesives to bond display components to the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • Exemplary display devices include those having LCD and plasma display panels. Exemplary display devices are described in US 2008/232135 A1 (Kinder et al.) and U.S. Pat. No. 6,111,696 (Allen et al.)
  • FIG. 27 shows a schematic cross section of exemplary display device 2700 .
  • Optical device 2701 comprises light source 2702 and viscoelastic lightguide 2703 .
  • the display device also comprises polarizer 2710 disposed between LCD panel 2715 and viscoelastic lightguide 2703 .
  • Exemplary polarizers and LCD panels are described in Allen et al.
  • the optical articles and devices may be used for lighting buttons and keypads in various electronic devices including the display devices described above.
  • the optical articles and devices are used in place of a conventional lightguide as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,498,535 (Hoyle); U.S. 2007/0279391 A1 (Marttila, et al.), U.S. 2008/0053800 A1 (Hoyle), and U.S. Ser. No. 12/199,862 (63619US006, Sahlin, et al.).
  • FIG. 28 shows a schematic cross section of exemplary keypad assembly 2800 .
  • Optical device 2801 comprises light source 2802 and viscoelastic lightguide 2803 .
  • Optical assembly 2800 also comprises a plurality of keys with each key 2804 a comprising a corresponding protrusion 2804 b . Also shown are domesheet 2805 and conductive popples 2806 . When a user depresses key 2804 a in a downward direction as shown by arrow 2810 , protrusion 2804 b contacts viscoelastic lightguide 2803 which then contacts domesheet 2805 . Domesheet 2805 is pressed down on popple 2806 such that at least a portion of the popple is pushed inside out. The popple then contacts surrounding electrical contacts (not shown) such that light is emitted from the lightguide to light up the corresponding key.
  • top surface 2807 of viscoelastic lightguide 2803 is substantially not in contact with anything but the surrounding air.
  • a substrate is disposed on top surface 2807 .
  • the substrate may comprise any of those described herein.
  • the substrate may be designed to extract light from viscoelastic lightguide 2803 when the surrounding air is displaced at the surface of the substrate.
  • the substrate may comprise a polymeric film having a refractive index less than that of viscoelastic lightguide 2803 .
  • the substrate may comprise a viscoelastic layer having a refractive index less than that of viscoelastic lightguide 2803 .
  • the substrate may comprise a pressure sensitive adhesive layer having a refractive index less than that of viscoelastic lightguide 2803 .
  • FIG. 29 shows a schematic cross section of exemplary signage.
  • Viscoelastic lightguide 2901 is disposed on multilayer optical film 2902 that is a mirror film.
  • Extractor layer 2903 is disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 2901 opposite the mirror film.
  • the extractor layer comprises a polymeric film capable of extracting light from the viscoelastic layer.
  • the extractor layer may have a refractive index greater than that of the viscoelastic layer.
  • a pattern of white dots (not shown) may be a part of extractor layer 2903 such that light is emitted uniformly from the layer.
  • Diffuse layer 2904 is disposed on extractor layer 2903 and graphic film 2905 is disposed on top of the diffuse layer.
  • An air gap may be disposed between the extractor layer and the diffuse layer although this is not shown in FIG. 29 .
  • optical articles and optical devices disclosed herein may be incorporated into security films or laminates. These security laminates are used to protect documents or packages to ensure that underlying items are not altered. Security laminates may be used to make driver licenses, passports, tamper proof seals and the like. Exemplary security film constructions are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,510,171 (Faykish); U.S. Pat. No. 6,288,842 (Florczak et al.); and U.S. Ser. No. 12/257,223 (64812US002, Endle et al.).
  • optical articles and optical devices may be used in the construction of an illuminated license plate.
  • Useful optical articles include the front lit and back lit optical articles described in U.S. 2007/0006493 (Eberwein); U.S. 2007/0031641 A1 (Frisch et al.); U.S. 20070209244 (Prollius et al.); WO 2008/076612 A1 (Eberwein); WO 2008/121475 A1 (Frisch); WO 2008/016978 (Wollner et al.) and WO 2007/92152 A2 (Eberwein).
  • the optical articles and devices described herein may be used for creating three-dimensional (3D) images in displays, buttons, keypads and the like.
  • 3D automotive displays and security laminates may be made.
  • the optical articles and devices may be used with microlens sheeting in which a composite image floats above or below the sheeting, or both.
  • the optical articles and devices may be used with microlens sheetings described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,336,422 B2 (Dunn et al.), U.S. 2008/0130126 A1 (Brooks et al.), U.S. 2007/0081254 A1 (Endle et al.), U.S.
  • the optical articles and devices may comprise an electrical circuit.
  • the first substrate may comprise an electrical circuit.
  • the first substrate may also comprise a reflector which comprises an electrical circuit.
  • the first substrate may also comprise a mirror which comprises an electrical circuit.
  • the light source may be in electrical communication with the electrical circuit.
  • the light source may comprise an array of multiple light sources.
  • the viscoelastic lightguide can be formed onto the electrical circuit such that the light sources inject light into the viscoelastic lightguide throughtout the entire area of the layer.
  • the optical articles and devices may be used in sensing/detecting devices wherein a sensor is disposed to receive light emitted from the viscoelastic lightguide. Also disclosed is a sensing/detecting device in which the light source is replaced with a sensor/detector.
  • the sensor/detector can be a photodetector, a silicon photodiode, an IR detector, a solar cell, or an optoelectronic device, or some combination thereof.
  • optical articles and devices may be incorporated into a therapeutic device.
  • the optical articles and devices disclosed herein may be used in conformal patches for providing light therapy to tissue.
  • Exemplary conformal patches are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,096,066 (Chen et al.). Additional therapeutic devices are described in U.S. 2005/0070976 A1 (Samuel et al.); Electronics World , October 2007; and LEDs Magazine , November 2006.
  • in contact and “disposed on” are used generally to describe that two items are adjacent one another such that the whole item can function as desired. This may mean that additional materials can be present between the adjacent items, as long as the item can function as desired.
  • a silicone urea PSA with an elastomer was prepared by placing 14.86 parts PDMS Diamine-1 in a glass reactor with 0.05 parts Polyamine-1, 39.00 parts toluene and 21.00 parts 2-propanol. To this solution was added 0.23 parts H12MDI. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for two hours and became viscous. To this was added 25.00 parts of MQ Resin-1.
  • the resulting silicone urea PSA contained a molar ratio of PDMS Diamine-1/Polyamine-1/H12MDI of 1/1/2 and was formulated with 50 weight % MQ Resin-1.
  • the silicone urea PSA was coated on a PET release liner (LOPAREX 5100 from Loparex LLC) to form a PSA layer having a dry thickness of about 25 um.
  • the refractive index of the silicone urea PSA layer was about 1.40.
  • a laminate was prepared using a tape (VHBTM Acrylic Tape 4910F from 3M Company) comprising a clear acrylic PSA (nominal thickness 1 mm) disposed on a liner (0.13 mm).
  • the refractive index of the acrylic PSA layer was 1.473 as measured using an Abbe refractometer.
  • the silicone urea PSA layer was laminated to the acrylic PSA layer using a hand roller.
  • the tape liner was removed and a second silicone urea PSA layer was laminated to the newly exposed side of the acrylic PSA layer.
  • the PET release liners on the silicone urea PSA layers were removed. Laminates were made using a single layer of tape and up to 15 layers of tape, disposed between the silicone urea PSA layers.
  • An LED light source was pressed into the edge of the acrylic PSA layer of a 4 ⁇ 4 in. sample of the laminate such that the LED was approximately perpendicular to the width of the laminate and parallel to the length. The LED was activated. Light propagated through the acrylic PSA layer and was observed to exit the layer by holding a piece of paper along the edge opposite the edge where the LED was in contact with the layer. Light did not appear to exit the laminate in any other direction.
  • a laminate was prepared as described for Example 1 except that one of the silicone urea PSA layers was replaced with a multilayer polymeric mirror film (VikuitiTM ESR from 3M Co.).
  • An LED light source was pressed into the edge of the acrylic PSA layer of a 4 ⁇ 4 in. sample of the laminate such that the LED was approximately perpendicular to the width of the laminate and parallel to the length. The LED was activated. Light propagated through the acrylic PSA layer and was observed to exit the layer by holding a piece of paper along the edge opposite the edge where the LED was in contact with the layer. Light did not appear to exit the laminate in any other direction.
  • An acrylic extractor film having microstructured features was obtained. This film is described in detail in US 2005/0052750 A1 (King et al.).
  • One major surface of the acrylic extractor film comprised saw-tooth or pyramidal prismatic features.
  • the opposing major surface of the film comprised cylindrical lenses.
  • the refractive index of the acrylic extractor film was from about 1.52 to about 1.56.
  • a laminate was prepared as described for Example 1 except that one of the silicone urea PSA layers was replaced with a multilayer polymeric mirror film (VikuitiTM ESR from 3M Co.).
  • the acrylic extractor film was pressed into the silicone urea PSA layer such that the pyramidal prismatic features were in contact with the acrylic PSA layer.
  • the LED was activated.
  • the acrylic extractor film was immediately lit with light from the acrylic PSA layer.
  • a transfer tape (3MTM Optically Clear Laminating Adhesive 8187 from 3M Company) comprising an optically clear acrylic PSA (175 um thickness) disposed between 2 PET liners (each 50 um thickness) was used.
  • the refractive index of the optically clear acrylic PSA layer was 1.47.
  • Laminates were prepared by laminating two glass slides to each other using two layers of the 8187 PSA (350 um total thickness). The glass slides were 75 ⁇ 38 ⁇ 1 mm and No. 2956 from Esco Products Inc.
  • the silicone urea PSA layer was laminated to the 8187 PSA layer using a hand roller.
  • the tape liner was removed and a second silicone urea PSA layer was laminated to the newly exposed side of the 8187 PSA layer.
  • the PET release liners on the silicone urea PSA layers were removed. Laminates were prepared by laminating two glass slides described above to each other using the three layer PSA.
  • An LED light source was pressed into the edge of the 8187 PSA layer of a laminate such that the LED was approximately perpendicular to the width of the laminate and parallel to the length. The LED was activated. Light propagated through the 8187 PSA layer and was observed to exit the layer by holding a piece of paper along the edge opposite the edge where the LED was in contact with the layer. Light did not appear to exit the laminate in any other direction.
  • a transfer tape (3MTM Optically Clear Laminating Adhesive 8142 from 3M Company) comprising an optically clear acrylic PSA (50 um thickness) disposed between 2 PET liners (each 50 um thickness) was used.
  • the refractive index of the acrylic 8142 PSA layer was 1.47.
  • Two layers of the 8187 PSA were laminated together (350 um total thickness).
  • the silicone urea PSA layer was laminated to the 8142 PSA layer using a hand roller.
  • the tape liner was removed and a second silicone urea PSA layer was laminated to the newly exposed side of the 8142 PSA layer.
  • the PET release liners on the silicone urea PSA layers were removed. Laminates were prepared by laminating two glass slides described above to each other using the three layer PSA.
  • An LED light source was pressed into the edge of the 8142 PSA layer of a laminate such that the LED was approximately perpendicular to the width of the laminate and parallel to the length. The LED was activated. Light propagated through the 8142 PSA layer and was observed to exit the layer by holding a piece of paper along the edge opposite the edge where the LED was in contact with the layer. Light did not appear to exit the laminate in any other direction.
  • a transfer tape (3MTM Optically Clear Laminating Adhesive 8141 from 3M Company) comprising an optically clear acrylic PSA (25 um thickness) disposed between 2 PET liners (each 50 um thickness) was used.
  • the refractive index of the acrylic 8142 PSA layer was 1.47.
  • the silicone urea PSA layer was laminated to the 8141 PSA layer using a hand roller.
  • the tape liner was removed and a second silicone urea PSA layer was laminated to the newly exposed side of the 8141 PSA layer.
  • the PET release liners on the silicone urea PSA layers were removed. Laminates were prepared by laminating two glass slides described above to each other using the three layer PSA.
  • An LED light source was pressed into the edge of the 8141 PSA layer of a laminate such that the LED was approximately perpendicular to the width of the laminate and parallel to the length. The LED was activated. Light propagated through the 8141 PSA layer and was observed to exit the layer by holding a piece of paper along the edge opposite the edge where the LED was in contact with the layer. Light did not appear to exit the laminate in any other direction.
  • a 3-layer laminate was prepared from 3 pieces of tape (VHBTM Acrylic Tape 4910F from 3M Company) comprising a clear acrylic PSA having a nominal thickness 1 mm and a refractive index of 1.473 as measured using an Abbe refractometer.
  • a hand roller was used to prepare the 3-layer laminate.
  • This 3-layer laminate was then laminated to the face surface (viewer's side) of 3MTM Diamond GradeTM Reflective Sheeting from 3MTM Company (4′′ ⁇ 8′′ area) so that the sheeting was front lit.
  • a side-emitting LED was pressed into the core PSA from one end and light was easily passed through the entire 8 inches of the 3-layer laminate and was able to be visibly seen exiting. Light was also extracted perpendicular to the light source along the white hexagon seal pattern of the sheeting.
  • a 3-layer laminate was prepared from 3 pieces of tape (VHBTM Acrylic Tape 4910F from 3M Company) comprising a clear acrylic PSA having a nominal thickness 1 mm and a refractive index of 1.473 as measured using an Abbe refractometer.
  • a hand roller was used to prepare the 3-layer laminate.
  • a 93/7 w/w isooctylacrylate/acrylamide solvent based adhesive was loaded with 2 and 10 pph hollow glass spheres having a mean diameter of about 18 micron (SPHERICEL Grade 60P18 from Potters Industries Inc.), and each of the loaded PSAs were coated to a dry thickness of 0.5 mil (13 micron).
  • the PSA handspread loaded with 2 pph hollow glass spheres was cut into three inch wide strips. These strips were laminated to a polymeric mirror film as described in Example 2, so that they formed a square.
  • the PSA handspread loaded with 10 pph hollow glass spheres was laminated to fill the square.
  • VHB sample On top of the adhesive matrix with hollow glass spheres was laminated the 3 mm thick VHB sample.
  • the silicone urea PSA layer described in Example 1 was hand laminated on top of the VHB adhesive.
  • a translucent graphic film was placed on top of the silicone PSA layer. Side-emitting LED lights were injected into the light guide (VHB layer) from two opposing sides of the square, and light was extracted through the silicone urea PSA layer and into the translucent graphic film.
  • An adhesive comprising 85/14/1 by weight of isooctyl acrylate/isobornyl acrylate/acrylic acid, 0.08 wt. % 1-6-hexanediol diacrylate and 0.20 wt. % IRGACURE 651 (Ciba Specialty) was coated onto a polymeric mirror film as described in Example 2, using a notched bar knife coater.
  • the adhesive was coated with a wet thickness of 50 mils (1250 um) on one side and 40 mils (1000 um) on the other to give a slight wedge.
  • the adhesive coating was covered with a silicone release liner (CP Films T10 2.0 mil polyester release liner) and cured using a low intensity UV lamp for 15 minutes.
  • the adhesive had a refractive index of 1.474 as measured on an Abbe refractometer.
  • a translucent graphic film was then laminated to the adhesive layer opposite the polymeric mirror film (8′′ ⁇ 10′′ area).
  • a side-emitting LED circuit was pressed into the cured PSA layer and light was easily passed through the entire 10 inches of PSA length and was able to be visibly seen exiting. Light was also extracted perpendicular to the light source and into the translucent graphic.
  • a flexible acrylic lightguide (0.5 mm thick) designed to extract light in a cellular phone keypad was obtained.
  • the lightguide material is described in US 2007/0191506 A1 (Rajan) and comprised a methacrylate functionalized acrylate oligomer and a polyalkyleneglycol dimethacrylate.
  • a silicone urea PSA layer as described in Example 1 was hand laminated to both top and bottom surfaces of the flexible acrylic lightguide material.
  • a simple side-emitting LED light was injected into the lightguide, and light was extracted along the extraction pattern through the silicone PSA cladding. Light was guided between the cladding and the lightguide, and did not leak through the cladding at any point other than the intended extraction points.
  • An adhesive composition formulated with 90/10 isooctyl acrylate/acrylic acid, 0.3 wt % hexanediol diacrylate and 0.2 wt % IRGACURE 651 photoinitiator (Ciba Specialty) was coated onto a mirror film which had 2 ribbons of side-emitting light emitting diodes (LEDs) attached 9 inches apart (with double stick adhesive).
  • the adhesive composition was coated using a notched bar knife coater and covered with a silicone release liner (CP Films T10 2.0 mil polyester release liner).
  • the adhesive composition was cured using a low intensity UV lamp for 15 minutes.
  • the adhesive composition was coated at a wet thickness of 70 mils to completely encapsulate the LED ribbons.
  • the adhesive had a refractive index of 1.474 (as measured on an Abbe refractometer).
  • the adhesive was removed from the ribbons at a connection point so that the LEDs could be powered.
  • An extractor layer having an extractor pattern of dots printed on a clear 5 mil PET was laminated to the light guide (9′′ ⁇ 9′′ area) with the embedded LED ribbons.
  • a diffuse layer of white PET film was then placed on top of the extractor layer, and finally a vinyl graphic film was placed on top of this (image printed on vinyl film).
  • the encapsulated side emitting LEDs were powered and light was easily passed through the entire 9 inches of PSA length and was able to be visibly seen exiting via the extraction pattern through the vinyl graphic film.

Abstract

Disclosed herein is an optical device having a light source and a viscoelastic lightguide. Light from the light source enters the viscoelastic lightguide and is transported within the lightguide by total internal reflection. The viscoelastic lightguide may comprise a pressure sensitive adhesive. The optical device may be used in a variety of constructions wherein the device emits light being transported within the viscoelastic lightguide. Constructions include those used for signs, markings, illumination devices, display devices, keypad assemblies and tail light assemblies for vehicles.

Description

    FIELD
  • This disclosure relates to optical articles and devices, particularly lightguides used to facilitate distribution of light in electronic devices. The lightguides are made with viscoelastic materials.
  • BACKGROUND
  • Lightguides are used to facilitate distribution of light from a light source over an area much larger than the light source. Lightguides comprise optically transmissive materials and may have different forms such as slab, wedge, and pseudo-wedge forms. Most lightguides are designed to accept light at an edge surface and allow this light to propagate by total internal reflection between a back surface and an output surface, toward an opposing edge surface from which the light enters. Light is emitted uniformly from the output surface using extracting features that are positioned in various types of patterns on the output surface.
  • SUMMARY
  • Disclosed herein is an optical device having a light source and a viscoelastic lightguide. Light from the light source enters the viscoelastic lightguide and is transported within the lightguide by total internal reflection. The viscoelastic lightguide may comprise a pressure sensitive adhesive. The optical device may be used in a variety of constructions wherein the device emits light being transported within the viscoelastic lightguide. Constructions include those used for signs, markings, illumination devices, display devices, keypad assemblies and tail light assemblies for vehicles.
  • These and other aspects of the invention are described in the detailed description below. In no event should the above summary be construed as a limitation on the claimed subject matter which is defined solely by the claims as set forth herein.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTIONS OF DRAWINGS
  • Advantages and features of the invention may be more completely understood by consideration of the following figures in connection with the detailed description provided below. The figures are schematic drawings of various articles and are not necessarily drawn to scale.
  • FIGS. 1 a and 1 b are schematic cross sections of layers illustrating principles of geometric optics.
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic cross section of an exemplary optical device.
  • FIGS. 3 a-b, 4 a-b, 5 a-5 c and 6 a-b show schematic cross sections of exemplary viscoelastic lightguides.
  • FIGS. 7-12 show schematic perspective views of exemplary viscoelastic lightguides.
  • FIG. 13 shows a schematic cross section of an exemplary viscoelastic lightguide.
  • FIGS. 14 and 15 a-l show schematic cross sections of exemplary optical articles.
  • FIGS. 16 and 17 show schematic perspective views of exemplary optical articles.
  • FIGS. 18 a-b show schematic cross sections of exemplary optical articles.
  • FIGS. 19-25 show schematic drawings of exemplary signs and markings comprising exemplary optical articles.
  • FIGS. 26 a-c show schematic cross sections of exemplary illumination devices comprising exemplary optical articles.
  • FIG. 27 comprises a display device comprising an exemplary optical article.
  • FIG. 28 comprises a keypad assembly comprising an exemplary optical article.
  • FIG. 29 comprises a multilayer graphic comprising an exemplary optical article.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • This disclosure relates to U.S. Provisional Application Nos. 61/079,639 filed on Jul. 10, 2008 (64347US002, Sherman et al.); 61/087,387 filed on Aug. 8, 2008 (64691US002, Sherman et al.); 61/114,865 filed on Nov. 14, 2008 (64347US003, Sherman et al.); and 61/114,849 filed on Nov. 14, 2008 (64691US003, Sherman et al.).
  • The optical device disclosed herein includes a light source that emits light, and the light is managed by a viscoelastic lightguide. The optical device may provide one or more advantages. For example, the viscoelastic lightguide is generally soft and compliant such that the light source may be easily coupled to the lightguide so that light can enter the lightguide. In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a PSA which is generally tacky at room temperature. The light source may then be coupled to the viscoelastic lightguide such that it is adhered to the lightguide. This may facilitate assembly of the optical device itself or constructions in which the device is used.
  • Light is typically extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide at one or more desired locations or areas of the lightguide. In some embodiments, an extractor may be used to extract light from the viscoelastic lightguide. Again, due to the soft and compliant properties of the viscoelastic lightguide, the extractor may be easily coupled to the lightguide so that light can enter the lightguide. If the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a PSA, the extractor can be directly adhered to the lightguide without the need for additional materials to bond the two together.
  • The optical device may be used to provide light anywhere it is desired. The optical articles and optical devices may be designed for interior and/or exterior use. The optical articles and optical devices may be designed for household, commercial and/or industrial use. The optical device may be used and/or provided in a construction so that it is portable, i.e., it is a portable source of light. Lighted tapes, signs, labels, stickers, cut-outs, etc. are examples of portable constructions that may be made using the optical device. The optical device may also be used and/or provided in a more stationary construction such as in an electronic display device.
  • The optical device may also be used to provide “light on demand”, e.g., the light source may be activated only under certain conditions such as when parking a vehicle. The optical device may be used to provide exterior lighting of a vehicle, e.g., for tail lights, replacing tail light cavities and their lighting assemblies and which are very space consuming.
  • The viscoelastic lightguide can be used in place of a conventional lightguide used to light display devices. For example, the viscoelastic lightguide may be used to replace a solid or hollow lightguide that distributes light from one or more substantially linear or point light sources. The viscoelastic lightguide can be assembled in a display device without the need for additional materials to bond the lightguide to the display device.
  • The optical device may also be very adaptable, even by a user, so that it can be used in different lighting forms and constructions. For example, the viscoelastic lightguide may be provided in roll or sheet form such that it can be cut into various shapes and sizes. The light source may also be interchangeable with the viscoelastic lightguide, for example, if the light source should become unusable or if a different color of light is desired. Further, if used in a sign construction, graphics can be interchanged, for example, if one would like to update an advertisement.
  • The optical device may provide many more advantages. The optical device can be used to provide light that is bright, diffuse, uniform and/or concentrated over particular areas. The optical device may provide advantages by being thin, flexible (can be flexed by hand) and/or lightweight, and it may even be conformable to a particular shape and size. The viscoelastic lightguide may be tiled to light large areas which may be made easier if the lightguides can be stuck together. Due to its viscoelastic properties, the viscoelastic lightguide may also dampen stresses experienced by the optical device or construction in which the device is used. The viscoelastic lightguide, when disposed on a substrate, may be removable and/or repositionable over time. The optical device may also provide advantages related to cost, because it can be made from commercially available light sources and viscoelastic materials. Additional advantages are described below.
  • The optical device disclosed herein comprises a viscoelastic lightguide and a light source. Light is emitted by the light source, enters the viscoelastic lightguide, and propagates, reflects, and/or refracts according to the law of refraction and the principle of total internal reflection. The behavior of light within the viscoelastic lightguide may depend on a variety of factors such as the surface structure of the lightguide, the presence (or absence) of additional substrate(s) in contact with the viscoelastic lightguide, and/or the material compositions of the viscoelastic lightguide and any additional substrate(s) in contact with the viscoelastic lightguide. In addition, the behavior of light within the viscoelastic lightguide may depend on the angular distribution of light that enters the lightguide.
  • A brief description of the law of refraction and total internal reflection is provided for the convenience of the reader. This brief description forms the basis for understanding the behavior of light with respect to the optical device disclosed herein. For a detailed description of the behavior of light see, for example: “Seeing the Light” by D. S. Falk et al., John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1986, pp. 53-56.
  • The law of refraction is illustrated in FIGS. 1 a and 1 b for a given pair of first and second layers. Light (represented by one or more rays for simplicity) propagates within the first layer and strikes the interface between the two layers. The light refracts, at a transmittance angle θt, into the second layer according to the law of refraction:

  • sin θt=(n 1 /n 2)(sin θi)
  • wherein θi is the incident angle, and n1 and n2 are the refractive indices of the first and second layers, respectively.
  • FIG. 1 a shows a pair of layers 100 having first layer 110 and second layer 120 with refractive indices n1 and n2, respectively, such that n1<n2. Light propagating within the first layer strikes interface 130 at many different incident angles and refracts into the second layer at angles within the transmittance angles θt.
  • FIG. 1 b shows a pair of layers 140 having first layer 150 and second layer 160 with refractive indices n1 and n2, respectively, such that n1>n2. Light propagating within the first layer strikes interface 170 at incident angle θi and refracts at transmittance angle θt into the second layer according to the law of refraction. Only light having an incident angle less than or equal to critical angle θc will enter the second layer. All other light incident upon the interface is reflected. The critical angle θc is defined as:

  • sin θc =n 2 /n 1
  • In general, total internal reflection occurs when light having a particular angular component or distribution is incident upon an interface at one or more angles greater than the critical angle θc.
  • FIG. 2 shows an exemplary optical device 200. Light source 220 is positioned relative to viscoelastic lightguide 210 such that light emitted by the light source enters viscoelastic lightguide 210 and is transported within the layer by total internal reflection. Light emitted by the light source is represented by rays 230 which enter viscoelastic lightguide 210 through input surface 213 adapted to receive light from the light source. Light within the viscoelastic lightguide is represented by single ray 240 which is transported by total internal reflection. At least a portion of the viscoelastic lightguide has an optically smooth surface 211 and/or 212.
  • An optically smooth surface, as used herein, means that the surface is smooth enough such that light incident upon the surface is not affected undesirably by the surface, e.g., the surface is free of defects having at least one dimension larger than the wavelength of the incident light. The optically smooth surface allows at least some of the light entering the viscoelastic lightguide to be reflected at the surface such that this light continues to propagate within the layer according to the principle of total internal reflection.
  • In general, light propagating within the viscoelastic lightguide is either reflected or extracted from the lightguide. For reflection of light incident on an optically smooth surface, the observed reflection angle is within about 10° of the calculated reflection angle. Likewise, for refraction of light incident on an optically smooth surface, the observed transmittance angle is within about 10° of the calculated transmittance angle. Total internal reflection occurs if a predetermined amount, or at least within about 10% of a predetermined amount, of light does not escape the viscoelastic lightguide unless it is intentionally extracted from the lightguide.
  • In general, the surfaces of the viscoelastic lightguide may be unstructured as shown in FIG. 2, or they may have any three-dimensional structure depending on the desired effect. In general, a surface of the viscoelastic lightguide may comprise at least one feature that extends along a portion of the surface and is oriented to extract light from the viscoelastic lightguide. In some embodiments, the at least one feature comprises a plurality of features, the features comprising protrusions, depressions, or a combination thereof. Exemplary features comprise protrusions and/or depressions having lenticular, prismatic, ellipsoidal, conical, parabolic, pyramidal, square, or rectangular shapes, or a combination thereof. Features comprising lenses are particularly useful for directing light to a preferred angular distribution. Exemplary features comprising linear prisms or elongated prisms are also particularly useful. Other exemplary features comprise protrusions and/or depressions having elongated, irregular, variably sloped lenticular, or random columnar shapes, or a combination thereof. Hybrids of any combination of shapes may be used, for example, elongated parabolic, pyramidal prismatic, rectangular-based prismatic, and rounded-tip prismatic shapes. The features may comprise random combinations of shapes.
  • Sizes of the features may be described by their overall shapes in three dimensions. In some embodiments, each feature may have a dimension of from about 1 to about 100 um, for example, from about 5 to about 70 um. A viscoelastic lightguide may have features that are all the same shape, but the sizes of the shapes may vary in at least one dimension. A viscoelastic lightguide may also have features that are different shapes, and the sizes of these features may or may not vary in any given dimension.
  • Surface structures of the features may also be varied. Surface structure of a feature generally refers to the sub-structure of the feature. Exemplary surface structures include optically smooth surfaces, irregular surfaces, patterned surfaces, or a combination thereof. For a viscoelastic lightguide having a plurality of features, each of the features may have the same surface structure. For a viscoelastic lightguide having a plurality of features, some of the features may have the same surface structure. For a viscoelastic lightguide having a plurality of features, each of the features may have a different surface structure. The surface structure of a feature may vary over portions of the feature.
  • An optically smooth surface of a feature may form part of the optically smooth surface of the viscoelastic lightguide. The optically smooth surfaces of the feature and the viscoelastic lightguide may be continuous or discontinuous with each other. If a plurality of features is used, the surfaces of some extracting features may be completely optically smooth or some may be partially optically smooth. The optically smooth surface may be in contact with an adjacent lightguide or substrate on which the viscoelastic lightguide is disposed.
  • The number of features, if used, for a given viscoelastic lightguide is at least one. A plurality of features, meaning at least two, may also be used. In general, any number of features may be included, e.g., 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 features; greater than 1, greater than 10, greater than 20, greater than 30, greater than 40, greater than 50, greater than 100, greater than 200, greater than 500, greater than 1000, or greater than 2000 features; or from about 1 to about 10, from about 1 to about 20, from about 1 to about 30, from about 1 to about 40, from about 1 to about 50, from about 1 to about 100, from about 1 to about 200, from about 1 to about 500, from about 1 to about 1000, or from about 1 to about 2000 features.
  • The features may be randomly arranged, arranged in some type of regular pattern, or both. The distance between features may also vary. The features may be discreet or they may overlap. The features may be arranged in close proximity to one another, in substantial contact with each other, immediately adjacent each other, or some combination thereof. A useful distance between features is up to about 10 um, or from about 0.05 um to about 10 um. The features may be offset with respect to one another, angularly as well as transversely. The areal density of the features may change over the length, width, or both.
  • The features may be arranged to obtain a desired optical effect. The features may be arranged to extract light uniformly or as a gradient from the viscoelastic lightguide, to hide discrete light sources, or to reduce Moiré.
  • The features may be used to control the amount and/or direction of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide. This can be carried out generally by varying the shape, size, surface structure, and/or orientation of the features. If a plurality of features is used, then the number and/or arrangement of the features may be varied, as well as the orientation of the features relative to each other.
  • In general, one may determine theoretically how varying the orientation of each feature can affect the amount and distribution of light that may be extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide. This may be carried out using ray tracing techniques consistent with the law of refraction and the principle of total internal reflection.
  • The shape of a feature may change the angular component of light which can increase or decrease the amount of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide. This may be the case if light propagates by total internal reflection within the viscoelastic lightguide and strikes a surface of a feature at an angle less than, equal to, or greater than the critical angle for the viscoelastic lightguide and air and/or an adjacent substrate(s). The amount of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide may increase or decrease accordingly.
  • The size of a feature may be changed such that more or less light can reflect off a surface of the feature, thus increasing or decreasing the amount of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • The surface structure of a feature may be used to control the distribution of light that is extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide. Light having a particular angular distribution may strike a feature and be extracted uniformly and/or randomly from the viscoelastic lightguide. Light may also be extracted uniformly and in a pattern, or randomly and in a pattern.
  • FIG. 3 a shows a schematic cross section of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 310 comprising feature 320. In this example, the feature is a notch-like depression of surface 311. Surfaces 311 and 312 are optically smooth surfaces. The surfaces of feature 320 are optically smooth surfaces. Exemplary behavior of light within viscoelastic lightguide 310 is shown by rays 330 and 331. Light represented by ray 330 propagates by total internal reflection within viscoelastic lightguide 310. Light represented by ray 331 propagates by total internal reflection within viscoelastic lightguide 310 and eventually strikes a surface of feature 320. As a result, the angular component of ray 331 is changed, and light represented by this ray can strike surface 312 at an angle less than the critical angle such that the light is extracted from viscoelastic lightguide 310. Thus, as exemplified in FIG. 3 a, the amount of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide may be increased. The direction in which light may be extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide may be varied by changing the orientation of feature 320 such that the angle at which ray 331 strikes the feature is increased or decreased but remains less than or equal to the critical angle.
  • FIG. 3 b shows a schematic cross section of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 313 comprising features 321 and 322. In this example, the features are notch-like features with one being a protrusion of surface 314 and the other a depression. Surfaces 314 and 315 are optically smooth surfaces. The surfaces of features 321 and 322 are optically smooth surfaces. Exemplary behavior of light within viscoelastic lightguide 313 is shown by rays 332 and 333. Light represented by ray 332 propagates by total internal reflection within viscoelastic lightguide 313 and eventually strikes a surface of feature 322. As a result, the angular component of ray 332 is changed, and light represented by this ray can strike surface 314 at an angle less than the critical angle such that the light is extracted from viscoelastic lightguide 313. Light represented by ray 333 propagates by total internal reflection within viscoelastic lightguide 313 and eventually strikes a surface of feature 321. As a result, the angular component of ray 333 is changed, and light represented by this ray can strike surface 314 at an angle less than the critical angle such that the light is extracted from viscoelastic lightguide 313. Thus, as exemplified in FIG. 3 b, the amount of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide may be increased, and the direction(s) in which light may be extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide may be varied by changing the orientation of the feature(s).
  • FIG. 4 a shows a schematic cross section of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 410 comprising features 420 that protrude from surface 411. Each of the features 420 has an overall hemispherical shape with an irregular surface for diffusing light. Surface 411 is optically smooth and includes the surface around each of the features and is generally continuous. Thus, the surfaces of features 420 are not part of the optically smooth surface 411. Surface 412 is optically smooth. Exemplary behavior of light within viscoelastic lightguide 410 is shown by rays 430-433. Light represented by ray 430 propagates by total internal reflection within viscoelastic lightguide 410. Light represented by rays 431-433, having different angular components, propagates within the viscoelastic lightguide and strikes features 420. Light represented by rays 431 and 432 is extracted from viscoelastic lightguide 410 because both rays strike surfaces of features 420 at angles less than that of the critical angle. Light represented by ray 433, having an angular component different from that of rays 431 and 432, reflects at the surface of feature 420 because the incident angle is greater than the critical angle. The reflected light strikes the surface of the feature again, this time at an angle less than the critical angle, and the light is extracted from viscoelastic lightguide 410.
  • FIG. 4 b shows the schematic cross section of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 410. Light (not shown) having a wide angular distribution propagates within viscoelastic lightguide 410 such that it is extracted diffusely from the lightguide as represented by rays 434.
  • FIGS. 5 a-5 c show schematic cross sections of exemplary viscoelastic lightguides that may be used. In FIG. 5 a, viscoelastic lightguide 500 comprises surface 505 which is irregular such that light represented by rays 515 is diffused upon being extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide. Viscoelastic lightguide 500 also comprises opposing surface 510 which may be an optically smooth surface, a non-optically smooth surface, or a partially optically smooth surface. In FIG. 5 b, viscoelastic lightguide 520 comprises optically smooth surface 525 which includes the optically smooth surfaces of features 526. The features comprise discreet convex lenticular features such that light represented by ray 540 is extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide at a predetermined direction. Viscoelastic lightguide 520 also comprises opposing surface 530 which may be an optically smooth surface, a non-optically smooth surface, or a partially optically smooth surface. In FIG. 5 c, viscoelastic lightguide 550 comprises optically smooth surface 555 which includes the optically smooth surfaces of features 556. The features comprise discreet concave lenticular features such that light represented by ray 570 is emitted from the viscoelastic lightguide at a predetermined direction. Viscoelastic lightguide 550 also comprises opposing surface 560 which may be an optically smooth surface, a non-optically smooth surface, or a partially optically smooth surface.
  • The viscoelastic lightguide may have opposing surfaces that are configured dependently or independently relative to each other. FIG. 6 a shows a schematic cross section of viscoelastic lightguide 600 comprising optically smooth surfaces 605 and 610, each surface including individual convex lenticular features. The features of each surface can be aligned or nearly aligned with each other, or at least within about 100 um. FIG. 6 b shows a schematic cross section of viscoelastic lightguide 620 comprising optically smooth surfaces 625 and 630, each surface including individual concave lenticular features. The features of each surface can be aligned or nearly aligned with each other, or at least within about 100 um.
  • Exemplary features are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,379,016 B1 (Boyd et al.); U.S. Pat. No. 7,046,905 B1 (Gardiner et al.); US 2003/0034445 A1 (Boyd et al.); US 2007/0047254 A1 (Gardiner et al.); US 2008/232135 A1 (Kinder et al.); and U.S. Ser. No. 12/199,862 (63619US006, Sahlin, et al.).
  • The amount and direction of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide may be controlled, at the very least, by the shape, size, number, arrangement, etc. of the features. In general, the viscoelastic lightguide can be designed such that light may be extracted from the lightguide in at least one predetermined direction, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more predetermined directions; from 1 to about 3 predetermined directions; from 1 to about 5 predetermined directions; from 1 to about 10 predetermined directions; or from 1 to about 100 predetermined directions. The light extracted in at least one predetermined direction may be extracted in a pattern. The light extracted in at least one predetermined direction may be extracted uniformly (at the same or nearly the same intensity) or non-uniformly from the viscoelastic lightguide. Light may also be extracted in random directions from the viscoelastic lightguide and/or at various random intensities from the lightguide.
  • FIGS. 7-11 show perspective views of exemplary viscoelastic lightguides and how light may be extracted therefrom. The viscoelastic lightguides shown in FIGS. 7-11 are depicted generically as sheets having square to rectangular shapes. Many other three-dimensional shapes are contemplated as described below. FIG. 7 shows a perspective view of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 700 wherein light represented by rays 705 is extracted in a predetermined direction from the lightguide. FIG. 8 shows a perspective view of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 800 wherein light represented by rays 805 is extracted in two predetermined directions from the lightguide. Light represented by rays 805 is also extracted in a pattern. FIG. 9 shows a perspective view of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 900 wherein light represented by rays 905 is extracted randomly from the lightguide.
  • FIG. 10 shows a perspective view of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 1000. Predetermined shape 1005 is shown by a dotted line and shaded area of surface 1010 of the lightguide. Light represented by rays 1015 is extracted from viscoelastic lightguide 1000 such that the predetermined shape is illuminated. In general, the predetermined shape may comprise one or more discrete areas of the viscoelastic lightguide. Light may be extracted from one or more discrete areas of the viscoelastic lightguide, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more discrete areas, or from 1 to about 5 discrete areas, from 1 to about 50 discrete areas, or from 1 to about 500 discrete areas.
  • FIG. 11 shows a perspective view of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 1100. Predetermined shape 1105 is shown by a dotted line and shaded area of surface 1110. Predetermined shapes 1115 within predetermined shape 1105 are shown by dotted lines and lightly shaded areas. Light represented by rays 1120 is extracted at different intensities such that light extracted from predetermined shapes 1115 is extracted at a higher intensity as compared to light extracted from predetermined shape 1105. In this way, predetermined shape 1105 is illuminated and predetermined shapes 1115 are illuminated at higher intensities.
  • In the examples presented so far, light is shown as being extracted from a surface of the viscoelastic lightguide that is generally perpendicular to the input surface, from opposing surfaces of the lightguide that are generally perpendicular to the input surface, or from a surface that is a major surface of the lightguide. Light may also be extracted from other surfaces of the viscoelastic lightguide. FIG. 12 illustrates how light may be extracted from an exemplary viscoelastic lightguide shaped as a film or sheet. FIG. 12 shows a perspective view of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 1200 comprising opposing major surfaces 1205 a and 1205 b (not shown) and edge surfaces 1225 a, 1225 b, and 1225 c (not shown). In general, light may be extracted from one or some combination of surfaces 1205 a, 1205 b, or 1225 a-c. For example, light may be extracted only from major surface 1205 a as shown by ray 1220 a. For another example, light may be extracted only from edge surface 1225 b. Light which enters the viscoelastic lightguide is shown by ray 1215.
  • FIG. 13 shows a schematic cross section of exemplary viscoelastic lightguide 1300 comprising input edge 1305 and opposing edge surface 1310 having a lenticular surface for directing light in one or more predetermined directions. Light emitted by a light source (not shown) and represented by ray 1315 enters the lightguide (at a first surface) and is transported by total internal reflection within the lightguide until it is extracted from opposing edge surface 1310 (opposing second surface). Light emitted by a light source may also enter the viscoelastic lightguide at a first surface of the lightguide and be extracted at a second surface, wherein the first and second surfaces are from about 45 to about 135° relative to each other.
  • In some embodiments, a surface of the viscoelastic lightguide is microstructured to form air release channels. As used herein, microstructured refers to a surface having one or more features that are microscopic (from about 1 to about 100 um) in at least one dimension. These channels can facilitate air egress so that few air bubbles remain trapped between a viscoelastic lightguide and a substrate. The microstructured surface with air release channels is may be useful with a viscoelastic lightguide that comprises a PSA. For example, a PSA viscoelastic lightguide may have a composition and/or surface structure the same or nearly the same as Controltac™ products available from 3M™ Company. In this way, a user can dispose the viscoelastic lightguide and substrate in some initial position and slide the two relative to each other such that desired positioning is obtained. The microstructure of the microstructured surface may remain and/or change over time.
  • The microstructured surface with air release channels may comprise a variety of shapes including hemispheres, prisms (such as square prisms, rectangular prisms, cylindrical prisms and other similar polygonal features), pyramids, ellipses, grooves (e.g., V-grooves), channels, and the like. Grooves and channels may or may not extend to the edge of a predetermined area. Another exemplary microstructured surface is described in US 2007/0292650 A1 (Suzuki) wherein a microstructured adhesive layer surface has one or more grooves that exist only in an inner area of the surface and are not open at side surfaces of the layer. These grooves may be in the form of a straight line, branched straight lines, cross, circle, oval, or polygon as viewed from above, and where each form may be composed of plural discontinuous grooves. These grooves may have a width of from 5 to 100 micrometers and a depth of from 5 to 50 micrometers.
  • The viscoelastic lightguide is generally in contact with at least one medium. The medium may comprise air or a substrate, and substrates may be polymeric film, metal, glass, and/or fabric. Particular substrates are described below for a variety of exemplary constructions. For the purpose of convenience, a viscoelastic lightguide in contact with a substrate is described below, but this substrate may comprise any type of medium including air.
  • The law of refraction and the principle of total internal reflection can be applied as described above to determine the amount of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide given a particular substrate directly in contact with the lightguide. For example, given a particular substrate in contact with the viscoelastic lightguide, the amount of light extracted from the lightguide and by the substrate may be less than about 0.5%, less than about 1%, less than about 2%, less than about 5%, less than about 10%, less than about 20%, less than about 30%, less than about 40%, less than about 50%, less than about 60%, less than about 70%, less than about 80%, or less than about 90% relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide. For another example, given a particular substrate in contact with the viscoelastic lightguide, the amount of light extracted from the lightguide by the substrate may be greater than about 10%, greater than about 20%, greater than about 30%, greater than about 40%, greater than about 50%, greater than about 60%, greater than about 70%, greater than about 80%, or greater than about 90% relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide. For yet another example, given a particular substrate in contact with the viscoelastic lightguide, the amount of light extracted from the lightguide may be from about 10 to about 50%, from about 20 to about 50%, from about 30 to about 50%, from about 50 to about 70%, from about 50 to about 80%, or from about 10 to about 90% relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide.
  • The law of refraction and the principle of total internal reflection can be applied as described above to determine the direction of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide given a particular substrate in contact with the lightguide. For example, given a particular substrate in contact with the viscoelastic lightguide, the transmittance angle for light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide by the substrate may be determined for a given incident angle. For example, the transmittance angle for light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide by the substrate may be from greater than about 5° to less than about 95°, greater than about 5° to less than about 60°, or greater than about 5° to less than about 30°.
  • The viscoelastic lightguide may have a refractive index greater than that of the substrate. The refractive index of the viscoelastic lightguide may be greater than about 0.002, greater than about 0.005, greater than about 0.01, greater than about 0.02, greater than about 0.03, greater than about 0.04, greater than about 0.05, greater than about 0.1, greater than about 0.2, greater than about 0.3, greater than about 0.4, or greater than about 0.5, as compared to the refractive index of the substrate.
  • The viscoelastic lightguide may have a refractive index less than that of the substrate. The refractive index of the viscoelastic lightguide may be less than about 0.002, less than about 0.005, less than about 0.01, less than about 0.02, less than about 0.03, less than about 0.04, less than about 0.05, less than about 0.1, less than about 0.2, less than about 0.3, less than about 0.4, or less than about 0.5, as compared to the refractive index of the substrate.
  • The viscoelastic lightguide and the substrate may have the same or nearly the same refractive index such that light can be extracted into the substrate with little or no change to the light. The refractive index difference of the viscoelastic lightguide and the substrate may be from about 0.001 to less than about 0.002.
  • The refractive index difference of the viscoelastic lightguide and the substrate may be from about 0.002 to about 0.5, from about 0.005 to about 0.5, from about 0.01 to about 0.5, from about 0.02 to about 0.5, from about 0.03 to about 0.5, from about 0.04 to about 0.5, from about 0.05 to about 0.5, from about 0.1 to about 0.5, from about 0.2 to about 0.5, from about 0.3 to about 0.5, or from about 0.4 to about 0.5.
  • The viscoelastic lightguide may have any bulk three-dimensional shape as is needed for a given application. The viscoelastic lightguide may be in the form of a square or rectangular layer, sheet, film, etc. as shown in FIGS. 7-11. The viscoelastic lightguide may be cut or divided into shapes as described below. The viscoelastic lightguide may also be tapered such that it is thicker at one end as compared to an opposing end; tapered shapes are sometimes referred to as wedges or pseudo-wedges as described in the Boyd et al., Gardiner et al., Kinder et al., and Sahlin et al. references cited above.
  • The thickness of the viscoelastic lightguide is not particularly limited as long as it can function as desired. The thickness of the viscoelastic lightguide may be selected based on or in conjunction with the light source. For example, design parameters may limit or even require that a particular light source(s) be used, and there may be a minimum amount, or range of amounts, of light that is required to enter the viscoelastic lightguide. Thus, the thickness of the viscoelastic lightguide may be selected so that the required amount of light from a given light source can enter the lightguide. A maximum thickness of the viscoelastic lightguide may be required for use in optical devices designed to be particularly thin. Exemplary thicknesses for the viscoelastic lightguide range from about 0.4 mil to about 1000 mil, from about 1 mil to about 300 mil, from about 1 mil to about 60 mil, or from about 0.5 mil to about 30 mil.
  • The amount and direction of light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide may be controlled, at the very least, by the shape, size, number, arrangement, etc. of the features, the refractive indices of the viscoelastic lightguide and any optional substrate(s), the shape and size of the viscoelastic lightguide, and the angular distribution of light that is allowed to enter the viscoelastic lightguide. These variables may be selected such that less than about 0.5%, less than about 1%, less than about 2%, less than about 5%, less than about 10%, less than about 20%, less than about 30%, less than about 40%, less than about 50%, less than about 60%, less than about 70%, less than about 80%, or less than about 90% of light is extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide. These variables may be selected such that greater than about 10%, greater than about 20%, greater than about 30%, greater than about 40%, greater than about 50%, greater than about 60%, greater than about 70%, greater than about 80%, or greater than about 90% of light is extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide. These variables may be selected such that from about 10 to about 50%, from about 20 to about 50%, from about 30 to about 50%, from about 50 to about 70%, from about 50 to about 80%, or from about 10 to about 90% of light is extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide.
  • The viscoelastic lightguide comprises one or more viscoelastic materials. In general, viscoelastic materials exhibit both elastic and viscous behavior when undergoing deformation. Elastic characteristics refer to the ability of a material to return to its original shape after a transient load is removed. One measure of elasticity for a material is referred to as the tensile set value which is a function of the elongation remaining after the material has been stretched and subsequently allowed to recover (destretch) under the same conditions by which it was stretched. If a material has a tensile set value of 0%, then it has returned to its original length upon relaxation, whereas if the tensile set value is 100%, then the material is twice its original length upon relaxation. Tensile set values may be measured using ASTM D412. Useful viscoelastic materials may have tensile set values of greater than about 10%, greater than about 30%, or greater than about 50%; or from about 5 to about 70%, from about 10 to about 70%, from about 30 to about 70%, or from about 10 to about 60%.
  • Viscous materials that are Newtonian liquids have viscous characteristics that obey Newton's law which states that stress increases linearly with shear gradient. A liquid does not recover its shape as the shear gradient is removed. Viscous characteristics of useful viscoelastic materials include flowability of the material under reasonable temperatures such that the material does not decompose.
  • The viscoelastic lightguide may have properties that facilitate sufficient contact or wetting with at least a portion of a substrate such that the viscoelastic lightguide and the substrate are optically coupled. Light can then be extracted out of the viscoelastic lightguide and into the substrate. The viscoelastic lightguide is generally soft, compliant and flexible. Thus, the viscoelastic lightguide may have an elastic modulus (or storage modulus G′) such that sufficient contact can be obtained, and a viscous modulus (or loss modulus G″) such that the layer doesn't flow undesirably, and a damping coefficient (G″/G′, tan D) for the relative degree of damping of the layer.
  • Useful viscoelastic materials may have a storage modulus, G′, of less than about 300,000 Pa, measured at 10 rad/sec and a temperature of from about 20 to about 22° C. Useful viscoelastic materials may have a storage modulus, G′, of from about 30 to about 300,000 Pa, measured at 10 rad/sec and a temperature of from about 20 to about 22° C. Useful viscoelastic materials may have a storage modulus, G′, of from about 30 to about 150,000 Pa, measured at 10 rad/sec and a temperature of from about 20 to about 22° C. Useful viscoelastic materials may have a storage modulus, G′, of from about 30 to about 30,000 Pa, measured at 10 rad/sec and a temperature of from about 20 to about 22° C. Useful viscoelastic materials may have a storage modulus, G′, of from about 30 to about 150,000 Pa, measured at 10 rad/sec and a temperature of from about 20 to about 22° C., and a loss tangent (tan d) of from about 0.4 to about 3. Viscoelastic properties of materials can be measured using Dynamic Mechanical Analysis according to, for example, ASTM D4065, D4440, and D5279.
  • In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a PSA layer as described in the Dalquist criterion line (as described in Handbook of Pressure Sensitive Adhesive Technology, Second Ed., D. Satas, ed., Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York, 1989.)
  • The viscoelastic lightguide may have a particular peel force or at least exhibit a peel force within a particular range. For example, the viscoelastic lightguide may have a 90° peel force of from about 50 to about 3000 g/in, from about 300 to about 3000 g/in, or from about 500 to about 3000 g/in. Peel force may be measured using a peel tester from IMASS.
  • In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide comprises an optically clear lightguide having high light transmittance of from about 80 to about 100%, from about 90 to about 100%, from about 95 to about 100%, or from about 98 to about 100% over at least a portion of the visible light spectrum (about 400 to about 700 nm). In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide has a haze value of less than about 5%, less than about 3%, or less than about 1%. In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide has a haze value of from about 0.01 to less than about 5%, from about 0.01 to less than about 3%, or from about 0.01 to less than about 1%. Haze values in transmission can be determined using a haze meter according to ASTM D1003.
  • In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide comprises an optically clear lightguide having high light transmittance and a low haze value. High light transmittance may be from about 90 to about 100%, from about 95 to about 100%, or from about 99 to about 100% over at least a portion of the visible light spectrum (about 400 to about 700 nm), and haze values may be from about 0.01 to less than about 5%, from about 0.01 to less than about 3%, or from about 0.01 to less than about 1%. The viscoelastic lightguide may also have a light transmittance of from about 50 to about 100%.
  • In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide is hazy and diffuses light, particularly visible light. A hazy viscoelastic lightguide may have a haze value of greater than about 5%, greater than about 20%, or greater than about 50%. A hazy viscoelastic lightguide may have a haze value of from about 5 to about 90%, from about 5 to about 50%, or from about 20 to about 50%.
  • In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide may be translucent in that it reflects and transmits light.
  • The viscoelastic lightguide may have a refractive index in the range of from about 1.3 to about 2.6, 1.4 to about 1.7, or from about 1.5 to about 1.7. The particular refractive index or range of refractive indices selected for the viscoelastic lightguide may depend on the overall design of the optical device, e.g., the presence or absence of substrates in contact with the lightguide and the particular application in which the device may be used.
  • The viscoelastic lightguide generally comprises at least one polymer. The viscoelastic lightguide may comprise at least one PSA. PSAs are useful for adhering together adherends and exhibit properties such as: (1) aggressive and permanent tack, (2) adherence with no more than finger pressure, (3) sufficient ability to hold onto an adherend, and (4) sufficient cohesive strength to be cleanly removable from the adherend. Materials that have been found to function well as pressure sensitive adhesives are polymers designed and formulated to exhibit the requisite viscoelastic properties resulting in a desired balance of tack, peel adhesion, and shear holding power. Obtaining the proper balance of properties is not a simple process. A quantitative description of PSAs can be found in the Dahlquist reference cited above.
  • Useful PSAs include those based on natural rubbers, synthetic rubbers, styrene block copolymers, (meth)acrylic block copolymers, polyvinyl ethers, polyolefins, and poly(meth)acrylates. As used herein, (meth)acrylic refers to both acrylic and methacrylic species and likewise for (meth)acrylate.
  • Useful PSAs include (meth)acrylates, rubbers, thermoplastic elastomers, silicones, urethanes, and combinations thereof. In some embodiments, the PSA is based on a (meth)acrylic PSA or at least one poly(meth)acrylate. Herein, (meth)acrylate refers to both acrylate and methacrylate groups. Particularly preferred poly(meth)acrylates are derived from: (A) at least one monoethylenically unsaturated alkyl(meth)acrylate monomer; and (B) at least one monoethylenically unsaturated free-radically copolymerizable reinforcing monomer. The reinforcing monomer has a homopolymer glass transition temperature (Tg) higher than that of the alkyl(meth)acrylate monomer and is one that increases the Tg and cohesive strength of the resultant copolymer. Herein, “copolymer” refers to polymers containing two or more different monomers, including terpolymers, tetrapolymers, etc.
  • Monomer A, which is a monoethylenically unsaturated alkyl(meth)acrylate, contributes to the flexibility and tack of the copolymer. Preferably, monomer A has a homopolymer Tg of no greater than about 0° C. Preferably, the alkyl group of the (meth)acrylate has an average of about 4 to about 20 carbon atoms, and more preferably, an average of about 4 to about 14 carbon atoms. The alkyl group can optionally contain oxygen atoms in the chain thereby forming ethers or alkoxy ethers, for example. Examples of monomer A include, but are not limited to, 2-methylbutyl acrylate, isooctyl acrylate, lauryl acrylate, 4-methyl-2-pentyl acrylate, isoamyl acrylate, sec-butyl acrylate, n-butyl acrylate, n-hexyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, n-octyl acrylate, n-decyl acrylate, isodecyl acrylate, isodecyl methacrylate, and isononyl acrylate. Benzyl acrylate may also be used. Other examples include, but are not limited to, poly-ethoxylated or -propoxylated methoxy(meth)acrylates such as acrylates of CARBOWAX (commercially available from Union Carbide) and NK ester AM90G (commercially available from Shin Nakamura Chemical, Ltd., Japan). Preferred monoethylenically unsaturated (meth)acrylates that can be used as monomer A include isooctyl acrylate, 2-ethyl-hexyl acrylate, and n-butyl acrylate. Combinations of various monomers categorized as an A monomer can be used to make the copolymer.
  • Monomer B, which is a monoethylenically unsaturated free-radically copolymerizable reinforcing monomer, increases the Tg and cohesive strength of the copolymer. Preferably, monomer B has a homopolymer Tg of at least about 10° C., for example, from about 10 to about 50° C. More preferably, monomer B is a reinforcing (meth)acrylic monomer, including an acrylic acid, a methacrylic acid, an acrylamide, or a (meth)acrylate. Examples of monomer B include, but are not limited to, acrylamides, such as acrylamide, methacrylamide, N-methyl acrylamide, N-ethyl acrylamide, N-hydroxyethyl acrylamide, diacetone acrylamide, N,N-dimethyl acrylamide, N,N-diethyl acrylamide, N-ethyl-N-aminoethyl acrylamide, N-ethyl-N-hydroxyethyl acrylamide, N,N-dihydroxyethyl acrylamide, t-butyl acrylamide, N,N-dimethylaminoethyl acrylamide, and N-octyl acrylamide. Other examples of monomer B include itaconic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, 2,2-(diethoxy)ethyl acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate or methacrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl acrylate or methacrylate, methyl methacrylate, isobornyl acrylate, 2-(phenoxy)ethyl acrylate or methacrylate, biphenylyl acrylate, t-butylphenyl acrylate, cyclohexyl acrylate, dimethyladamantyl acrylate, 2-naphthyl acrylate, phenyl acrylate, N-vinyl formamide, N-vinyl acetamide, N-vinyl pyrrolidone, and N-vinyl caprolactam. Preferred reinforcing acrylic monomers that can be used as monomer B include acrylic acid and acrylamide. Combinations of various reinforcing monoethylenically unsaturated monomers categorized as a B monomer can be used to make the copolymer.
  • In some embodiments, the (meth)acrylate copolymer is formulated to have a resultant Tg of less than about 0° C. and more preferably, less than about −10° C. Such (meth)acrylate copolymers preferably include about 60 to about 98% by weight of at least one monomer A and about 2 to about 40% by weight of at least one monomer B, both relative to the total weight of the (meth)acrylate copolymer. Preferably, the (meth)acrylate copolymer has about 85 to about 98% by weight of at least one monomer A and about 2 to about 15% by weight of at least one monomer B, both relative to the total weight of the (meth)acrylate copolymer.
  • Useful rubber-based PSAs are generally of two classes, natural rubber-based or synthetic rubber-based. Useful natural rubber-based PSAs generally contain masticated natural rubber, for example, from about 20 to about 75% by weight of one or more tackifying resins, from about 25 to about 80% by weight of natural rubber, and typically from about 0.5 to about 2.0% by weight of one or more antioxidants, all relative to the total weight of the masticated rubber. Natural rubber may range in grade from a light pale crepe grade to a darker ribbed smoked sheet and includes such examples as CV-60, a controlled viscosity rubber grade and SMR-5, a ribbed smoked sheet rubber grade. Tackifying resins used with natural rubbers generally include but are not limited to wood rosin and its hydrogenated derivatives; terpene resins of various softening points, and petroleum-based resins, such as, the ESCOREZ 1300 series of C5 aliphatic olefin-derived resins from Exxon.
  • Antioxidants may be used with natural rubbers in order to retard oxidative attack on the rubber which can result in loss of cohesive strength of the adhesive. Useful antioxidants include but are not limited to amines, such as N—N′ di-beta-naphthyl-1,4-phenylenediamine, available as AGERITE Resin D from R.T. Vanderbilt Co., Inc.; phenolics, such as 2,5-di-(t-amyl)hydroquinone, available as SANTOVAR A, available from Monsanto Chemical Co.; tetrakis[methylene 3-(3′,5′-di-tert-butyl-4′-hydroxyphenyl)propianate]methane, available as IRGANOX 1010 from Ciba-Geigy Corp.; 2,2′-methylenebis(4-methyl-6-tert butyl phenol), known as Antioxidant 2246; and dithiocarbamates, such as zinc dithiodibutyl carbamate. Curing agents may be used to at least partially vulcanize (crosslink) the PSA.
  • Useful synthetic rubber-based PSAs include adhesives that are generally rubbery elastomers, which are either self-tacky or non-tacky and require tackifiers. Self-tacky synthetic rubber PSAs include, for example, butyl rubber, a copolymer of isobutylene with less than 3 percent isoprene, polyisobutylene, a homopolymer of isoprene, polybutadiene, or styrene/butadiene rubber. Butyl rubber PSAs often contain an antioxidant such as zinc dibutyl dithiocarbamate. Polyisobutylene PSAs do not usually contain antioxidants. Synthetic rubber PSAs, which generally require tackifiers, are also generally easier to melt process as compared to natural rubber PSAs which typically having very high molecular weights. They comprise polybutadiene or styrene/butadiene rubber, from 10 parts to 200 parts of a tackifier, and generally from 0.5 to 2.0 parts per 100 parts rubber of an antioxidant such as IRGANOX 1010. An example of a synthetic rubber is AMERIPOL 101 1A, a styrene/butadiene rubber available from BF Goodrich.
  • Tackifiers that may be used with synthetic rubber PSAs include derivatives of rosins such as FORAL 85, a stabilized rosin ester from Hercules, Inc.; the SNOWTACK series of gum rosins from Tenneco; the AQUATAC series of tall oil rosins from Sylvachem; synthetic hydrocarbon resins such as the PICCOLYTE A series, polyterpenes from Hercules, Inc.; the ESCOREZ 1300 series of C5 aliphatic olefin-derived resins; and the ESCOREZ 2000 Series of C9 aromatic/aliphatic olefin-derived resins. Curing agents may be added to at least partially vulcanize (crosslink) the PSA.
  • Useful thermoplastic elastomer PSAs include styrene block copolymer PSAs which generally comprise elastomers of the A-B or A-B-A type, where A represents a thermoplastic polystyrene block and B represents a rubbery block of polyisoprene, polybutadiene, or poly(ethylene/butylene), and resins. Examples of the various block copolymers useful in block copolymer PSAs include linear, radial, star and tapered styrene-isoprene block copolymers such as KRATON D1107P, available from Shell Chemical Co., and EUROPRENE SOL TE 9110, available from EniChem Elastomers Americas, Inc.; linear styrene-(ethylene-butylene) block copolymers such as KRATON G1657, available from Shell Chemical Co.; linear styrene-(ethylene-propylene) block copolymers such as KRATON G1750X, available from Shell Chemical Co.; and linear, radial, and star styrene-butadiene block copolymers such as KRATON D1118X, available from Shell Chemical Co., and EUROPRENE SOL TE 6205, available from EniChem Elastomers Americas, Inc. The polystyrene blocks tend to form domains in the shape of spheroids, cylinders, or plates that causes the block copolymer PSAs to have two phase structures.
  • Resins that associate with the rubber phase may be used with thermoplastic elastomer PSAs if the elastomer itself is not tacky enough. Examples of rubber phase associating resins include aliphatic olefin-derived resins, such as the ESCOREZ 1300 series and the WINGTACK series, available from Goodyear; rosin esters, such as the FORAL series and the STAYBELITE Ester 10, both available from Hercules, Inc.; hydrogenated hydrocarbons, such as the ESCOREZ 5000 series, available from Exxon; polyterpenes, such as the PICCOLYTE A series; and terpene phenolic resins derived from petroleum or terpentine sources, such as PICCOFYN A100, available from Hercules, Inc.
  • Resins that associate with the thermoplastic phase may be used with thermoplastic elastomer PSAs if the elastomer is not stiff enough. Thermoplastic phase associating resins include polyaromatics, such as the PICCO 6000 series of aromatic hydrocarbon resins, available from Hercules, Inc.; coumarone-indene resins, such as the CUMAR series, available from Neville; and other high-solubility parameter resins derived from coal tar or petroleum and having softening points above about 85° C., such as the AMOCO 18 series of alphamethyl styrene resins, available from Amoco, PICCOVAR 130 alkyl aromatic polyindene resin, available from Hercules, Inc., and the PICCOTEX series of alphamethyl styrene/vinyl toluene resins, available from Hercules.
  • Useful silicone PSAs include polydiorganosiloxanes and polydiorganosiloxane polyoxamides. Useful silicone PSAs include silicone-containing resins formed from a hyrosilylation reaction between one or more components having silicon-bonded hydrogen and aliphatic unsaturation. Examples of silicon-bonded hydrogen components include high molecular weight polydimethylsiloxane or polydimethyldiphenylsiloxane, and that contain residual silanol functionality (SiOH) on the ends of the polymer chain. Examples of aliphatic unsaturation components include siloxanes functionalized with two or more (meth)acrylate groups or block copolymers comprising polydiorganosiloxane soft segments and urea terminated hard segments. Hydrosilylation may be carried out using platinum catalysts.
  • Useful silicone PSAs may comprise a polymer or gum and an optional tackifying resin.
  • The tackifying resin is generally a three-dimensional silicate structure that is endcapped with trimethylsiloxy groups (OSiMe3) and also contains some residual silanol functionality. Examples of tackifying resins include SR 545, from General Electric Co., Silicone Resins Division, Waterford, N.Y., and MQD-32-2 from Shin-Etsu Silicones of America, Inc., Torrance, Calif.
  • Manufacture of typical silicone PSAs is described in U.S. Pat. No. 2,736,721 (Dexter). Manufacture of silicone urea block copolymer PSAs is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,214,119 (Leir, et al).
  • Useful silicone PSAs may also comprise a polydiorganosiloxane polyoxamide and an optional tackifier as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,361,474 (Sherman et al.). For example, the polydiorganosiloxane polyoxamide may comprise at least two repeat units of Formula I:
  • Figure US20110176325A1-20110721-C00001
  • wherein: each R1 is independently an alkyl, haloalkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, aryl, or aryl substituted with an alkyl, alkoxy, or halo, wherein at least 50 percent of the R1 groups are methyl; each Y is independently an alkylene, aralkylene, or a combination thereof; G is a divalent residue equal to a diamine of formula R3HN-G-NHR3 minus the two —NHR3 groups; R3 is hydrogen or alkyl or R3 taken together with G and with the nitrogen to which they are both attached forms a heterocyclic group; n is independently an integer of 40 to 1500; and p is an integer of 1 to 10; and an asterisk (*) indicates a site of attachment of the repeat unit to another group in the copolymer. The copolymer may have a first repeat unit where p is equal to 1 and a second repeat unit where p is at least 2. G may comprise an alkylene, heteroalkylene, arylene, aralkylene, polydiorganosiloxane, or a combination thereof. The integer n may be an integer of 40 to 500. These polydiorganosiloxane polyoxamides can be used in combination with a tackifier. Useful tackifiers include silicone tackifying resins as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,090,922 B2 (Zhou et al.). Some of these silicone-containing PSAs may be heat activated.
  • The PSA may be crosslinked to the extent that the crosslinks do not interfere with desired properties of the viscoelastic lightguide. Generally, the PSA may be crosslinked to the extent that the crosslinks do not interfere with the viscous characteristics of the viscoelastic lightguide. Crosslinking is used to build molecular weight and strength of the PSA. The degree of crosslinking may be selected based upon the application for which the lightguide is intended. Crosslinking agents may be used to form chemical crosslinks, physical crosslinks or a combination thereof. Chemical crosslinks include covalent bonds and ionic bonds. Covalent crosslinks may be formed by incorporating a multi-functional monomer in the polymerization process, followed by curing using, e.g., ultraviolet radiation, heat, ionizing radiation, moisture, or a combination thereof.
  • Physical crosslinks include noncovalent bonds and are generally thermally reversible. Examples of physical crosslinks include high Tg (i.e., those having a Tg higher than room temperature, preferably higher than 70° C.) polymer segments included, for example, in thermoplastic elastomer block copolymers. Such segments aggregate to form physical crosslinks that dissipate upon heating. If a physically crosslinked PSA is used such as a thermoplastic elastomer, the embossing typically is carried out at temperature below, or even substantially below, the temperature at which the adhesive flows. Hard segments include the styrene macromers of U.S. Pat. No. 4,554,324 (Husman et al.) and/or acid/base interactions (i.e., those involving functional groups within the same polymer or between polymers or between a polymer and an additive) such as polymeric ionic crosslinking as described in WO 99/42536 (Stark et al.).
  • Suitable crosslinking agents are also disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,737,559 (Kellen), U.S. Pat. No. 5,506,279 (Babu et al.), and U.S. Pat. No. 6,083,856 (Joseph et al.). The crosslinking agent can be a photocrosslinking agent, which, upon exposure to ultraviolet radiation (e.g., radiation having a wavelength of from about 250 to about 400 nm), causes the copolymer to crosslink. The crosslinking agent is used in an effective amount, by which is meant an amount that is sufficient to cause crosslinking of the PSA to provide adequate cohesive strength to produce the desired final adhesion properties. Preferably, the crosslinking agent is used in an amount of about 0.1 part to about 10 parts by weight, based on the total weight of monomers.
  • In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a PSA formed from a (meth)acrylate block copolymer as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,255,920 B2 (Everaerts et al.). In general, these (meth)acrylate block copolymers comprise: at least two A block polymeric units that are the reaction product of a first monomer composition comprising an alkyl methacrylate, an aralkyl methacrylate, an aryl methacrylate, or a combination thereof, each A block having a Tg of at least 50° C., the methacrylate block copolymer comprising from 20 to 50 weight percent A block; and at least one B block polymeric unit that is the reaction product of a second monomer composition comprising an alkyl(meth)acrylate, a heteroalkyl(meth)acrylate, a vinyl ester, or a combination thereof, the B block having a Tg no greater than 20° C., the (meth)acrylate block copolymer comprising from 50 to 80 weight percent B block; wherein the A block polymeric units are present as nanodomains having an average size less than about 150 nm in a matrix of the B block polymeric units.
  • In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a clear acrylic PSA, for example, those available as transfer tapes such as VHB™ Acrylic Tape 4910F from 3M Company and 3M™ Optically Clear Laminating Adhesives (8140 and 8180 series).
  • In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a PSA formed from at least one monomer containing a substituted or an unsubstituted aromatic moiety as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,663,978 B1 (Olson et al.):
  • Figure US20110176325A1-20110721-C00002
  • wherein Ar is an aromatic group which is unsubstituted or substituted with a substituent selected from the group consisting of Bry and R6 z wherein y represents the number of bromine substituents attached to the aromatic group and is an integer of from 0 to 3, R6 is a straight or branched alkyl of from 2 to 12 carbons, and z represents the number of R6 substituents attached to the aromatic ring and is either 0 or 1 provided that both y and z are not zero; X is either O or S; n is from 0 to 3; R4 is an unsubstituted straight or branched alkyl linking group of from 2 to 12 carbons; and R5 is either H or CH3.
  • In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a copolymer as described in U.S. Ser. No. 11/875,194 (63656US002, Determan et al.), comprising (a) monomer units having pendant bephenyl groups and (b) alkyl(meth)acrylate monomer units.
  • In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a copolymer as described in U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/983,735 (63760US002, Determan et al.), comprising (a) monomer units having pendant carbazole groups and (b) alkyl (meth)acrylate monomer units.
  • In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide comprises an adhesive as described in U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/986,298 (63108US002, Schaffer et al.), comprising a block copolymer dispersed in an adhesive matrix to form a Lewis acid-base pair. The block copolymer comprises an AB block copolymer, and the A block phase separates to form microdomains within the B block/adhesive matrix. For example, the adhesive matrix may comprise a copolymer of an alkyl(meth)acrylate and a (meth)acrylate having pendant acid functionality, and the block copolymer may comprise a styrene-acrylate copolymer. The microdomains may be large enough to forward scatter incident light, but not so large that they backscatter incident light. Typically these microdomains are larger than the wavelength of visible light (about 400 to about 700 nm). In some embodiments the microdomain size is from about 1.0 to about 10 um.
  • The viscoelastic lightguide may comprise a stretch releasable PSA. Stretch releasable PSAs are PSAs that can be removed from a substrate if they are stretched at or nearly at a zero degree angle. In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide or a stretch release PSA used in the viscoelastic lightguide has a shear storage modulus of less than about 10 MPa when measured at 1 rad/sec and −17° C., or from about 0.03 to about 10 MPa when measured at 1 rad/sec and −17° C. Stretch releasable PSAs may be used if disassembling, reworking, or recycling is desired.
  • In some embodiments, the stretch releasable PSA may comprise a silicone-based PSA as described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,569,521 B1 (Sheridan et al.) or U.S. Provisional Application Nos. 61/020,423 (63934US002, Sherman et al.) and 61/036,501 (64151US002, Determan et al.). Such silicone-based PSAs include compositions of an MQ tackifying resin and a silicone polymer. For example, the stretch releasable PSA may comprise an MQ tackifying resin and an elastomeric silicone polymer selected from the group consisting of urea-based silicone copolymers, oxamide-based silicone copolymers, amide-based silicone copolymers, urethane-based silicone copolymers, and mixtures thereof.
  • The viscoelastic lightguide may comprise an aerogel. An aerogel is a low-density solid state material derived from gel in which the liquid component of the gel has been replaced with air. Silica, alumina and carbon aerogels are exemplary aerogels that may be used.
  • The viscoelastic lightguide can optionally include one or more additives such as filler, particles, plasticizers, chain transfer agents, initiators, antioxidants, stabilizers, fire retardants, viscosity modifying agents, foaming agents, antistats, colorants such as dyes and pigments, fluorescent dyes and pigments, phosphorescent dyes and pigments, fibrous reinforcing agents, and woven and non-woven fabrics.
  • The viscoelastic lightguide may be made hazy and/or diffusive by including particles such as nanoparticles (diameter less than about 1 um), microspheres (diameter 1 um or greater), or fibers. Exemplary nanoparticles include TiO2. Haze and diffusive properties can also be incorporated into the viscoelastic lightguide by incorporating bubbles into the lightguide. The bubbles may have a diameter of from about 0.01 to about 1 um. Bubbles may be introduced by adding, e.g., foaming agents. Examples of additional additives that may be added to the viscoelastic lightguide include glass beads, reflective particles, and conductive particles. In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide may comprise a PSA matrix and particles as described in U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/097,685 (64740US002, Sherman et al.), comprising an optically clear PSA and silicon resin particles having a refractive index less than that of the PSA. In some embodiments, the presence of particles, bubbles, air, etc. increases the scatter and uniformity of light.
  • In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide provides an image as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11. An image may be made by structuring a surface of the lightguide as described above. For example, surface 1010 of FIG. 10 may be structured to provide the image. An image may be made by including or embedding material such as particles in the viscoelastic lightguide. The image may also be made by forming an image on a surface of the lightguide, e.g., on surface 1010. More than one surface of the lightguide may comprise an image. Surfaces of the viscoelastic lightguide may be imaged by printing or marking, e.g., by inkjet printing, laser printing, electrostatic printing and the like. Images may be monochrome such as black and white, or they may be colored. The materials used to form the images may reflect all or some light within a particular range of wavelengths, e.g., in the visible region. The materials used to form the images may function as color filters allowing light within a particular range of wavelengths, e.g., in the visible region, to be transmitted. Exemplary materials include colorants such as pigments and dyes.
  • In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide provides an image by from holes in the lightguide. Holes may be made, e.g., by drilling through the lightguide.
  • In general, the viscoelastic lightguide is adapted to receive at least some light emitted by the light source. In some embodiments, a specially designed input surface may not be needed because the light source can be pressed into the viscoelastic lightguide such that optical coupling occurs. In some embodiments, the light source may stick to the viscoelastic lightguide, for example, if the lightguide comprises a PSA. In some embodiments, the light source may be embedded in the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide comprises an input surface adapted to receive light from the light source. The input surface may have a variety of topographies depending on the optical coupling means and/or the particular light source. The input surface may have an appropriate curvature. The input edge comprising the input surface may have a particular cavity, for example a concave hemispherical cavity, to receive a convex lens of a light source. Alternately, the input surface may have refractive structures such as prisms or lenses to optically couple light from the light source into the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • In some embodiments, an extractor article disposed between the light source and the input edge may be used to facilitate optical coupling with at least some of the light emitted by the light source. Useful extractor articles may have an appropriate curvature for extracting light from the light source. A coupling material for matching refractive indices of the viscoelastic lightguide and some element of the light source may be used. A crosslinkable material may be used for attaching the viscoelastic lightguide to some part of the light source, and subsequently cured using heat and/or light to form the crosslinked material.
  • The coupling material may comprise silicone gel. The silicone gel may be crosslinked. The silicone gel may be mixed with a silicone oil. The silicone gel may comprise one or more silicone materials such as, for example, dimethylsilicone, diphenylsilicone, or phenylmethylsilicone. The silicone gel may comprise phenylmethylsilicone moieties that are cross-linked. The silicone gel may comprise phenylmethylsilicone moieties which are cross-linked and phenylmethylsilicone oil. The silicone gel may comprise phenylmethylsilicone moieties which are cross-linked and phenylmethylsilicone oil in a weight ratio from 0.2:1 to 5:1. The silicone gel may comprise crosslinked phenylmethylsilicone. Exemplary use of silicone gels is described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,315,418 (DiZio et al.).
  • The light source may be optically coupled to the viscoelastic lightguide such that at least some of the light from the light source can enter the lightguide. For example, a light source may be optically coupled to the viscoelastic lightguide such that greater than 1, greater than 10, greater than 20, greater than 30, greater than 40, greater than 50, greater than 90%, or about 100% of light emitted by the light source enters the viscoelastic lightguide. For another example, a light source may be optically coupled to the viscoelastic lightguide such that from about 1 to about 10%, from about 1 to about 20%, from about 1 to about 30%, from about 1 to about 40%, from about 1 to about 50%, from about 1 to about 100%, from about 1 to about 100%, from about 50 to about 100%, or from about 1 to about 100% of light emitted by the light source enters the viscoelastic lightguide. The light source may emit light having a random or a particular angular distribution.
  • The light source may comprise any suitable light source. Exemplary light sources include linear light sources such as cold cathode fluorescent lamps and point light sources such as light emitting diode (LEDs). Exemplary light sources also include organic light-emitting devices (OLEDs), incandescent bulbs, fluorescent bulbs, halogen lamps, UV bulbs, infrared sources, near-infrared sources, lasers, or chemical light sources. In general, the light emitted by the light source may be visible or invisible. At least one light source may be used. For example, from 1 to about 10,000 light sources may be used. The light source may comprise a row of LEDs positioned at or near an edge of the viscoelastic lightguide. The light source may comprise LEDs arranged on a circuit such that light emitted from the LEDs lights up continuously or uniformly the viscoelastic lightguide throughout a desired area. The light source may comprise LEDs that emit light of different colors such that the colors can mix within the viscoelastic lightguide. In this way, a graphic could be designed to appear differently at different times during its use.
  • The light source may be powered by any suitable means. The light source may be powered using a battery, a DC power supply, an AC to DC power supply, an AC power supply, or a solar photovoltaic cell.
  • The viscoelastic lightguide can be used in a variety of multilayer constructions depending on the particular application. Some of these embodiments are described below. In general, the viscoelastic lightguide may be disposed on a substrate or between two substrates. Any one of the surfaces described above for the viscoelastic lightguide may be an interface formed between the lightguide and a substrate. For example, FIG. 14 shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1400 comprising first substrate 1402 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1401; first interface 1403 formed between the two may be any one of the surfaces described above for the lightguide. Exemplary optical article 1400 also comprises optional second substrate 1405 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1401 opposite first substrate 1402; second interface 1406 formed between the two may be any one of the surfaces described above for the lightguide. Any of the surfaces described above for the viscoelastic lightguide may be used in combination for first interface 1403 and second interface 1406.
  • Exemplary optical article 1400 also comprises first outer surface 1404 opposite first interface 1403, and second outer surface 1407 opposite second interface 1406. Any one of the surfaces described above for the viscoelastic lightguide may be first and/or second outer surfaces, 1404 and 1407, respectively. In general, any of the surfaces described above for the viscoelastic lightguide may be used in combination for first interface 1403, second interface 1406, first outer surface 1404 and second outer surface 1407.
  • FIG. 15 a shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1500 comprising first substrate 1502 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1501 (or vice versa). Any one of the surfaces described above for the viscoelastic lightguide may be first interface 1503 and/or first outer surface 1504. Surface 1505 of the viscoelastic lightguide may have any type of surface described above for the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • In some embodiments, first interface 1503, first outer surface 1504 and surface 1505 of viscoelastic lightguide 1501 are unstructured as shown in FIG. 15 a. First substrate 1502 may have a refractive index less than that of viscoelastic lightguide 1501 such that the first substrate functions as a light containing substrate for light propagating within the lightguide. If the first substrate is a light containing substrate, then the first interface may be optically smooth such that light propagating within viscoelastic lightguide 1501 is transported by total internal reflection. For a light containing substrate in contact with the viscoelastic lightguide, the amount of light extracted from the lightguide and by the substrate may be less than about 0.5%, less than about 1%, less than about 2%, less than about 5%, or less than about 10% relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide. In general, at least a portion of surface 1505 is optically smooth such that light propagating within viscoelastic lightguide 1501 is transported by total internal reflection.
  • In some embodiments, first substrate 1502 may have a refractive index greater than that of viscoelastic lightguide 1501 such that the first substrate may function as a light extracting substrate. For a light extracting substrate in contact with the viscoelastic lightguide, the amount of light extracted from the lightguide and by the substrate may be greater than about 10%, greater than about 20%, greater than about 30%, greater than about 40%, greater than about 50%, greater than about 60%, greater than about 70%, greater than about 80%, or greater than about 90% relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide. In some embodiments, first substrate 1502 may have the same or nearly the same refractive index as that of viscoelastic lightguide 1501. In either embodiment, at least portions of first interface 1503 and surface 1505 are optically smooth such that light propagating within viscoelastic lightguide 1501 is transported by total internal reflection.
  • In some embodiments, one surface of the viscoelastic lightguide is structured or the first outer surface is structured; the other two surfaces are not structured. FIG. 15 b shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1510 comprising first substrate 1512 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1511 (or vice versa). In this example, first interface 1513 is structured irregularly such that the first substrate is able to extract light from the viscoelastic lightguide. First substrate 1512 may have a refractive index greater than, less than, or nearly the same as that of viscoelastic lightguide 1511. The first substrate may function as a light extracting substrate. For a light extracting substrate in contact with the viscoelastic lightguide, the amount of light extracted from the lightguide and by the substrate may be greater than about 10%, greater than about 20%, greater than about 30%, greater than about 40%, greater than about 50%, greater than about 60%, greater than about 70%, greater than about 80%, or greater than about 90% relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide. At least portions of first interface 1513 and surface 1515 are optically smooth such that light propagating within the viscoelastic lightguide may be transported by total internal reflection.
  • In some embodiments, one surface of the viscoelastic lightguide is unstructured or the first outer surface is unstructured; the other two surfaces are structured. For example, the first interface and the first outer surface may be structured, and the other surface of the viscoelastic layer unstructured. The first interface and first outer layer may be structured such that the features of each are configured dependently within about 100 um. The first interface and first outer layer may be structured such that the features of each are configured independently not within about 100 um.
  • FIG. 15 c shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1520 comprising first substrate 1522 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1521 (or vice versa). In this example, first interface 1523 is structured with prismatic features such that the first substrate is able to extract light from the viscoelastic lightguide. First outer surface 1524 is structured with lenticular features such that light can be emitted from the first substrate. The lenticular features and the prismatic features are configured dependently such that the period of repetition or pitch P for each pair of features (lenticular and prismatic) is about the same or at least within about 100 um. For each pair of features, the curvature of the lenticular feature may be such that its focal point coincides with the vertex of the prismatic feature. First substrate 1522 may have a refractive index greater than or less than that of viscoelastic lightguide 1521. Useful configurations of lenticular and prismatic features are described in U.S. 2005/0052750 A1 (King et al.) and U.S. 2005/0276071 (Sasagawa et al.). At least a portion of first interface 1523 and a portion of surface 1525 are optically smooth such that light propagating within the viscoelastic lightguide may be transported by total internal reflection.
  • The first substrate may function as a light extracting and light emitting substrate. For a light extracting and light emitting substrate in contact with the viscoelastic lightguide, the amount of light extracted from the lightguide and by the substrate may be greater than about 10%, greater than about 20%, greater than about 30%, greater than about 40%, greater than about 50%, greater than about 60%, greater than about 70%, greater than about 80%, or greater than about 90% relative to the total amount of light that enters the lightguide.
  • For a light extracting and light emitting substrate in contact with the viscoelastic lightguide, the amount of light emitted from the first substrate may be less than about 0.5%, less than about 1%, less than about 2%, less than about 5%, less than about 10%, less than about 20%, less than about 30%, less than about 40%, less than about 50%, less than about 60%, less than about 70%, less than about 80%, or less than about 90% relative to the total amount of light that enters the substrate; the amount of light emitted from the first substrate may be greater than about 10%, greater than about 20%, greater than about 30%, greater than about 40%, greater than about 50%, greater than about 60%, greater than about 70%, greater than about 80%, or greater than about 90% relative to the total amount of light that enters the substrate; or the amount of light emitted from the first substrate may be from about 10 to about 50%, from about 20 to about 50%, from about 30 to about 50%, from about 50 to about 70%, from about 50 to about 80%, or from about 10 to about 90% relative to the total amount of light that enters the substrate. At least portions of first interface 1523 and surface 1525 are optically smooth such that light propagating within viscoelastic lightguide 1521 is transported by total internal reflection.
  • FIG. 15 d shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1530 which also comprises first substrate 1522 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1521. In this embodiment, tips of the prismatic structures that form surface 1532 of first substrate 1522 are in contact with viscoelastic lightguide 1521 such that the two are optically coupled. Corresponding pockets 1531 are formed between the prismatic features and the lightguide. Surface 1532 may comprise any of those described above for the interfaces and outer surfaces. The refractive index of viscoelastic lightguide 1521 may be greater than that of the pocket material in pockets 1531, but less than that of first substrate 1522. In this case, the refractive index difference between the first substrate and the viscoelastic lightguide may be from about 0.002 to about 1; and the refractive index difference between viscoelastic lightguide 1521 and pocket material in pockets 1531 may be from about 0.002 to about 1.
  • The pockets may comprise air. The pockets may comprise a soft, compliant material such as any of the viscoelastic materials described above. The pockets may comprise a PSA. The pockets may comprise a silicone PSA. The first substrate may comprise the film described in King et al. and Sasagawa et al.
  • In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises more than one substrate. FIG. 15 e shows a schematic cross section of optical article 1540 comprising first substrate 1541 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1521. Additional first substrate 1522 is disposed on first substrate 1541 opposite the viscoelastic lightguide. The additional substrate is not optically coupled directly with the viscoelastic lightguide, however, it may be optically coupled indirectly, i.e., by extracting light from the first substrate. The refractive index of first substrate 1541 may be greater than that of viscoelastic lightguide 1521, and the refractive index of additional first substrate 1522 may be may be greater than, less than, or about the same as that of the lightguide. The refractive index difference between the first substrate and the viscoelastic lightguide may be from about 0.002 to about 1; and the refractive index difference between the additional first substrate and the lightguide may be from about 0.002 to about 1.
  • One may determine theoretically how varying the orientation of each feature (or lack thereof) may affect the amount and distribution of light that can be extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide by the first substrate. Further, one may determine theoretically how varying the orientation of each feature (or lack thereof) may affect the amount and distribution of light that can be emitted from the first substrate. In both cases, ray tracing techniques that are consistent with the law of refraction and the principle of total internal reflection as described above may be used.
  • The first substrate may comprise a light emitting layer as described above. The amount and direction of light emitted from the first substrate may be controlled, at the very least, by the shape, size, number, arrangement, etc. of the features that form the first outer surface. In general, the first substrate can be designed such that light may be emitted from the substrate as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide. For example, light may be emitted from the first substrate in at least one predetermined direction, e.g., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or more predetermined directions; from 1 to about 3 predetermined directions; from 1 to about 5 predetermined directions; from 1 to about 10 predetermined directions; or from 1 to about 100 predetermined directions. The light emitted in at least one predetermined direction may be emitted in a pattern. The light emitted in at least one predetermined direction may be emitted uniformly (at the same or nearly the same intensity) or non-uniformly from the first substrate. Light may also be emitted in random directions from the first substrate and/or at various random intensities from the substrate.
  • Light may be emitted from the first substrate in the same manner as shown in FIGS. 7-11 for the viscoelastic lightguide. For example, FIG. 16 shows a perspective view of exemplary optical article 1600 comprising first substrate 1602 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1601. Light represented by rays 1603 is emitted in a predetermined direction from the first substrate. Light may also be emitted in more than one predetermined direction, randomly, in one or more shapes, in discrete areas, at different intensities, etc.
  • Light may be emitted from any surface of the first substrate. FIG. 17 illustrates how light may be emitted from an exemplary optical article comprising a first substrate and a viscoelastic lightguide, both shown in the shape of a film or sheet. FIG. 17 shows a perspective view of exemplary optical article 1700 comprising a first substrate disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1701. The first substrate comprises major surface 1702 and edge surfaces 1703 a-d (1703 c and 1703 d not shown). Light may be emitted from any one or some combination of surfaces 1702 and 1703 a-d. For example, light may be emitted only from major surface 1702 as shown by ray 1704. For another example, light may be emitted only from edge surface 1703 b.
  • Exemplary optical article 1700 also comprises a major surface of viscoelastic lightguide 1701, the major surface being opposite major surface 1702 of the first substrate. Exemplary optical article 1700 also comprises edge surfaces 1705 a-c (1703 c not shown). Light may be emitted from the first substrate and/or the viscoelastic lightguide, in any one or some combination of major surfaces and edge surfaces. Light which enters the viscoelastic lightguide is shown by ray 1706.
  • In some embodiments, a surface of the first substrate is microstructured with air release channels as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • The first substrate may have any bulk three-dimensional shape as is needed for a given application. The first substrate may be commensurate in size with the viscoelastic lightguide, or it may be larger, smaller, thicker, thinner, etc. than the viscoelastic lightguide. The first substrate may be in the form of a square or rectangular layer, sheet, film, etc. as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17.
  • The thickness of the first substrate is not particularly limited as long as it can function as desired. The thickness of the first substrate may be selected such that it can extract and emit light as desired. A maximum thickness of the first substrate may be required for use in particular optical devices designed to be particularly thin. Exemplary thicknesses for the first substrate range from about 0.4 mil to about 1000 mil, from about 1 mil to about 300 mil, from about 1 mil to about 60 mil, or from about 0.5 mil to about 30 mil.
  • In some embodiments, the first substrate is viscoelastic and comprises any one or more of the viscoelastic materials described above for the viscoelastic lightguide. A viscoelastic first substrate may need to comprise appropriate tensile strength values, viscous characteristics, and properties that facilitate sufficient optical coupling with at least a portion of a viscoelastic lightguide. A viscoelastic first substrate is generally soft, compliant and flexible. A viscoelastic first substrate may have an elastic modulus, viscous modulus, and damping coefficient as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide. In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises a PSA layer as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide. The first substrate may have a particular peel force or at least exhibit a peel force within a particular range as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises an optically clear substrate having high light transmittance of from about 80 to about 100%, from about 90 to about 100%, from about 95 to about 100%, or from about 98 to about 100% over at least a portion of the visible light spectrum. In some embodiments, the first substrate has a haze value of less than about 5%, less than about 3%, or less than about 1%. In some embodiments, the first substrate has a haze value of from about 0.01 to less than about 5%, from about 0.01 to less than about 3%, or from about 0.01 to less than about 1%.
  • In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises an optically clear substrate having high light transmittance and a low haze value. High light transmittance may be from about 90 to about 100%, from about 95 to about 100%, or from about 98 to about 100% over at least a portion of the visible light spectrum, and haze values may be from about 0.01 to less than about 5%, from about 0.01 to less than about 3%, or from about 0.01 to less than about 1%. In some embodiments, the first substrate is hazy and diffuses light, particularly visible light. A hazy first substrate may have a haze value of greater than about 5%, greater than about 20%, or greater than about 50%. A hazy first substrate may have a haze value of from about 5 to about 90%, from about 5 to about 50%, or from about 20 to about 50%.
  • In some embodiments, the first substrate has low light transmittance, for example, from about 0.1 to about 70%, from about 0.1 to about 50%, or from about 0.1 to about 20%.
  • In some embodiments, the first substrate may be translucent in that it reflects and transmits light.
  • The first substrate may have a refractive index in the range of from about 1.3 to about 2.6, 1.4 to about 1.7, or from about 1.5 to about 1.7. The particular refractive index or range of refractive indices selected for the first substrate may depend on the overall design of the optical article or device, e.g., the presence or absence of any additional substrates in contact with the first substrate and the particular application in which the article or device may be used.
  • In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises one or more viscoelastic materials as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide. In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises a PSA as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide. In some embodiments, the first substrate and the viscoelastic lightguide comprise viscoelastic materials. In some embodiments, the first substrate and the viscoelastic lightguide comprise PSAs.
  • In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a clear acrylic PSA, and the first substrate comprises a silicone PSA. The silicone PSA may comprise a stretch releasable PSA as described above. The refractive index of the clear acrylic PSA may be greater than that of the silicone PSA, e.g., the refractive index difference may be from about 0.04 to about 0.09. Exemplary clear acrylic PSAs are available as transfer tapes such as VHB™ Acrylic Tape 4910F from 3M Company and 3M™ Optically Clear Laminating Adhesives (8140 and 8180 series). Silicone PSAs include any of those described above such as the silicone PSAs comprising polydiorganosiloxane polyoxamide.
  • In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises an adhesive that is useful for adhering the viscoelastic lightguide to an article such as a dashboard of a vehicle or a painted wall. Useful adhesives include optically clear adhesives, optically diffuse adhesives, radiation cured adhesives, thermal cured adhesives, hot melt adhesives, cold seal adhesives, heat activated adhesives, adhesives that cure at room temperature and structural adhesives having an adhesive bond strength of at least about 6 MPa, and the like. Structural adhesives are available as 3M™ SCOTCH-WELD™ Adhesives.
  • In some embodiments, the first substrate is not viscoelastic.
  • In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises a polymer. In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises a polymeric film. Useful polymeric films include cellulose acetate, poly(meth)acrylate (acrylate and/or methacrylate), polyether sulfone, polyurethane, polyester, polycarbonate, polymethyl methacrylate, polyvinyl chloride, syndiotactic polystyrene, cyclic olefin copolymer, polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene naphthalate, copolymer or blend based on naphthalene dicarboxylic acids, or some combination thereof. In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises a poly(meth)acrylate having a refractive index greater than that of the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • The first substrate may be a reflector that reflects incident light being transported within the viscoelastic lightguide. In some embodiments, the reflector comprises a specular reflector wherein light propagating within the viscoelastic lightguide is reflected at a surface of the specular reflector according to the law of reflection. The law of reflection states that for light incident upon a surface and reflected by the surface, the reflection angle, θr, is the same as or nearly the same as the incident angle, θt, wherein both angles are defined relative to a plane of the surface. For a specular reflector, the reflection angle of light is within about 16° of the incident angle. A specular reflector may be fully or near fully specular as a reflector over some range of incident angles. Also, specular reflectors may be from about 85 to about 100% reflective, from about 90 to about 100%, or from about 95 to about 100%, across a particular region of the electromagnetic spectrum, for example, the visible region.
  • Suitable specular reflectors include mirrors such as a plane mirrors comprising a film of reflecting material, typically a metal, coated on glass. Suitable reflectors include mirrors that are multilayer optical films. Useful multilayer optical films comprise films having from about 10 to about 10,000 alternating layers of first and second polymer layers wherein the polymer layers comprise polyesters. Exemplary multilayer optical films are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,825,543; 5,828,488 (Ouderkirk et al.); 5,867,316; 5,882,774; 6,179,948 B1 (Merrill et al.); 6,352,761 B1; 6,368,699 B1; 6,927,900 B2; 6,827,886 (Neavin et al.); 6,972,813 B1 (Toyooka); 6,991,695; 2006/0084780 A1 (Hebrink et al.); 2006/0216524 A1; 2006/0226561 A1 (Merrill et al.); 2007/0047080 A1 (Stover et al.); WO 95/17303; WO 95/17691; WO 95/17692; WO 95/17699; WO 96/19347; WO 97/01440; WO 99/36248; and WO 99/36262.
  • Exemplary specular reflectors include those available from 3M™ Company, for example, 3M™ High Intensity Grade Reflective Products such as High Reflective Visible Mirror Film and High Transmission Mirror Film, and Vikuiti™ films such as Vikuiti™ Enhanced Specular Reflector.
  • In some embodiments, the reflector comprises a diffuse reflector wherein light propagating within the viscoelastic lightguide is reflected and scattered at a surface of the diffuse reflector. For a diffuse reflector, light of a given incident angle reflects with multiple reflection angles wherein at least some of the reflection angles are greater than about 16° of the incident angle. A diffuse reflector may be fully or near fully reflective over some range of incident angles. Also, diffuse reflectors may be from about 85 to about 100% reflective, from about 90 to about 100%, or from about 95 to about 100%, across a particular region of the electromagnetic spectrum, for example, the visible region.
  • A diffuse reflector may comprise an irregular surface with respect to the wavelength of light being reflected. Light may be reflected at the surface. The diffuse reflector may comprise a layer of organic, inorganic or hybrid organic/inorganic particles disposed on a substrate. The particles may have a diameter of from greater than about 0.01 to about 100 um, from greater than about 0.05 to about 100 um, or from greater than about 0.05 to about 50 um. The particles may be polymeric particles, glass beads, inorganic particles, metal oxide particles, or hybrid organic/inorganic particles. The particles may be solid, porous or hollow. The particles may comprise microspheres having a polymeric shell with a blowing agent such as isobutene or isopentane inside the shell, for example, microspheres available as EXPANCEL microspheres from Expancel Co. The particles may be dispersed in a polymeric material or binder. Binders include one or more polymers and may be, for example, any of the viscoelastic materials and adhesive materials (cold seal adhesives, etc.) described above. The binder may comprise a PSA. The binder and particles may be coated onto a substrate such that the thickness of the binder is greater than, less than or about the same as the diameter of the particles. The substrate may comprise a polymer, metal, specular reflector, and the like.
  • For example, the diffuse reflector may comprise a layer of barium sulfate particles loaded in a polyethylene terephalate film. Other constructions that provide a reflective surface are described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,481,563 (David et al.).
  • In some embodiments, the binder is light transmissive such that at least some of the light incident upon the layer enters the layer and becomes diffused. This diffused light is reflected upon being incident on a substrate that is a reflector. The diffusive material may comprise particles dispersed in a binder as described above. The refractive indices of the particles and binder may be different. For example, the refractive indices of the particles and binder may differ from about 0.002 to about 1, or from about 0.01 to about 0.5. This type of diffuse reflector may be from about 85 to about 100% reflective, from about 90 to about 100%, or from about 95 to about 100%, across a particular region of the electromagnetic spectrum, for example, the visible region. Exemplary light diffusing materials are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,288,172 B1 (Goetz et al.). For example, the particles may comprise hollow glass spheres having a mean diameter of about 18 um (SPHERICEL Grade 60P18 from Potters Industries Inc.), and the binder may comprise a PSA such as a silicone PSA.
  • In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises a multilayer optical film. Multilayer optical films that are mirrors are described above. Other types of multilayer optical films may also be used, for example, the multilayer optical film may be a reflective film, a polarizer film, a reflective polarizer film, a diffuse blend reflective polarizer film, a diffuser film, a brightness enhancing film, a turning film, a mirror film, or a combination thereof. Exemplary multilayer optical films include 3M™ Vikuiti™ films available from 3M™ Company. Exemplary multilayer optical films are described in the references cited above for multilayer optical films that are mirrors.
  • In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises a polymeric film, metal, glass, ceramic, paper, fabric, or a combination thereof. In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises metal such as aluminum. In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises glass which generally comprises a hard, brittle, amorphous solid, including, soda-lime glass, borosilicate glass, acrylic glass, sugar glass, and the like. In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises a ceramic comprising some amount of crystalline structure and made, for example, from inorganic non-metallic materials. In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises paper, for example, paper made from cellulose pulp. In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises fabric, for example, leather, woven fabrics, non-woven fabrics.
  • In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises a release liner. Release liners typically have a low adhesion surface for contact with an adhesive layer. Release liners may comprise paper such as Kraft paper, or polymeric films such as poly(vinyl chloride), polyester, polyolefin, cellulose acetate, ethylene vinyl acetate, polyurethane, and the like.
  • The release liner may be coated with a layer of a release agent such as a silicone-containing material or a fluorocarbon-containing material. The release liner may comprise paper or a polymeric film coated with polyethylene which is coated with a silicone-containing material. Exemplary release liners include liners commercially available from CP Films Inc. under the trade designations “T-30” and “T-10” that have a silicone release coating on polyethylene terephthalate film.
  • Exemplary release liners include structured release liners. Exemplary release liners include any of those referred to as microstructured release liners. Microstructured release liners are used to impart a microstructure on the surface of an adhesive layer. The microstructured surface can aid air egress between the adhesive layer and the adjacent layer. In general, it is desirable that the microstructure disappear over time to prevent interference with optical properties. Microstructures are generally three-dimensional structures that are microscopic in at least two dimensions (i.e., the topical and/or cross-sectional view is microscopic). The term “microscopic” as used herein refers to dimensions that are difficult to resolve by the human eye without aid of a microscope.
  • The microstructures may assume a variety of shapes. Representative examples include hemispheres, prisms (such as square prisms, rectangular prisms, cylindrical prisms and other similar polygonal features), pyramids, ellipses, grooves (e.g., V-grooves), channels, and the like. In some cases, it may be desirable to include topographical features that promote air egress at the bonding interface when the article is laminated to a substrate. In this regard, V-grooves and channels that can extend to the edge of the article are particularly useful. The particular dimensions and patterns characterizing the microstructures are selected based upon the specific application for which the article is intended. Another example of useful microstructures are described in US 2007/0292650 A1 (Suzuki) wherein the microstructured adhesive layer surface has one or more grooves that exist only in an inner area of the surface and are not open at side surfaces of the layer. These grooves may be in the form of a straight line, branched straight lines, cross, circle, oval, or polygon as viewed from above, and where each form may be composed of plural discontinuous grooves. These grooves may have a width of from 5 to 100 micrometers and a depth of from 5 to 50 micrometers.
  • In some embodiments, optical articles comprising a viscoelastic lightguide and a first substrate may provide an image. A variety of different constructions of the viscoelastic lightguide and the first substrate may be made to provide an image. An image may be made by structuring a surface of the first substrate as described above. For example, first substrate 1602 of FIG. 16 may be structured to provide the image.
  • An image may be made by including or embedding different materials such as particles in regions of the first substrate wherein the regions are arranged to form an image. FIG. 15 f shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1550 that may be used to provide an image. Exemplary optical article 1550 comprises first substrate 1552 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1551. The first substrate comprises two different materials used to form regions 1553 and 1554 which are arranged to form the image. Light propagating within the viscoelastic lightguide behaves differently upon striking the interface between the first substrate and the lightguide, depending on whether the interface is formed between the lightguide and region 1553 or 1554. For example, light incident upon an interface with region 1553 may be reflected, and light incident upon an interface with region 1554 may be extracted. For another example, light incident upon an interface with region 1553 may be reflected, and light incident upon an interface with region 1554 may be extracted selectively for light within a particular range of wavelengths.
  • FIG. 15 g shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1560 that may be used to provide images. Exemplary optical article 1560 comprises first substrate 1562 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1561. The first substrate comprises an image formed by regions of imaging materials 1563 suspended in bulk material 1564. Light propagating within the viscoelastic lightguide may be extracted by bulk material 1564. Regions 1563 may reflect light or transmit light within a particular range of wavelengths depending on the particular imaging materials. Colorants such as pigments and dyes may be used as the imaging materials.
  • An image may be made by depositing material on a surface of the first substrate wherein the material is arranged to form the image. FIG. 15 h shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1570 that may be used to provide an image. Exemplary optical article 1570 comprises first substrate 1572 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1571. Material 1573 is deposited onto the first substrate such that an image is formed by reflection of light within the first substrate and/or transmission of light within a particular range of wavelengths.
  • An image may be made by depositing material between the first substrate and the viscoelastic lightguide wherein the material is arranged to form the image. Exemplary optical article 1580 comprises first substrate 1582 disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 1581. Material 1583 is deposited between the lightguide and the first substrate such that an image is formed by reflection of light within viscoelastic lightguide 1581 and/or extraction of light into first substrate 1582 wherein the extracted light may be within a particular range of wavelengths.
  • For any one of the optical articles shown in FIG. 15 f-i, imaging materials may be deposited by printing or marking, e.g., by inkjet printing, laser printing, electrostatic printing and the like. Images may be monochrome such as black and white images, or they may be colored images. Images may comprise one or more colors throughout, e.g., a uniform layer of color. Images that provide a general or custom surface may be used. For example, an image may be designed such that the optical article appears as plastic, metal or wood grain; fabric, leather, non-woven, etc. The image may also comprise white dots which may be disposed on a surface or interface. The white dots may be arranged as described for extraction features of conventional solid lightguides, e.g., as described in Kinder et al. Useful imaging materials include those that reflect all or some light within a particular range of wavelengths. Useful imaging materials include those that transmit all or some light within a particular range of wavelengths. Exemplary imaging materials include colorants such as pigments and dyes. Imaging materials may also comprise photonic crystals.
  • Any one of first substrates 1552, 1562, 1572 and 1582 may comprise a polymeric film. Any one of the polymeric films may be translucent. Any one of these first substrates may be an adhesive wherein useful adhesives include optically clear adhesives, optically diffuse adhesives, radiation cured adhesives, hot melt adhesives, cold seal adhesives, heat activated adhesives, and structural adhesives having an adhesive bond strength of at least about 6 MPa, and the like.
  • Any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 f-i may comprise a clear acrylic PSA as the viscoelastic lightguide. Any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 f-i may comprise a clear acrylic PSA as the viscoelastic lightguide and a polymeric film as the first substrate. Any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 f-i may comprise a clear acrylic PSA as the viscoelastic lightguide and a translucent polymeric film as the first substrate. Any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 f-i may comprise a clear acrylic PSA as the viscoelastic lightguide and an adhesive layer as the first substrate.
  • Any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 f-i may comprise a second substrate disposed on the viscoelastic lightguide opposite the first substrate. The second substrate may comprise a reflector. For example, any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 f-i may comprise a clear acrylic PSA as the viscoelastic lightguide, a translucent polymeric film as the first substrate, and a second substrate comprising a reflector. Any of the diffuse and specular reflectors described above may be used. Constructions that may be used to provide an image are also shown in FIGS. 15 j-l.
  • FIG. 15 j shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1585 comprising first substrate 1587 disposed between viscoelastic lightguide 1586 and additional substrate 1588. Surface 1589 of additional substrate 1588 is structured to form an image. FIG. 15 k shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1590 comprising first substrate 1592 disposed between viscoelastic lightguide 1591 and additional substrate 1593. Additional substrate 1593 comprises an overlay, the overlay comprising regions of imaging materials 1594 a suspended in bulk material 1594 b. FIG. 151 shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1595 comprising first substrate 1597 disposed between viscoelastic lightguide 1596 and additional substrate 1598. Material 1599 is deposited between first substrate 1597 and additional substrate 1598 such that an image is formed by reflection of light within the first substrate and/or transmission of light within a particular range of wavelengths.
  • Any one of additional substrates 1588, 1593 and 1598 may comprise a polymeric film. Any one of the polymeric films may be translucent. Any one of the first substrates 1587, 1592 and 1597 may be viscoelastic. Any one of the first substrates may comprise a PSA. Any one of the first substrates may comprise a silicone PSA. The first substrates may comprise an adhesive wherein useful adhesives include optically clear adhesives, optically diffuse adhesives, radiation cured adhesives, hot melt adhesives, cold seal adhesives, heat activated adhesives, and structural adhesives having an adhesive bond strength of at least about 6 MPa, and the like.
  • Any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 j-l may comprise a polymeric film as the additional layer and an adhesive that is the first substrate. Any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 j-l may comprise a translucent polymeric film as the additional layer and an adhesive that is the first substrate. For example, any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 j-l may comprise a clear acrylic PSA as the viscoelastic lightguide, a silicone PSA as the first substrate, and a polymeric imaged film as the additional layer. For another example, any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 j-l may comprise a clear acrylic PSA as the viscoelastic lightguide, a silicone PSA as the first substrate, and a translucent polymeric imaged film as the additional layer.
  • Any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 f-i may comprise a second substrate disposed on the viscoelastic lightguide opposite the first substrate. The second substrate may comprise a reflector. For example, any one of the optical articles shown in FIGS. 15 f-i may comprise a clear acrylic PSA as the viscoelastic lightguide, a silicone PSA as the first substrate, a translucent polymeric film as the additional substrate, and a second substrate comprising a reflector. Any of the diffuse and specular reflectors described above may be used.
  • Multilayer constructions comprising the viscoelastic lightguide disposed between two substrates are described below. FIG. 14 shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1400 comprising viscoelastic layer 1401 disposed between first substrate 1402 and second substrate 1405. First substrate 1402 forms first interface 1403 with the viscoelastic layer and first outer surface 1404 is disposed opposite the interface. Second substrate 1405 forms second interface 1406 and second outer surface 1407 is disposed opposite the interface.
  • This multiple layer construction can manage light in many ways according to structure, refractive index, and material composition of the first substrate, second substrate and viscoelastic lightguide. In general, one may determine theoretically how varying parameters of optical article 1400 can affect the way by which light is managed by the article. This may be carried out using ray tracing techniques consistent with the law of refraction and the principle of total internal reflection.
  • The first and second substrates may comprise the same substrate such that the same surfaces of the substrates are positioned the same way with respect to the viscoelastic lightguide. The first and second substrates may comprise the same substrate such that the same surfaces of the substrates are positioned differently with respect to the viscoelastic lightguide. The first and second substrates may comprise different substrates.
  • The first and second substrates may be any combination of first substrates described above. The first and second substrates may be some combination of light containing, light extracting and light emitting substrates. Each of the first and second substrates may be some combination of light containing, light extracting and light emitting substrates. The first substrate may be a light containing substrate, and the second a light extracting substrate. The first substrate may be a light containing substrate, and the second a light extracting and light emitting layer. The first and second substrates may extract and/or emit light as described above for the first substrate of two layer constructions.
  • Parameters that may be varied include the structure of the first and second interfaces and the structure of the first and second outer surfaces. In general, at least portions of the first and second interfaces are optically smooth such that light propagating within the viscoelastic lightguide may be transported by total internal reflection. In some embodiments, the first and second interfaces and the first and second outer surfaces are unstructured as shown in FIG. 14. In some embodiments, any one of the first and second interfaces and the first and second outer surfaces is structured as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide and the first substrate. In some embodiments, any two of the first and second interfaces and the first and second outer surfaces are structured as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide and the first substrate. For example, the first and second interfaces may be structured with prismatic features for extracting light from the first and second substrates, respectively. In some embodiments, any three of the first and second interfaces and the first and second outer surfaces are structured as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide and the first substrate. In some embodiments, all four of the first and second interfaces and the first and second outer surfaces are structured as described above for the viscoelastic lightguide and the first substrate.
  • In general, optical article 1400 may comprise any of the structured interfaces and structured surfaces described above for the viscoelastic lightguide and the first substrate, i.e., the first and second interfaces and the first and second outer surfaces may comprise any of the structured interfaces and surfaces described above for the viscoelastic lightguide and the first substrate. FIGS. 18 a and 18 b show exemplary combinations of structured surfaces for three layer optical articles. FIG. 18 a shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1800 comprising viscoelastic lightguide 1801 disposed between first substrate 1802 and second substrate 1805. First interface 1803 comprises prismatic features, as described above, for extracting light from the viscoelastic lightguide. First outer surface 1804 and second outer surface 1807 comprises unstructured surfaces, and second interface 1806 comprises an unstructured interface. FIG. 18 b shows a schematic cross section of exemplary optical article 1810 comprising viscoelastic lightguide 1811 disposed between first substrate 1812 and second substrate 1815. First interface 1813 and second interface 1816 comprise unstructured surfaces, and first surface 1814 and second surface 1817 comprises lenticular surfaces, as described above, for emitting light from the first and second substrates, respectively.
  • In some embodiments, first and second interfaces may be structured so that light can be extracted on both sides by the first and second substrates. In some embodiments, first and second interfaces may be structured so that light can be extracted on both sides by the first and second substrates, and first and second outer surfaces may be structured so that light can be emitted from the first and second substrates.
  • Parameters that may also be varied include the refractive indices of the first substrate, second substrate and the viscoelastic lightguide. The first and second substrates may have refractive indices less than that of the viscoelastic lightguide. The first and second substrates may have refractive indices less than that of the viscoelastic lightguide, and the refractive indices of the first and second substrates are the same or nearly the same. The first and second substrates may have refractive indices less than that of the viscoelastic lightguide, and the refractive indices of the first and second substrates may be different. The first and second substrates may have refractive indices less than that of the viscoelastic lightguide, and the refractive index of the first substrate may be greater than that of the second.
  • The first and second substrates may have refractive indices greater than that of the viscoelastic lightguide. The first and second substrates may have refractive indices greater than that of the viscoelastic lightguide, and the refractive indices of the first and second substrates are the same or nearly the same. The first and second substrates may have refractive indices greater than that of the viscoelastic lightguide, and the refractive indices of the first and second substrates may be different. The first and second substrates may have refractive indices greater than that of the viscoelastic lightguide, and the refractive index of the first substrate may be greater than that of the second.
  • The first substrate may have a refractive index less than that of the viscoelastic lightguide, and the second substrate greater than that of the lightguide.
  • The refractive index difference of the viscoelastic lightguide and the first substrate may be from about 0.002 to about 0.5, from about 0.005 to about 0.5, from about 0.01 to about 0.5, from about 0.02 to about 0.5, from about 0.03 to about 0.5, from about 0.04 to about 0.5, from about 0.05 to about 0.5, from about 0.1 to about 0.5, from about 0.2 to about 0.5, from about 0.3 to about 0.5, or from about 0.4 to about 0.5. The refractive index difference of the viscoelastic lightguide and the second substrate may be from about 0.002 to about 0.5, from about 0.005 to about 0.5, from about 0.01 to about 0.5, from about 0.02 to about 0.5, from about 0.03 to about 0.5, from about 0.04 to about 0.5, from about 0.05 to about 0.5, from about 0.1 to about 0.5, from about 0.2 to about 0.5, from about 0.3 to about 0.5, or from about 0.4 to about 0.5.
  • Parameters that may also be varied include the compositions of the first substrate, second substrate and the viscoelastic lightguide. The first substrate, second substrate and viscoelastic lightguide may comprise the same composition. The first and second substrate compositions may be different from that of the viscoelastic lightguide. The first and second substrate compositions may be the same, and different from that of the viscoelastic lightguide. The first substrate and viscoelastic layer may comprise the same composition, and different from that of the second substrate. The first substrate, second substrate and viscoelastic lightguide may comprise different compositions.
  • The first and second substrates may comprise first and second viscoelastic layers, respectively. The first substrate may comprise a viscoelastic layer, and the second substrate does not. The first and second substrates may not comprise viscoelastic layers.
  • The first and second substrates may comprise first and second PSAs, respectively. The first substrate may comprise a PSA, and the second substrate does not. The first and second substrates may not comprise PSAs.
  • The first and second substrates may comprise first and second reflectors, respectively. The first substrate may comprise a reflector, and the second substrate does not. The first and second substrates may not comprise reflectors.
  • The first and second substrates may comprise first and second multilayer optical films, respectively. The first substrate may comprise a multilayer, and the second substrate does not. The first and second substrates may not comprise multilayer optical films.
  • The first and second substrates may comprise optically clear substrates that may be the same or different. Each substrate has high light transmittance and a low haze value. High light transmittance may be from about 90 to about 100%, from about 95 to about 100%, or from about 99 to about 100% over at least a portion of the visible light spectrum (about 400 to about 700 nm), and haze values may be from about 0.01 to less than about 5%, from about 0.01 to less than about 3%, or from about 0.01 to less than about 1%.
  • In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises a viscoelastic substrate, and the second substrate comprises a light emitting substrate. The light emitting substrate may comprise a polymeric film having a refractive index greater than that of the viscoelastic lightguide. The light emitting substrate may comprise a structured surface that is a second outer surface such that light can be emitted from the light emitting substrate.
  • In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises a viscoelastic layer and is a light emitting layer, and the second substrate does not comprise a viscoelastic layer.
  • In some embodiments, the first and second substrates comprise release liners. The first substrate may comprise a release liner, and the second substrate does not. The first and second subsubstrates may not comprise release liners.
  • The first substrate may comprise a viscoelastic layer, and the second substrate may comprise an adhesive layer that is not a PSA (it may be hot melt, cold seal, etc. as described above). The first substrate may comprise a PSA, and the second substrate may comprise an adhesive layer that is not a PSA (it may be hot melt, cold seal, etc. as described above). In either case, an additional substrate may be disposed on the first substrate opposite the viscoelastic lightguide. The additional substrate may provide an image as described above. The additional substrate may be translucent.
  • The first and second substrates may comprise silicone PSAs, and the viscoelastic layer may comprise a (meth)acrylic PSA. The first and second substrates may have refractive indices less than that of the viscoelastic lightguide. The silicone PSAs may be stretch releasable. This optical article may be disposed between first and second glasses which may or may not be the same glass. The first glass is disposed on the first substrate opposite the viscoelastic lightguide, and the second glass on the second substrate opposite the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • The first substrate may comprise a silicone PSA, and the viscoelastic lightguide may comprise a (meth)acrylic PSA. The first substrate may have a refractive index less than that of the viscoelastic lightguide. The silicone PSA may be stretch releasable. The second substrate may comprise a diffuse reflector comprising a layer of particles and polymer. The particles may comprise glass microspheres and the polymer may comprise an adhesive, or the particles may comprise glass microspheres and the polymer may comprise a (meth)acrylic PSA. An additional substrate may be disposed on the first substrate opposite the viscoelastic lightguide. The additional substrate may provide an image as described above. The additional substrate may be a polymeric film such as a translucent polymeric film. A reflector may be disposed on the diffuse reflector opposite the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • The first substrate may comprise a polymeric film having a refractive index greater than that of the viscoelastic lightguide, the second substrate may comprise a reflector. The polymeric film may provide an image as described above. The polymeric film may be translucent. An additional substrate may be disposed on the first substrate opposite the viscoelastic lightguide. The additional substrate may comprise a polymeric film.
  • The first substrate may comprise a polymeric film having a refractive index greater than that of the viscoelastic lightguide, the second substrate may have a refractive index less than that of the lightguide. The polymeric film may provide an image as described above. The polymeric film may be translucent. The second substrate may comprise a viscoelastic substrate. The second substrate may comprise a PSA.
  • The first substrate may comprise a silicone PSA, the second substrate may comprise a reflector, and the viscoelastic layer may comprise a (meth)acrylic PSA.
  • The first substrate may comprise a (meth)acrylic light extracting and light emitting substrate, for example, as described in King et al. and Sasagawa et al, the first substrate disposed on the viscoelastic lightguide with the tips of the prismatic structures in contact with the lightguide such that the two are optically coupled. The second substrate comprises a reflector. The viscoelastic lightguide comprises a (meth)acrylic PSA. Any areas of the first substrate may be filled with a pocket material as described above. For example, the pocket material may comprise a silicone PSA having a refractive index less than that of the first substrate and the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • The first substrate may comprise a silicone PSA having a refractive index less than that of the viscoelastic lightguide. An additional substrate may be disposed on the silicone PSA opposite the viscoelastic lightguide; the additional substrate comprising a (meth)acrylic light extracting and light emitting substrate, for example, as described in King et al. and Sasagawa et al. In this case, the tips of the prismatic structures are not in contact with the lightguide. The second substrate comprises a reflector. The viscoelastic lightguide comprises a (meth)acrylic PSA.
  • The first and second substrates may comprise (meth)acrylic light extracting and light emitting substrates, for example, as described in King et al. and Sasagawa et al, the substrates disposed on the viscoelastic lightguide with the tips of the prismatic structures in contact with the lightguide such that the two substrates are optically coupled to the lightguide. The viscoelastic lightguide comprises a (meth)acrylic PSA. Any gaps between the substrates and the viscoelastic lightguide are filled with a silicone PSA having a refractive index less than that of the (meth)acrylic substrates and the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • The first and second substrates may comprise a silicone PSA. A first additional substrate may disposed on the first substrate opposite the viscoelastic layer, and a second additional substrate on the second substrate opposite the viscoelastic layer. The first and second additional substrates may comprise (meth)acrylic films, for example, as described in King et al. and Sasagawa et al. The viscoelastic lightguide comprises a (meth)acrylic PSA.
  • The first and second substrates may comprise first and second glasses, respectively, which may or may not be the same glass.
  • In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises a viscoelastic layer, and the second substrate comprises a reflector. The first substrate may comprise a PSA, and the second substrate may comprise a specular reflector. In either case, the first substrate may have a refractive index greater than or less than that of the viscoelastic lightguide.
  • In some embodiments, the first substrate comprises a light transmissive substrate that is not a viscoelastic layer, and the second substrate comprises a reflector. The first substrate may comprise a polymeric film.
  • In general, the optical articles described above may have substrates that are interchangeable. For example, a first substrate may comprise an imaged layer that may be exchanged with a different imaged layer. For another example, an additional layer disposed on a first substrate may be exchanged with a different additional layer.
  • In general, an adhesive layer may be disposed on a surface of any of the optical articles described herein. Suitable adhesives include PSAs, optically clear PSAs, optically diffuse PSAs such as those described above, radiation cured adhesives, hot melt adhesives, cold seal adhesives, heat activated adhesives, structural adhesives having an adhesive bond strength of at least about 6 MPa, and the like.
  • In general, a release liner may be disposed on the surface of any of the substrates such as the first substrate, second substrate, and/or any additional substrates. Suitable release liners are described above.
  • In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide may comprise two layers wherein one of the layers comprises particles as described above. In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide may comprise three layers: a first viscoelastic lightguide, a second viscoelastic lightguide disposed on the first viscoelastic lightguide, a polymeric film disposed on the second viscoelastic lightguide opposite the first viscoelastic lightguide, and a third viscoelastic lightguide disposed on the first viscoelastic lightguide opposite the second viscoelastic lightguide. The polymeric film may be designed to emit light.
  • The viscoelastic lightguides may comprise the same polymer, or they may comprise different polymers. The viscoelastic lightguides may have refractive index differences of from about 0.002 to about 0.5, from about 0.005 to about 0.5, from about 0.01 to about 0.5, from about 0.02 to about 0.5, from about 0.03 to about 0.5, from about 0.04 to about 0.5, from about 0.05 to about 0.5, from about 0.1 to about 0.5, from about 0.2 to about 0.5, from about 0.3 to about 0.5, or from about 0.4 to about 0.5.
  • The viscoelastic lightguide may be made using any method or process commonly used for making viscoelastic articles. Typical processes comprise those that are continuous processes such as continuous cast and cure, extrusion, microreplication, and embossing methods. Various types of radiation may be used for processes in which a material needs to be cured, e.g., crosslinked. Various types of chemistries, including those that do not require radiation, may be used for materials that need to be cured. If the viscoelastic lightguide is made from a curable material, then the material may be cured before, after or during contact with the light source. If the viscoelastic lightguide is made from a cured material, then the material may be cured before, after or during contact with first and/or second substrates. If a first or second substrate is made from a curable material, then the material may be cured before, after or during contact with the viscoelastic lightguide. If any one or more of the viscoelastic lightguide, first substrate and second substrate is made from a cured material, then the material may be cured using the light source either before, during or after they are optically coupled to the lightguide.
  • Conventional molding processes may also be used. Molds may be made by micro-machining and polishing of a mold material to create the desired features, structured surfaces, etc. Mold materials include polymeric, glass and metal materials. The molds may need to be suitable for making optically smooth surfaces of the viscoelastic lightguide. The optically smooth surface of the viscoelastic lightguide, if made from curable materials, may be formed by simply allowing the material to cure in air or other atmosphere such that the material levels itself. Laser ablation may be used to structure a surface of the viscoelastic lightguide and molds.
  • Optical articles comprising the viscoelastic lightguide and a substrate may be made in a number of ways. In some embodiments, the lightguide and substrate may be made separately, contacted and pressed together using finger pressure, a hand roller, an embosser or a laminator.
  • In some embodiments, the substrate may be formed on the viscoelastic lightguide by coating a substrate material on the lightguide. The substrate material may then be treated to form the substrate. For example, the substrate material may be extruded onto the viscoelastic lightguide in the form of a layer and cooled to solidify the material to form the substrate. Alternatively, the substrate material may be curable and treated by heating and/or applying radiation to form the substrate. The substrate material may include solvent and the substrate is formed by removing the solvent.
  • In some embodiments, the viscoelastic lightguide may be formed on the substrate by coating a viscoelastic material on the substrate. The viscoelastic material may then be treated to form the viscoelastic lightguide. For example, the viscoelastic material may be extruded onto the substrate in the form of a layer and cooled to solidify the material to form the lightguide. Alternatively, the viscoelastic material may be curable and treated by heating and/or applying radiation to form the lightguide. The viscoelastic material may include solvent and the lightguide is formed by removing the solvent.
  • In cases where the substrate material or the viscoelastic material is curable, an optical article having a partially cured substrate or lightguide, respectively, may be made. In cases where the substrate material or the viscoelastic material is curable, chemically curing materials may be used such that the material is crosslinked. In cases where the substrate material or the viscoelastic material is curable, the material may be cured before, after and/or during contact with another material or the light source.
  • In cases where the substrate material or the viscoelastic material is curable using light, the light source may be optically coupled to the material and curing carried out by injecting light from the light source.
  • A substrate may be used to structure a surface of the viscoelastic lightguide, e.g., the viscoelastic lightguide may not be structured by itself, rather, it becomes structured when contacted with a structured surface of a substrate. It is also possible for the viscoelastic lightguide to have a structured surface such that it deforms a surface of a substrate to create the interface.
  • The optical articles and optical devices disclosed herein may be provided in any number of ways. The optical articles and optical devices may be provided as sheets or strips laid flat, or they can be rolled up to form a roll. The optical articles and optical devices may be packaged as single items, or in multiples, in sets, etc. The optical articles and light sources may be provided in an assembled form, i.e., as an optical device. The optical articles and light sources may be provided as kits wherein the two are separate from each other and assembled at some point by the user. The optical articles and light sources may also be provided separately such that they can be mixed and matched according to the needs of the user. The optical articles and optical devices may be temporarily or permanently assembled to light up.
  • The optical articles disclosed herein may be altered depending on a particular use. For example, the optical articles can be cut or divided by any suitable means, e.g., using a scissors or a die cutting method. A particularly useful die cutting method is described in U.S. Provisional Ser. No. 61/046,813 (64033US002, Sherman et al.). The optical articles and devices may be cut or divided into different shapes such as alphabetic letters; numbers; geometric shapes such as squares, rectangles, triangles, stars and the like.
  • The optical articles and optical devices may be used for signage such as for graphic arts applications. The optical articles and optical devices may be used on or in windows, walls, wallpaper, wall hangings, pictures, posters, billboards, pillars, doors, floormats, vehicles, or anywhere signage is used. Signage may be single-sided or double-sided as shown in FIGS. 15 c and 18 b, respectively. FIG. 19 shows a schematic drawing of exemplary optical article or optical device 1900 in contact with an article having curved surface 1901.
  • The optical articles and devices may be used for safety purposes wherever light is desired. For example, the optical articles and devices may be used to illuminate one or more steps of a ladder, steps of a stairway, aisles such as in airplanes and movie theatres, walkways, egress, handrails, work zone identification signs and markings. FIG. 20 shows a schematic drawing of exemplary optical article or optical device 2000 in contact with stairs 2001 of a stairway.
  • The optical articles and optical devices may be used in a variety of items such as reading lights; party and holiday decorations such as hats, ornaments, string lighting, balloons, gift bags, greeting cards, wrapping paper; desk and computer accessories such as desk mats, mousepads, notepad holders, writing instruments; sporting items such as fishing lures; craft items such as knitting needles; personal items such as toothbrushes; household and office items such as clock faces, wall plates for light switches, hooks, tools. FIG. 21 shows a schematic drawing of an exemplary cut-out article in which the optical article or optical device (not shown) is incorporated.
  • The optical articles and optical devices may be used on clothing and clothing accessories for decorative and/or safety purposes. For example, the optical articles and optical devices may be used on outerwear for cyclists, or on clothing or headgear for miners. For another example, the optical articles and optical devices may be used on or in straps and wristbands of watches, or on or in watch faces. FIG. 22 shows a schematic drawing of exemplary optical article or optical device 2200 incorporated into or on wristband 2201 of a watch.
  • The optical articles and optical devices may be used anywhere light is needed or desired. The optical articles and optical devices may be disposed on a top surface of a shelf such that light from the article or device, respectively, is emitted in an upward direction. Likewise, the optical articles and optical devices may be disposed on a bottom surface of a shelf such that light from the article or device, respectively, is emitted in a downward direction. The optical articles and optical devices may also be disposed on or within a shelf having a light transmissive portion. The articles and devices may be arranged such that light is emitted from the light transmissive portion. FIG. 23 shows a schematic drawing of an exemplary refrigerator shelf in which the optical article or optical device (not shown) is incorporated such that light is emitted in upward and/or downward directions.
  • The optical articles and devices may be used as flashlights. For example, optical articles and optical devices may be disposed on the outside or inside of a battery cover plate or other part of an electronic handheld device. The optical articles and optical devices may or may not be hardwired to the electronic device's battery but could have its own power source. The electronic device's battery cover may or may not be removable from the rest of the device comprising the display.
  • The optical articles and optical devices may be used for vehicles such as automobiles, marine vehicles, buses, trucks, railcars, trailers, aircraft, and aerospace vehicles. The optical articles and devices may be used on almost any surface of a vehicle including the exterior, interior, or any in-between surface. For example, the optical articles and devices may be used to light up door handles on the exterior and/or interior of a vehicle. The optical articles and devices may be used to illuminate trunk compartments, for example, they may be positioned on the underside of the trunk lid or inside the compartment. The optical articles and devices may be used on bumpers, spoilers, floor boards, windows, on or as tail lights, sill plate lights, puddle lights, emergency flashers, center high mounted stop lights, or side lights and markers. The optical articles and devices may be used to illuminate the inside of engine compartments, for example, they may be positioned on the underside of the hood, inside the compartment, or on an engine part.
  • The optical articles and devices may also be used on the edge surfaces of vehicular doors between the exterior and interior panels of the doors. These optical articles and devices may be used to provide a variety of information for the user, manufacturer, etc. The optical articles and devices may be used to illuminate the instrument panel of a vehicle where lighted areas are typically displayed. The optical articles and devices may be used on other interior items such as cupholders, consoles, handles, seats, doors, dashboards, headrests, steering wheels, wheels, portable lights, compasses, and the like. The optical articles and devices may be used on back or pass areas for reading light or to provide ambient lighting for inside a vehicle. FIG. 24 shows an exemplary automobile and exemplary optical article or optical device 2400. The optical article or device is disposed on edge surface 2401 of the passenger door.
  • The optical articles and optical devices may be used in the manufacture of an item or as a replacement part of an item. For example, the optical articles and optical devices may be sold to an automobile manufacturer or automobile repair shop for assembly or repair of some specific part of an automobile. FIG. 25 shows an exemplary automobile having tail light 2500. An optical article or optical device (not shown) is disposed behind the outside layer of the tail light which is typically red, yellow or clear plastic. The tail light may comprise a cavity with a light bulb or LED as a light source. An optical article or device may be used in the cavity as a replacement for the light source. Alternatively, the tail light may not comprise a cavity or at least comprise a much smaller cavity than is used in today's automobiles. An optical article or optical device may be disposed behind or within the outside layer of the tail light such that the overall size of the tail light is reduced.
  • The optical articles and optical devices may be used for traffic safety such as for traffic signs, street signs, highway dividers and barriers, toll booths, pavement markings, and work zone identification signs and markings. The optical articles and devices may be used on license plates for decoration, to provide information such as vehicle registration, etc. The optical articles and devices may also be used to provide light near license plates such that the license plates are lit up from the side, top, etc.
  • The optical articles and optical devices may be used with illumination devices comprising hollow light recycling cavities sometimes referred to as backlight assemblies. Backlight assemblies may be used for signage or general lighting. Exemplary backlight assemblies are disclosed in WO 2006/125174 (Hoffman et al.) and US 2008/0074901 (David et al.). The optical articles and optical devices disclosed herein may be used to replace the light sources described in these references.
  • FIG. 26 a shows a schematic cross section of an exemplary backlight assembly 2600. The backlight assembly comprises housing 2605 having a plurality of internal surfaces 2606 a-c and two opposing side surfaces 2607 a and b (not shown) substantially parallel to the plane of the cross section. At least one of these internal surfaces 2606 a-c and 2607 a and b is reflective. Backlight assembly 2600 also comprises light emitting film 2610. Housing 2605 and light emitting film 2610 form an enclosed backlight. Light emitting film 2610 may comprise any material that transmits light from inside the enclosed backlight to outside illumination device 2600. Light emitting film 2610 may comprise a polymeric film which may be diffusive and/or translucent. The light emitting film may also provide an image as described above. For example Housing 2605 may comprise metal and/or polymer. Reflective internal surfaces may comprise any of the reflectors and reflective surfaces described above.
  • Backlight assembly 2600 comprises at least one optical article as disclosed herein. The optical article may be disposed on at least one of internal surfaces 2606 a-c, 2607 a-b, and 2611 which is the internal surface of light emitting film 2610. FIG. 26 a shows optical article 2615 disposed on internal surface 2606 a. The optical article may comprise a viscoelastic lightguide disposed on a polymeric substrate. If the viscoelastic lightguide is a pressure sensitive adhesive, it may be directly adhered to internal surface 2606 a. One or more light sources is disposed such that light emitted by the one or more light sources can enter the viscoelastic lightguide of optical article 2615. For example, a light source may be disposed along the edge of the optical article that is adjacent internal surface 2606 b.
  • FIG. 26 b shows a schematic cross section of an exemplary backlight assembly 2620. The enclosed backlight is formed as described above for FIG. 26 a, except that optical articles 2625 a and 2625 b are disposed on opposing internal surfaces 2606 b and c.
  • FIG. 26 c shows a schematic cross section of an exemplary backlight assembly 2630. The enclosed backlight is formed as described above for FIG. 26 a, except that optical article 2635 is disposed on internal surface 2611 of light emitting film 2610. Optical article 2635 may comprise a viscoelastic lightguide and light may be emitted from either face of the lightguide, i.e., into the cavity of the assembly or into the light emitting film.
  • For embodiments shown in FIGS. 26 a-c, the optical articles comprising the viscoelastic lightguide may emit light from one or more surfaces. For example, the optical articles may emit light from one or both faces.
  • Additional films, layers, etc. may be disposed on either side of light emitting film 2610. For example, a three-quarter mirror comprising a multilayer optical film may be disposed on surface 2611. Multilayer optical films are described in references cited above. Retrore
  • The optical articles and optical devices may be used on or in display devices such as cell phones, personal digital devices, MP3 players, digital picture frames, monitors, laptop computers, projectors such as mini-projectors, global positioning displays, televisions, etc. The optical articles may be used in place of conventional lightguides used to backlight a display panel of the display device. For example, the viscoelastic lightguide may be used to replace a solid or hollow lightguide that distributes light from one or more substantially linear or point light sources. The display device can be assembled without the need for adhesives to bond display components to the viscoelastic lightguide. Exemplary display devices include those having LCD and plasma display panels. Exemplary display devices are described in US 2008/232135 A1 (Kinder et al.) and U.S. Pat. No. 6,111,696 (Allen et al.)
  • FIG. 27 shows a schematic cross section of exemplary display device 2700. Optical device 2701 comprises light source 2702 and viscoelastic lightguide 2703. The display device also comprises polarizer 2710 disposed between LCD panel 2715 and viscoelastic lightguide 2703. Exemplary polarizers and LCD panels are described in Allen et al.
  • The optical articles and devices may be used for lighting buttons and keypads in various electronic devices including the display devices described above. In this case, the optical articles and devices are used in place of a conventional lightguide as described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,498,535 (Hoyle); U.S. 2007/0279391 A1 (Marttila, et al.), U.S. 2008/0053800 A1 (Hoyle), and U.S. Ser. No. 12/199,862 (63619US006, Sahlin, et al.).
  • FIG. 28 shows a schematic cross section of exemplary keypad assembly 2800. Optical device 2801 comprises light source 2802 and viscoelastic lightguide 2803.
  • Optical assembly 2800 also comprises a plurality of keys with each key 2804 a comprising a corresponding protrusion 2804 b. Also shown are domesheet 2805 and conductive popples 2806. When a user depresses key 2804 a in a downward direction as shown by arrow 2810, protrusion 2804 b contacts viscoelastic lightguide 2803 which then contacts domesheet 2805. Domesheet 2805 is pressed down on popple 2806 such that at least a portion of the popple is pushed inside out. The popple then contacts surrounding electrical contacts (not shown) such that light is emitted from the lightguide to light up the corresponding key.
  • In some embodiments, top surface 2807 of viscoelastic lightguide 2803 is substantially not in contact with anything but the surrounding air. In some embodiments, a substrate is disposed on top surface 2807. The substrate may comprise any of those described herein. The substrate may be designed to extract light from viscoelastic lightguide 2803 when the surrounding air is displaced at the surface of the substrate. The substrate may comprise a polymeric film having a refractive index less than that of viscoelastic lightguide 2803. The substrate may comprise a viscoelastic layer having a refractive index less than that of viscoelastic lightguide 2803. The substrate may comprise a pressure sensitive adhesive layer having a refractive index less than that of viscoelastic lightguide 2803.
  • FIG. 29 shows a schematic cross section of exemplary signage. Viscoelastic lightguide 2901 is disposed on multilayer optical film 2902 that is a mirror film. Extractor layer 2903 is disposed on viscoelastic lightguide 2901 opposite the mirror film. The extractor layer comprises a polymeric film capable of extracting light from the viscoelastic layer. For example, the extractor layer may have a refractive index greater than that of the viscoelastic layer. A pattern of white dots (not shown) may be a part of extractor layer 2903 such that light is emitted uniformly from the layer. Diffuse layer 2904 is disposed on extractor layer 2903 and graphic film 2905 is disposed on top of the diffuse layer. An air gap may be disposed between the extractor layer and the diffuse layer although this is not shown in FIG. 29.
  • The optical articles and optical devices disclosed herein may be incorporated into security films or laminates. These security laminates are used to protect documents or packages to ensure that underlying items are not altered. Security laminates may be used to make driver licenses, passports, tamper proof seals and the like. Exemplary security film constructions are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,510,171 (Faykish); U.S. Pat. No. 6,288,842 (Florczak et al.); and U.S. Ser. No. 12/257,223 (64812US002, Endle et al.).
  • The optical articles and optical devices may be used in the construction of an illuminated license plate. Useful optical articles include the front lit and back lit optical articles described in U.S. 2007/0006493 (Eberwein); U.S. 2007/0031641 A1 (Frisch et al.); U.S. 20070209244 (Prollius et al.); WO 2008/076612 A1 (Eberwein); WO 2008/121475 A1 (Frisch); WO 2008/016978 (Wollner et al.) and WO 2007/92152 A2 (Eberwein).
  • The optical articles and devices described herein may be used for creating three-dimensional (3D) images in displays, buttons, keypads and the like. For example, 3D automotive displays and security laminates may be made. The optical articles and devices may be used with microlens sheeting in which a composite image floats above or below the sheeting, or both. For example, the optical articles and devices may be used with microlens sheetings described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,336,422 B2 (Dunn et al.), U.S. 2008/0130126 A1 (Brooks et al.), U.S. 2007/0081254 A1 (Endle et al.), U.S. 2007/0279391 A1 (Martina et al.), and U.S. Application Ser. No. 61/078,971 filed on Jul. 8, 2008 (64316US002, Gates et al.), U.S. Pat. No. 6,288,842 (Florczak et al.); and U.S. Ser. No. 12/257,223 (64812US002, Endle et al.).
  • The optical articles and devices may comprise an electrical circuit. For example, the first substrate may comprise an electrical circuit. The first substrate may also comprise a reflector which comprises an electrical circuit. The first substrate may also comprise a mirror which comprises an electrical circuit. The light source may be in electrical communication with the electrical circuit. The light source may comprise an array of multiple light sources. The viscoelastic lightguide can be formed onto the electrical circuit such that the light sources inject light into the viscoelastic lightguide throughtout the entire area of the layer.
  • US 2008/0062688 (Aeling et al.);
  • The optical articles and devices may be used in sensing/detecting devices wherein a sensor is disposed to receive light emitted from the viscoelastic lightguide. Also disclosed is a sensing/detecting device in which the light source is replaced with a sensor/detector. The sensor/detector can be a photodetector, a silicon photodiode, an IR detector, a solar cell, or an optoelectronic device, or some combination thereof.
  • The optical articles and devices may be incorporated into a therapeutic device. For example, the optical articles and devices disclosed herein may be used in conformal patches for providing light therapy to tissue. Exemplary conformal patches are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,096,066 (Chen et al.). Additional therapeutic devices are described in U.S. 2005/0070976 A1 (Samuel et al.); Electronics World, October 2007; and LEDs Magazine, November 2006.
  • The terms “in contact” and “disposed on” are used generally to describe that two items are adjacent one another such that the whole item can function as desired. This may mean that additional materials can be present between the adjacent items, as long as the item can function as desired.
  • EXAMPLES
  • These examples are merely for illustrative purposes only and are not meant to be limiting on the scope of the appended claims. All parts, percentages, ratios, etc. in the examples and the rest of the specification are by weight, unless noted otherwise. Solvents and other reagents used were obtained from Sigma-Aldrich Chemical Company; Milwaukee, Wis. unless otherwise noted.
  • Table of Abbreviations
    Abbreviation or
    Trade Designation Description
    PDMS α,ω-bis(aminopropyl) polydimethylsiloxane having a molecular
    Diamine weight of about 33,000 g/mole and prepared as described in
    Example 2 of U.S. Pat. No. 5,461,134
    MQ Resin a 60% solids solution of MQ silicone resin in toluene,
    commercially available from GE Silicones; Waterford, NY under
    the trade designation “SR-545”
    Polyamine an organic diamine, commercially available from DuPont,
    Wilmington, DE under the trade designation “DYTEK A”
    H12MDI methylenedicyclohexylene-4,4′-diisocyanate, commercially
    available from Bayer, Pittsburgh, PA under the trade designation
    “DESMODUR W”
  • Example A Example 1
  • A silicone urea PSA with an elastomer was prepared by placing 14.86 parts PDMS Diamine-1 in a glass reactor with 0.05 parts Polyamine-1, 39.00 parts toluene and 21.00 parts 2-propanol. To this solution was added 0.23 parts H12MDI. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for two hours and became viscous. To this was added 25.00 parts of MQ Resin-1. The resulting silicone urea PSA contained a molar ratio of PDMS Diamine-1/Polyamine-1/H12MDI of 1/1/2 and was formulated with 50 weight % MQ Resin-1.
  • The silicone urea PSA was coated on a PET release liner (LOPAREX 5100 from Loparex LLC) to form a PSA layer having a dry thickness of about 25 um. The refractive index of the silicone urea PSA layer was about 1.40.
  • A laminate was prepared using a tape (VHB™ Acrylic Tape 4910F from 3M Company) comprising a clear acrylic PSA (nominal thickness 1 mm) disposed on a liner (0.13 mm). The refractive index of the acrylic PSA layer was 1.473 as measured using an Abbe refractometer. The silicone urea PSA layer was laminated to the acrylic PSA layer using a hand roller. The tape liner was removed and a second silicone urea PSA layer was laminated to the newly exposed side of the acrylic PSA layer. The PET release liners on the silicone urea PSA layers were removed. Laminates were made using a single layer of tape and up to 15 layers of tape, disposed between the silicone urea PSA layers.
  • An LED light source was pressed into the edge of the acrylic PSA layer of a 4×4 in. sample of the laminate such that the LED was approximately perpendicular to the width of the laminate and parallel to the length. The LED was activated. Light propagated through the acrylic PSA layer and was observed to exit the layer by holding a piece of paper along the edge opposite the edge where the LED was in contact with the layer. Light did not appear to exit the laminate in any other direction.
  • Example 2a
  • A laminate was prepared as described for Example 1 except that one of the silicone urea PSA layers was replaced with a multilayer polymeric mirror film (Vikuiti™ ESR from 3M Co.). An LED light source was pressed into the edge of the acrylic PSA layer of a 4×4 in. sample of the laminate such that the LED was approximately perpendicular to the width of the laminate and parallel to the length. The LED was activated. Light propagated through the acrylic PSA layer and was observed to exit the layer by holding a piece of paper along the edge opposite the edge where the LED was in contact with the layer. Light did not appear to exit the laminate in any other direction.
  • Example 2b
  • An acrylic extractor film having microstructured features was obtained. This film is described in detail in US 2005/0052750 A1 (King et al.). One major surface of the acrylic extractor film comprised saw-tooth or pyramidal prismatic features. The opposing major surface of the film comprised cylindrical lenses. The refractive index of the acrylic extractor film was from about 1.52 to about 1.56.
  • A laminate was prepared as described for Example 1 except that one of the silicone urea PSA layers was replaced with a multilayer polymeric mirror film (Vikuiti™ ESR from 3M Co.). The acrylic extractor film was pressed into the silicone urea PSA layer such that the pyramidal prismatic features were in contact with the acrylic PSA layer. The LED was activated. The acrylic extractor film was immediately lit with light from the acrylic PSA layer.
  • Attachment of additional multilayer polymeric mirror films to the cut edges of the laminate was accomplished using finger pressure.
  • Example B Comparative Example
  • A transfer tape (3M™ Optically Clear Laminating Adhesive 8187 from 3M Company) comprising an optically clear acrylic PSA (175 um thickness) disposed between 2 PET liners (each 50 um thickness) was used. The refractive index of the optically clear acrylic PSA layer was 1.47. Laminates were prepared by laminating two glass slides to each other using two layers of the 8187 PSA (350 um total thickness). The glass slides were 75×38×1 mm and No. 2956 from Esco Products Inc.
  • A small extension of the PSA, creating a tacky tab, ˜⅛″×¼″, was left exposed. After some time had passed, attempts were made to separate the glass slides and to remove adhesive from the slides after separation. The glass slides were not removable by shearing or peeling forces. The tab was slowly pulled at ˜0° angle to the surfaces of the glass and stretched to debond the two pieces of glass. The PSA layer was breaking and could not be removed from the glass using the system and method described in commonly assigned U.S. Provisional Ser. No. 61/036,683 (Johnson et al.) filed on Mar. 14, 2008. The whole PSA layer remained as residue on both pieces of glass.
  • Example 3
  • The silicone urea PSA layer was laminated to the 8187 PSA layer using a hand roller. The tape liner was removed and a second silicone urea PSA layer was laminated to the newly exposed side of the 8187 PSA layer. The PET release liners on the silicone urea PSA layers were removed. Laminates were prepared by laminating two glass slides described above to each other using the three layer PSA.
  • An LED light source was pressed into the edge of the 8187 PSA layer of a laminate such that the LED was approximately perpendicular to the width of the laminate and parallel to the length. The LED was activated. Light propagated through the 8187 PSA layer and was observed to exit the layer by holding a piece of paper along the edge opposite the edge where the LED was in contact with the layer. Light did not appear to exit the laminate in any other direction.
  • A small extension of the PSA, creating a tacky tab, ˜⅛″×¼″, was left exposed. After some time had passed, attempts were made to separate the glass slides and to remove adhesive from the slides after separation. The glass slides were not removable by shearing or peeling forces. The tab was slowly pulled at ˜0° angle to the surfaces of the glass and stretched to debond the two pieces of glass. The PSA layer was removed from the glass using the system and method described in Johnson et al.
  • Example 4
  • A transfer tape (3M™ Optically Clear Laminating Adhesive 8142 from 3M Company) comprising an optically clear acrylic PSA (50 um thickness) disposed between 2 PET liners (each 50 um thickness) was used. The refractive index of the acrylic 8142 PSA layer was 1.47. Two layers of the 8187 PSA were laminated together (350 um total thickness).
  • The silicone urea PSA layer was laminated to the 8142 PSA layer using a hand roller. The tape liner was removed and a second silicone urea PSA layer was laminated to the newly exposed side of the 8142 PSA layer. The PET release liners on the silicone urea PSA layers were removed. Laminates were prepared by laminating two glass slides described above to each other using the three layer PSA.
  • An LED light source was pressed into the edge of the 8142 PSA layer of a laminate such that the LED was approximately perpendicular to the width of the laminate and parallel to the length. The LED was activated. Light propagated through the 8142 PSA layer and was observed to exit the layer by holding a piece of paper along the edge opposite the edge where the LED was in contact with the layer. Light did not appear to exit the laminate in any other direction.
  • A small extension of the PSA, creating a tacky tab, ˜⅛″×¼″, was left exposed. After some time had passed, attempts were made to separate the glass slides and to remove adhesive from the slides after separation. The glass slides were not removable by shearing or peeling forces. The tab was slowly pulled at ˜0° angle to the surfaces of the glass and stretched to debond the two pieces of glass. The PSA layer was removed from the glass using the system and method described in Johnson et al.
  • Example 5
  • A transfer tape (3M™ Optically Clear Laminating Adhesive 8141 from 3M Company) comprising an optically clear acrylic PSA (25 um thickness) disposed between 2 PET liners (each 50 um thickness) was used. The refractive index of the acrylic 8142 PSA layer was 1.47.
  • The silicone urea PSA layer was laminated to the 8141 PSA layer using a hand roller. The tape liner was removed and a second silicone urea PSA layer was laminated to the newly exposed side of the 8141 PSA layer. The PET release liners on the silicone urea PSA layers were removed. Laminates were prepared by laminating two glass slides described above to each other using the three layer PSA.
  • An LED light source was pressed into the edge of the 8141 PSA layer of a laminate such that the LED was approximately perpendicular to the width of the laminate and parallel to the length. The LED was activated. Light propagated through the 8141 PSA layer and was observed to exit the layer by holding a piece of paper along the edge opposite the edge where the LED was in contact with the layer. Light did not appear to exit the laminate in any other direction.
  • A small extension of the PSA, creating a tacky tab, ˜⅛″×¼″, was left exposed. After some time had passed, attempts were made to separate the glass slides and to remove adhesive from the slides after separation. The glass slides were not removable by shearing or peeling forces. The tab was slowly pulled at ˜0° angle to the surfaces of the glass and stretched to debond the two pieces of glass. The PSA layer was removed from the glass using the system and method described in Johnson et al.
  • Example C Example 6
  • A 3-layer laminate was prepared from 3 pieces of tape (VHB™ Acrylic Tape 4910F from 3M Company) comprising a clear acrylic PSA having a nominal thickness 1 mm and a refractive index of 1.473 as measured using an Abbe refractometer. A hand roller was used to prepare the 3-layer laminate. This 3-layer laminate was then laminated to the face surface (viewer's side) of 3M™ Diamond Grade™ Reflective Sheeting from 3M™ Company (4″×8″ area) so that the sheeting was front lit. A side-emitting LED was pressed into the core PSA from one end and light was easily passed through the entire 8 inches of the 3-layer laminate and was able to be visibly seen exiting. Light was also extracted perpendicular to the light source along the white hexagon seal pattern of the sheeting.
  • Example 7
  • A 3-layer laminate was prepared from 3 pieces of tape (VHB™ Acrylic Tape 4910F from 3M Company) comprising a clear acrylic PSA having a nominal thickness 1 mm and a refractive index of 1.473 as measured using an Abbe refractometer. A hand roller was used to prepare the 3-layer laminate. A 93/7 w/w isooctylacrylate/acrylamide solvent based adhesive was loaded with 2 and 10 pph hollow glass spheres having a mean diameter of about 18 micron (SPHERICEL Grade 60P18 from Potters Industries Inc.), and each of the loaded PSAs were coated to a dry thickness of 0.5 mil (13 micron). The PSA handspread loaded with 2 pph hollow glass spheres was cut into three inch wide strips. These strips were laminated to a polymeric mirror film as described in Example 2, so that they formed a square. The PSA handspread loaded with 10 pph hollow glass spheres was laminated to fill the square.
  • On top of the adhesive matrix with hollow glass spheres was laminated the 3 mm thick VHB sample. The silicone urea PSA layer described in Example 1 was hand laminated on top of the VHB adhesive. A translucent graphic film was placed on top of the silicone PSA layer. Side-emitting LED lights were injected into the light guide (VHB layer) from two opposing sides of the square, and light was extracted through the silicone urea PSA layer and into the translucent graphic film.
  • Example 8
  • An adhesive comprising 85/14/1 by weight of isooctyl acrylate/isobornyl acrylate/acrylic acid, 0.08 wt. % 1-6-hexanediol diacrylate and 0.20 wt. % IRGACURE 651 (Ciba Specialty) was coated onto a polymeric mirror film as described in Example 2, using a notched bar knife coater. The adhesive was coated with a wet thickness of 50 mils (1250 um) on one side and 40 mils (1000 um) on the other to give a slight wedge. The adhesive coating was covered with a silicone release liner (CP Films T10 2.0 mil polyester release liner) and cured using a low intensity UV lamp for 15 minutes. The adhesive had a refractive index of 1.474 as measured on an Abbe refractometer. A translucent graphic film was then laminated to the adhesive layer opposite the polymeric mirror film (8″×10″ area). A side-emitting LED circuit was pressed into the cured PSA layer and light was easily passed through the entire 10 inches of PSA length and was able to be visibly seen exiting. Light was also extracted perpendicular to the light source and into the translucent graphic.
  • Example D Example 9
  • A flexible acrylic lightguide (0.5 mm thick) designed to extract light in a cellular phone keypad was obtained. The lightguide material is described in US 2007/0191506 A1 (Rajan) and comprised a methacrylate functionalized acrylate oligomer and a polyalkyleneglycol dimethacrylate. A silicone urea PSA layer as described in Example 1 was hand laminated to both top and bottom surfaces of the flexible acrylic lightguide material. A simple side-emitting LED light was injected into the lightguide, and light was extracted along the extraction pattern through the silicone PSA cladding. Light was guided between the cladding and the lightguide, and did not leak through the cladding at any point other than the intended extraction points.
  • Example E Example 10
  • An adhesive composition formulated with 90/10 isooctyl acrylate/acrylic acid, 0.3 wt % hexanediol diacrylate and 0.2 wt % IRGACURE 651 photoinitiator (Ciba Specialty) was coated onto a mirror film which had 2 ribbons of side-emitting light emitting diodes (LEDs) attached 9 inches apart (with double stick adhesive). The adhesive composition was coated using a notched bar knife coater and covered with a silicone release liner (CP Films T10 2.0 mil polyester release liner). The adhesive composition was cured using a low intensity UV lamp for 15 minutes. The adhesive composition was coated at a wet thickness of 70 mils to completely encapsulate the LED ribbons. The adhesive had a refractive index of 1.474 (as measured on an Abbe refractometer). The adhesive was removed from the ribbons at a connection point so that the LEDs could be powered. An extractor layer having an extractor pattern of dots printed on a clear 5 mil PET was laminated to the light guide (9″×9″ area) with the embedded LED ribbons. A diffuse layer of white PET film was then placed on top of the extractor layer, and finally a vinyl graphic film was placed on top of this (image printed on vinyl film). The encapsulated side emitting LEDs were powered and light was easily passed through the entire 9 inches of PSA length and was able to be visibly seen exiting via the extraction pattern through the vinyl graphic film.

Claims (44)

1. (canceled)
2. (canceled)
3. (canceled)
4. (canceled)
5. (canceled)
6. (canceled)
7. (canceled)
8. An optical device comprising a light source and an optical article, the optical article comprising a viscoelastic lightguide disposed on a substrate, wherein light emitted by the light source enters the viscoelastic lightguide and is transported within the lightguide by total internal reflection.
9. The optical device of claim 8, wherein an interface formed between the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a plurality of features oriented to extract light being transported within the viscoelastic lightguide.
10. The optical device of claim 8, wherein at least about 80% of light being transported within the viscoelastic lightguide is extracted from the lightguide and into the substrate.
11. The optical device of claim 8, wherein at least some of the light being transported within the viscoelastic lightguide is emitted from the substrate.
12. The optical device of claim 8, wherein at least one surface of the substrate comprises a plurality of features oriented to emit light extracted from the viscoelastic lightguide.
13. The optical device of claim 8, wherein at least some of the light being transported within the viscoelastic lightguide is emitted uniformly from the substrate.
14. The optical device of claim 8, wherein at least some of the light being transported within the viscoelastic lightguide is emitted in one or more predetermined directions from the substrate.
15. The optical device of claim 8, wherein at least some of the light being transported within the viscoelastic lightguide is emitted randomly from the substrate.
16. The optical device of claim 8, wherein at least some of the light being transported within the viscoelastic lightguide is emitted in a predetermined shape from the substrate.
17. The optical device of claim 8, wherein at least some of the light being transported within the viscoelastic lightguide is emitted at different intensities from the substrate.
18. The optical device of claim 8, wherein greater than about 50% of light is emitted from the substrate, relative to the amount of light that enters the viscoelastic lightguide.
19. The optical device of claim 8, wherein:
the viscoelastic lightguide comprises a (meth)acrylic pressure sensitive adhesive, the (meth)acrylic pressure sensitive adhesive comprising
a first monomer comprising a monoethylenically unsaturated alkyl(meth)acrylate monomer, and
a second monomer, wherein a homopolymer of the second monomer has a Tg of at least about 10° C.
20. The optical device of claim 8, wherein the substrate comprises a silicone pressure sensitive adhesive.
21. The optical device of claim 8, wherein the substrate comprises a stretch releasable pressure sensitive adhesive.
22. (canceled)
23. The optical device of claim 8, wherein the substrate comprises an imaged polymeric film.
24. The optical device of claim 8, wherein the optical article has a light transmittance of from about 90 to about 100% and a haze value of from about 0.01 to less than about 5%.
25. The optical device of claim 8, wherein the substrate comprises a reflector.
26. The optical device of claim 8, wherein the substrate comprises a release liner.
27. (canceled)
28. The optical device of claim 8, wherein the first substrate comprises regions that extract light from the viscoelastic layer, and regions that do not.
29. An optical device comprising a light source and an optical article, the optical article comprising a viscoelastic lightguide disposed between first and second substrates, wherein light emitted by the light source enters the viscoelastic lightguide and is transported within the lightguide by total internal reflection.
30. The optical device of claim 29, comprising a first interface formed between the viscoelastic lightguide and the first substrate and a second interface formed between the viscoelastic lightguide and the second substrate, wherein the first and second interfaces each comprise a plurality of features oriented to extract light being transported within the viscoelastic lightguide.
31. The optical device of claim 29, wherein at least about 80% of light being transported within the viscoelastic lightguide is extracted from the lightguide and into the first and second substrates.
32. The optical device of claim 29, wherein at least some of the light being transported within the viscoelastic lightguide is emitted from the first and second substrates.
33. The optical device of claim 29, wherein greater than about 50% of light is emitted from the first and second substrates, relative to the amount of light that enters the viscoelastic lightguide.
34. (canceled)
35. (canceled)
36. (canceled)
37. The optical device of claim 29, wherein the first substrate comprises an imaged polymeric film, and the second substrate comprises a reflector.
38. (canceled)
39. The optical device of claim 29, wherein the optical article has a light transmittance of from about 90 to about 100% and a haze value of from about 0.01 to less than about 5%.
40. A sign or marking comprising the optical article of claim 1.
41. A display device comprising a display panel and the optical article of claim 1.
42. A keypad assembly comprising a one or more keys and the optical article of claim 1.
43. A tail light assembly suitable for use with a vehicle, the tail light assembly comprising a housing, a transparent cover and the optical device of claim 1.
44. An illumination device comprising a housing, a light emitting layer and the optical device of claim 1.
US13/003,208 2008-07-10 2009-06-03 Viscoelastic lightguide Abandoned US20110176325A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US13/003,208 US20110176325A1 (en) 2008-07-10 2009-06-03 Viscoelastic lightguide

Applications Claiming Priority (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US7963908P 2008-07-10 2008-07-10
US11486508P 2008-11-14 2008-11-14
US16997309P 2009-04-16 2009-04-16
PCT/US2009/046097 WO2010005655A2 (en) 2008-07-10 2009-06-03 Viscoelastic lightguide
US13/003,208 US20110176325A1 (en) 2008-07-10 2009-06-03 Viscoelastic lightguide

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2009/046097 A-371-Of-International WO2010005655A2 (en) 2008-07-10 2009-06-03 Viscoelastic lightguide

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/438,550 Continuation US10228507B2 (en) 2008-07-10 2017-02-21 Light source and optical article including viscoelastic lightguide disposed on a substrate

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20110176325A1 true US20110176325A1 (en) 2011-07-21

Family

ID=41507646

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/003,208 Abandoned US20110176325A1 (en) 2008-07-10 2009-06-03 Viscoelastic lightguide
US15/438,550 Expired - Fee Related US10228507B2 (en) 2008-07-10 2017-02-21 Light source and optical article including viscoelastic lightguide disposed on a substrate

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/438,550 Expired - Fee Related US10228507B2 (en) 2008-07-10 2017-02-21 Light source and optical article including viscoelastic lightguide disposed on a substrate

Country Status (6)

Country Link
US (2) US20110176325A1 (en)
EP (1) EP2313800A4 (en)
JP (1) JP5457447B2 (en)
KR (2) KR20160105527A (en)
CN (1) CN102124384B (en)
WO (1) WO2010005655A2 (en)

Cited By (66)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20100214786A1 (en) * 2007-10-09 2010-08-26 Nichol Anthony J Light coupling into illuminated films
US20110122494A1 (en) * 2008-07-10 2011-05-26 Sherman Audrey A Retroreflective articles and devices having viscoelastic lightguide
US20110227487A1 (en) * 2007-10-09 2011-09-22 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Light emitting display with light mixing within a film
US20120081637A1 (en) * 2010-09-30 2012-04-05 Global Lighting Technologies Inc. Backlight module and liquid crystal display
US20120110881A1 (en) * 2010-11-05 2012-05-10 Sung Ku Kang Display device
US8328403B1 (en) 2012-03-21 2012-12-11 Morgan Solar Inc. Light guide illumination devices
NL2007980C2 (en) * 2011-12-16 2013-06-18 Dqm B V Nederland Device and method to illuminate objects.
US8557378B2 (en) 2008-12-31 2013-10-15 3M Innovative Properties Company Stretch releasable adhesive tape
US8651720B2 (en) 2008-07-10 2014-02-18 3M Innovative Properties Company Retroreflective articles and devices having viscoelastic lightguide
WO2014078188A1 (en) 2012-11-13 2014-05-22 3M Innovative Properties Company Optical stack including light extraction layer and polymer dispersed liquid crystal layer
US8758237B2 (en) 2009-08-21 2014-06-24 3M Innovative Properties Company Methods and products for illuminating tissue
US8764262B2 (en) 2009-01-26 2014-07-01 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Illumination via flexible thin films
US8777473B2 (en) 2010-12-17 2014-07-15 3M Innovative Properties Company Light device
US8877125B2 (en) 2009-06-30 2014-11-04 3M Innovative Properties Company Light-activated antimicrobial articles and methods of use
US8885995B2 (en) 2011-02-07 2014-11-11 Morgan Solar Inc. Light-guide solar energy concentrator
US8905610B2 (en) 2009-01-26 2014-12-09 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Light emitting device comprising a lightguide film
US20140360578A1 (en) * 2011-05-13 2014-12-11 Anthony J. Nichol Solar energy system including a lightguide film
US8917962B1 (en) 2009-06-24 2014-12-23 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Method of manufacturing a light input coupler and lightguide
US9028123B2 (en) 2010-04-16 2015-05-12 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Display illumination device with a film-based lightguide having stacked incident surfaces
US9070312B2 (en) 2013-11-05 2015-06-30 3M Innovative Properties Company Hybrid self illuminated and actively back lit signage for printed graphics
US9103956B2 (en) 2010-07-28 2015-08-11 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Light emitting device with optical redundancy
US9110200B2 (en) 2010-04-16 2015-08-18 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Illumination device comprising a film-based lightguide
US9146342B2 (en) 2010-01-13 2015-09-29 3M Innovative Properties Company Illumination device having viscoelastic lightguide
US20150309238A1 (en) * 2014-01-26 2015-10-29 Beijing Boe Optoelectronics Technology Co., Ltd. A backlight module and a display device
US20150370000A1 (en) * 2013-03-15 2015-12-24 Cree, Inc. Optical Element and Method of Forming an Optical Element
US9239417B2 (en) 2010-02-10 2016-01-19 3M Innovative Properties Company Illumination device having viscoelastic layer
US20160052392A1 (en) * 2013-04-11 2016-02-25 Denso Corporation Vehicle display device
US20160060955A1 (en) * 2014-08-27 2016-03-03 Yin-An Hsieh Retractable light-diffusing module and light-diffusing structure thereof
US9285531B2 (en) 2008-08-08 2016-03-15 3M Innovative Properties Company Lightguide having a viscoelastic layer for managing light
US9566751B1 (en) 2013-03-12 2017-02-14 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Methods of forming film-based lightguides
US9645304B2 (en) 2011-03-09 2017-05-09 Flex Lighting Ii Llc Directional front illuminating device comprising a film based lightguide with high optical clarity in the light emitting region
US9690032B1 (en) 2013-03-12 2017-06-27 Flex Lighting Ii Llc Lightguide including a film with one or more bends
WO2017147229A1 (en) 2016-02-24 2017-08-31 3M Innovative Properties Company Modification of siloxane polyoxamide copolymers with ultraviolet light
US9862124B2 (en) 2014-07-18 2018-01-09 3M Innovative Properties Company Multilayer optical adhesives and methods of making same
US20180031754A1 (en) * 2015-12-22 2018-02-01 Wuhan China Star Optoelectronics Technology Co., Ltd. Light Guide Plate, Backlight Module And Liquid Crystal Display
US9904001B2 (en) 2014-03-18 2018-02-27 3M Innovative Properties Company Marketing strip with viscoelastic lightguide
US10080555B2 (en) 2009-08-21 2018-09-25 3M Innovative Properties Company Methods and products for reducing tissue trauma using water-absorbing stress-distributing materials
US10092366B2 (en) 2009-08-21 2018-10-09 3M Innovative Properties Company Products for reducing tissue trauma using water-resistant stress-distributing materials
US20180356211A1 (en) * 2014-03-20 2018-12-13 3M Innovative Properties Company Sheet and structural deformation-evaluating article
US10495795B2 (en) 2014-05-23 2019-12-03 Eyesafe, Llc Light emission reducing compounds for electronic devices
US10642087B2 (en) 2014-05-23 2020-05-05 Eyesafe, Llc Light emission reducing compounds for electronic devices
WO2020123539A1 (en) * 2018-12-11 2020-06-18 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Front illumination lightguide with a diffusely reflective release liner
US10737110B2 (en) 2011-11-09 2020-08-11 John Stephan Light therapy apparatus
US20200262343A1 (en) * 2016-11-09 2020-08-20 Lisa Dräxlmaier GmbH Optical Conductor and Lighting System
US20210024196A1 (en) * 2019-07-25 2021-01-28 Gulfstream Aerospace Corporation Aircraft, interior panels for aircfraft, and methods for making interior panels
US10955697B2 (en) 2018-11-28 2021-03-23 Eyesafe Inc. Light emission modification
US10965854B2 (en) * 2017-03-06 2021-03-30 Gelsight, Inc. Surface topography measurement systems
US10971660B2 (en) 2019-08-09 2021-04-06 Eyesafe Inc. White LED light source and method of making same
US10974644B2 (en) * 2016-09-19 2021-04-13 Lear Corporation Vehicle seat including illuminated feature
US20210148538A1 (en) * 2019-11-19 2021-05-20 GM Global Technology Operations LLC Light bar for an exterior lighting assembly
CN113272693A (en) * 2018-08-30 2021-08-17 阿祖莫公司 Film-based front light with angularly variable diffuser film
US11126033B2 (en) 2018-11-28 2021-09-21 Eyesafe Inc. Backlight unit with emission modification
US11229499B2 (en) 2012-09-24 2022-01-25 Invuity, Inc. Methods and apparatus for controlling optical properties of light
US20220033689A1 (en) * 2018-09-28 2022-02-03 Nitto Denko Corporation Double-sided adhesive layer-equipped optical laminate
US20220113455A1 (en) * 2020-10-13 2022-04-14 Lacks Enterprises, Inc. Decorative clear or translucent panel, trim, or lens with texture on opposite sides
WO2022098871A1 (en) * 2020-11-05 2022-05-12 Berry Global, Inc. Multilayer film
US11416074B1 (en) 2019-01-11 2022-08-16 Apple Inc. Electronic devices having flexible light guides
US11442213B2 (en) 2013-03-12 2022-09-13 Azumo, Inc. Film-based lightguide with extended coupling lightguide region
US11458329B2 (en) 2016-07-27 2022-10-04 Z2020, Llc Componentry and devices for light therapy delivery and methods related thereto
US11513274B2 (en) 2019-08-01 2022-11-29 Azumo, Inc. Lightguide with a light input edge between lateral edges of a folded strip
US20220404539A1 (en) * 2021-06-18 2022-12-22 Hella Saturnus Slovenija d.o.o. Illuminated cover for electromagnetic transmitter and receiver
WO2023022526A1 (en) * 2021-08-19 2023-02-23 엘지이노텍 주식회사 Optical member, lighting device and vehicle lamp having same
US11592701B2 (en) 2018-11-28 2023-02-28 Eyesafe Inc. Backlight unit with emission modification
US11708510B2 (en) * 2016-01-15 2023-07-25 3M Innovative Properties Company Optical adhesive
US11810532B2 (en) 2018-11-28 2023-11-07 Eyesafe Inc. Systems for monitoring and regulating harmful blue light exposure from digital devices
US11891549B2 (en) 2018-09-28 2024-02-06 Nitto Denko Corporation Double-sided adhesive layer-equipped optical laminate

Families Citing this family (33)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9480760B2 (en) 2009-06-25 2016-11-01 3M Innovative Properties Company Light-activated antimicrobial article and method of use
KR20120102062A (en) 2009-10-30 2012-09-17 쓰리엠 이노베이티브 프로퍼티즈 컴파니 Illumination device having remotely powered lightguide
KR101028210B1 (en) * 2010-03-26 2011-04-11 엘지이노텍 주식회사 Light guide plate and backlight unit having the same
CN101852949B (en) 2010-04-23 2011-07-13 上海凯鑫森产业投资控股有限公司 Micro-molded slice for backlight module
US20130105073A1 (en) 2010-06-29 2013-05-02 3M Innovative Properties Company Method of applying window film
EP2588699A1 (en) 2010-06-29 2013-05-08 3M Innovative Properties Company Method of applying window film
EP2628035A1 (en) 2010-10-11 2013-08-21 3M Innovative Properties Company Illumination device having viscoelastic lightguide
KR101877593B1 (en) 2011-02-25 2018-07-12 쓰리엠 이노베이티브 프로퍼티즈 컴파니 Front-lit reflective display device
WO2012116215A1 (en) 2011-02-25 2012-08-30 3M Innovative Properties Company Illumination article and device for front-lighting reflective scattering element
WO2012116199A1 (en) 2011-02-25 2012-08-30 3M Innovative Properties Company Variable index light extraction layer and method of illuminating with same
WO2012158414A1 (en) 2011-05-13 2012-11-22 3M Innovative Properties Company Back-lit transmissive display having variable index light extraction layer
CN104204869B (en) * 2012-04-05 2016-09-07 日本复合材料株式会社 Lamp reflector moulding material and products formed
JP6087525B2 (en) * 2012-07-05 2017-03-01 株式会社小糸製作所 Vehicle lighting
US10139550B2 (en) 2012-08-24 2018-11-27 3M Innovative Properties Company Variable index light extraction layer and method of making the same
KR101775802B1 (en) * 2012-10-26 2017-09-06 미쯔비시 케미컬 주식회사 Light-guiding body, light-guiding body fabrication method, optical shutter, and planar light source device
JPWO2014084352A1 (en) * 2012-11-30 2017-01-05 リンテック株式会社 Adhesive composition, adhesive sheet, electronic device and method for producing the same
BR112015014122A2 (en) 2012-12-14 2017-07-11 3M Innovative Properties Co Polymerization method of ethylenically unsaturated materials using ionizing radiation
KR20150095811A (en) 2012-12-14 2015-08-21 쓰리엠 이노베이티브 프로퍼티즈 캄파니 Method of making packaged viscoelastic compositions by polymerizing ethylenically-unsaturated materials using ionizing radiation
US9261641B2 (en) * 2013-03-25 2016-02-16 3M Innovative Properties Company Dual-sided film with compound prisms
US9519096B2 (en) 2013-12-23 2016-12-13 3M Innovative Properties Company Pressure sensitive adhesive light guides
US10108011B2 (en) * 2015-01-20 2018-10-23 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Microsphere spaced waveguide display
US20160311182A1 (en) 2015-04-21 2016-10-27 3M Innovative Properties Company Use of optically clear adhesives as skins to deliver flowable hot melt liquid optically clear adhesives
KR101684117B1 (en) 2015-05-27 2016-12-07 현대자동차주식회사 Mood lamp for vehicle
US9841548B2 (en) * 2015-06-30 2017-12-12 Apple Inc. Electronic devices with soft input-output components
KR101833998B1 (en) 2016-09-21 2018-03-08 유트로닉스주식회사 Assembly for lighting using light guide film
DE102018207071B4 (en) * 2018-05-07 2023-10-05 Volkswagen Aktiengesellschaft Control and/or display element for a motor vehicle
KR102031800B1 (en) * 2018-06-01 2019-10-14 동우 화인켐 주식회사 Light guide film, back light unit and liquid crystal display apparatus comprising the same
TWI673743B (en) * 2018-08-10 2019-10-01 孫仁文 Mechanical keyboard structure improvement
DE102019207066B4 (en) 2019-05-15 2022-02-17 Volkswagen Aktiengesellschaft Operating device for a motor vehicle and method for producing the operating device
KR102286935B1 (en) * 2020-01-30 2021-08-06 에스케이씨 주식회사 Films, manufacturing methods of the films, cover films and multi-layered electronic devices
WO2021153914A1 (en) * 2020-01-30 2021-08-05 에스케이씨 주식회사 Film, film manufacturing method, cover film, and multilayer electronic equipment
KR20210101771A (en) * 2020-02-11 2021-08-19 코닝 인코포레이티드 Shelf lighting device
WO2024048949A1 (en) * 2022-09-02 2024-03-07 에스케이마이크로웍스 주식회사 Method for manufacturing composite film and composite film

Citations (94)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2440584A (en) * 1944-06-19 1948-04-27 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Lenticular reflex reflector sheet and method of making the same
US2736721A (en) * 1952-10-08 1956-02-28 Optionally
US3718712A (en) * 1971-03-01 1973-02-27 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Pressure-sensitive adhesives based on cyclic terpene urethane resin
US4082426A (en) * 1976-11-26 1978-04-04 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Retroreflective sheeting with retroreflective markings
US4310509A (en) * 1979-07-31 1982-01-12 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Pressure-sensitive adhesive having a broad spectrum antimicrobial therein
US4584192A (en) * 1984-06-04 1986-04-22 Minnesota Mining & Manufacturing Company Film-forming composition containing an antimicrobial agent and methods of use
US4737559A (en) * 1986-05-19 1988-04-12 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Co. Pressure-sensitive adhesive crosslinked by copolymerizable aromatic ketone monomers
US4808471A (en) * 1985-03-01 1989-02-28 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Flat transparent top coat for retroreflective sheeting
US5506279A (en) * 1993-10-13 1996-04-09 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Acrylamido functional disubstituted acetyl aryl ketone photoinitiators
US5510171A (en) * 1995-01-19 1996-04-23 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Durable security laminate with hologram
US5707130A (en) * 1995-12-21 1998-01-13 Reitter & Schefenacker Gmbh & Co. Kg Taillight for vehicles, especially for motor vehicles
US5738642A (en) * 1993-03-22 1998-04-14 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Carrier delivered dressing and method of manufacture
US5867316A (en) * 1996-02-29 1999-02-02 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Multilayer film having a continuous and disperse phase
US5882774A (en) * 1993-12-21 1999-03-16 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Optical film
US6033604A (en) * 1998-12-02 2000-03-07 3M Innovative Properties Company Method for molding light extraction structures onto a light guide
US6036340A (en) * 1998-03-03 2000-03-14 Ford Global Technologies, Inc. Dimpled manifold optical element for a vehicle lighting system
US6049649A (en) * 1996-03-28 2000-04-11 Enplas Corporation Surface light source device of side-light type
US6179948B1 (en) * 1998-01-13 2001-01-30 3M Innovative Properties Company Optical film and process for manufacture thereof
US6196704B1 (en) * 1998-04-25 2001-03-06 Reitter & Schefenacker Gmbh Light, especially tail light, for a motor vehicle
US6216699B1 (en) * 1996-06-12 2001-04-17 Medical Concepts Development, Inc. Antimicrobial containing solventless hot melt adhesive composition
US6352761B1 (en) * 1998-01-13 2002-03-05 3M Innovative Properties Company Modified copolyesters and improved multilayer reflective films
US6352359B1 (en) * 1998-08-25 2002-03-05 Physical Optics Corporation Vehicle light assembly including a diffuser surface structure
US6368699B1 (en) * 1995-06-26 2002-04-09 3M Innovative Properties Company Multilayer polymer film with additional coatings or layers
US6367941B2 (en) * 1999-02-24 2002-04-09 3M Innovative Properties Company Illumination device for producing predetermined intensity patterns
US6367950B1 (en) * 1998-08-27 2002-04-09 Stanley Electric Co., Ltd. Vehicle lamp fixture and method of use
US6379016B1 (en) * 2000-02-16 2002-04-30 3M Innovative Properties Company Light guide with extraction structures
US20030034445A1 (en) * 2001-08-15 2003-02-20 Boyd Gary T. Light guide for use with backlit display
US6523976B1 (en) * 1996-06-13 2003-02-25 Gentex Corporation Led assembly
US6530683B1 (en) * 1999-08-23 2003-03-11 Ichikoh Industries, Ltd. Vehicle lighting device using led light source
US6672746B2 (en) * 2001-08-30 2004-01-06 Koito Manufacturing Co., Ltd. Led-type vehicular lamp
US6722777B2 (en) * 2001-10-05 2004-04-20 Schefenacker Vision Systems Germany Gmbh & Co. Kg Reflector for a light assembly, such as a taillight, a headlight, or an interior light, of a motor vehicle
US6845212B2 (en) * 1999-10-08 2005-01-18 3M Innovative Properties Company Optical element having programmed optical structures
US6848820B2 (en) * 2002-03-15 2005-02-01 Koito Manufacturing Co., Ltd. Vehicular lamp employing led light sources
US6851839B2 (en) * 2001-03-27 2005-02-08 Meridian Automotive Systems, Inc. Vehicular lamp assembly with a simplified structure and CHMSL and tail lamp incorporating the same
US6851843B2 (en) * 2001-01-18 2005-02-08 Reitter & Schefenacker Gmbh & Co. Kg Light assembly, especially signal light, for motor vehicles
US6855386B1 (en) * 1999-03-19 2005-02-15 3M Innovative Properties Company Wet surface adhesives
US20050052750A1 (en) * 2003-09-09 2005-03-10 King Vincent W. Microreplicated article
US20050058821A1 (en) * 2003-09-12 2005-03-17 3M Innovative Properties Company Microporous PVDF films and method of manufacturing
US20050070976A1 (en) * 2001-11-17 2005-03-31 Samuel Ifor David William Therapeutic light-emitting device
US20060002126A1 (en) * 2004-06-24 2006-01-05 Koito Manufacturing Co., Ltd. Vehicular lamp
US6991695B2 (en) * 2002-05-21 2006-01-31 3M Innovative Properties Company Method for subdividing multilayer optical film cleanly and rapidly
US6994461B2 (en) * 2002-07-19 2006-02-07 Pervaiz Lodhie LED lamp for vehicle signal light
US20060028829A1 (en) * 2004-08-09 2006-02-09 Koito Manufacturing Co., Ltd. Vehicular marker lamp
US20060035039A1 (en) * 2004-08-12 2006-02-16 3M Innovative Properties Company Silver-releasing articles and methods of manufacture
US20060034094A1 (en) * 2004-08-11 2006-02-16 Koito Manufacturing Co., Ltd. Vehicular marker lamp
US7005394B1 (en) * 1998-07-10 2006-02-28 3M Innovative Properties Company Tackified thermoplastic-epoxy pressure sensitive adhesives
US20060044825A1 (en) * 2002-12-06 2006-03-02 Sl Lcd Co., Ltd Lamp for vehicle
US20060056166A1 (en) * 2004-09-09 2006-03-16 Yeo Terence E Enhanced LCD backlight
US7018061B2 (en) * 2003-04-25 2006-03-28 Hon Hai Precision Ind. Co., Ltd. Backlight module and light guide plate thereof
US7030203B2 (en) * 2001-09-28 2006-04-18 3M Innovative Properties Company Water-in-oil emulsions with ethylene oxide groups, compositions, and methods
US7029152B1 (en) * 2004-01-23 2006-04-18 Kuhl Reflections, Inc. Vehicular lighting arrangement with infinity effect
US20060084780A1 (en) * 2004-10-18 2006-04-20 Hebrink Timothy J Modified copolyesters and optical films including modified copolyesters
US7160010B1 (en) * 2005-11-15 2007-01-09 Visteon Global Technologies, Inc. Light manifold for automotive light module
US20070006493A1 (en) * 2003-05-12 2007-01-11 Arnold Eberwein Illuminated license plate for vehicles and vehicle provided with the same
US7165959B2 (en) * 2003-09-09 2007-01-23 3M Innovative Properties Company Apparatus and method for producing two-sided patterned webs in registration
US7166686B2 (en) * 2000-06-28 2007-01-23 3M Innovative Properties Company High refractive index pressure-sensitive adhesives
US20070026167A1 (en) * 2001-12-14 2007-02-01 Bourdelais Robert P Microvoided light diffuser containing optical contact layer
US20070031641A1 (en) * 2003-09-05 2007-02-08 3M Innovative Properties Company License plate for back illumination and method for making same
US7182494B2 (en) * 2003-09-04 2007-02-27 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. Rear lamp unit for vehicle
US20070047080A1 (en) * 2005-08-31 2007-03-01 3M Innovative Properties Company Methods of producing multilayer reflective polarizer
US20070081254A1 (en) * 2005-10-11 2007-04-12 3M Innovative Properties Company Methods of forming sheeting with a composite image that floats and sheeting with a composite image that floats
US7204628B2 (en) * 2003-08-05 2007-04-17 Koito Manufacturing Co., Ltd. Lighting device for vehicle
US20070243844A1 (en) * 2006-04-12 2007-10-18 Nokia Corporation Flexible optical illumination system
US7315418B2 (en) * 2005-03-31 2008-01-01 3M Innovative Properties Company Polarizing beam splitter assembly having reduced stress
US7318663B2 (en) * 2003-07-02 2008-01-15 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Vehicle with lighting system for tail lights and license plate comprising light emitting diodes and optical waveguide
US7322725B2 (en) * 2005-02-14 2008-01-29 Yamaha Hatsudoki Kabushiki Kaisha Light device for vehicle and vehicle provided with same
US7326448B2 (en) * 2005-02-17 2008-02-05 3M Innovative Properties Company Polymerizable oligomeric urethane compositions comprising nanoparticles
US7336422B2 (en) * 2000-02-22 2008-02-26 3M Innovative Properties Company Sheeting with composite image that floats
US20080049446A1 (en) * 2006-08-25 2008-02-28 Philips Lumileds Lighting Company, Llc Thin Backlight With Flipped Light Emitting Diode
US20080049438A1 (en) * 2006-08-22 2008-02-28 Philips Lumileds Lighting Company, Llc LED Assembly for Rear Lamps in an Automobile
US20080053800A1 (en) * 2006-08-30 2008-03-06 3M Innovative Properties Company Keypad light guide
US7341364B2 (en) * 2004-10-12 2008-03-11 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. Tail lamp structure for vehicles
US7344284B2 (en) * 2001-01-23 2008-03-18 Donnelly Corporation Lighting system for a vehicle, with high-intensity power LED
US7347601B2 (en) * 2004-06-09 2008-03-25 Ichikoh Industries, Ltd. Vehicle lamp unit
US7347600B2 (en) * 2003-10-31 2008-03-25 Valeo Vision Lighting module for a vehicle headlight
US20080074901A1 (en) * 2006-09-21 2008-03-27 3M Innovative Properties Company Led backlight
US20080080199A1 (en) * 2006-09-29 2008-04-03 Sassoon Charles I Combination LED lamp
US20080084518A1 (en) * 2006-10-06 2008-04-10 3M Innovative Properties Company Stereoscopic 3d liquid crystal display apparatus with structured light guide surface
US7361474B2 (en) * 2003-02-24 2008-04-22 United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Veterans Affairs Serum macrophage migration inhibitory factor (MIF) as marker for prostate cancer
US7498535B2 (en) * 2006-10-30 2009-03-03 Square D Company Circuit breaker operator
US20090067151A1 (en) * 2007-09-06 2009-03-12 3M Innovative Properties Company Light guide with flexibility and durability
US20090105437A1 (en) * 2007-10-19 2009-04-23 3M Innovative Properties Company High refractive index pressure-sensitive adhesives
US20100026727A1 (en) * 2006-10-06 2010-02-04 Qualcomm Mems Technologies, Inc. Optical loss structure integrated in an illumination apparatus
US20100046930A1 (en) * 2008-08-22 2010-02-25 Panasonic Corporation Recording and playback apparatus
US20100048804A1 (en) * 2007-10-19 2010-02-25 3M Innovative Properties Company High refractive index pressure-sensitive adhesives
US20100103521A1 (en) * 2008-10-22 2010-04-29 3M Innovative Properties Company Retroreflective sheeting
US20110020640A1 (en) * 2008-01-11 2011-01-27 Sherman Audrey A Stretch releasing optically clear pressure sensitive adhesive
US20110039099A1 (en) * 2008-02-21 2011-02-17 Sherman Audrey A Temporarily repositionable pressure sensitive adhesive blends
US20110064916A1 (en) * 2008-04-22 2011-03-17 Sherman Audrey A Method of making adhesive article
US20120026431A1 (en) * 2009-04-15 2012-02-02 Coggio William D Lightguide with optical film containing voids and blacklight for display system
US20120027945A1 (en) * 2009-04-15 2012-02-02 William Blake Kolb Process and apparatus for a nonovoided article
US20120038990A1 (en) * 2009-04-15 2012-02-16 Encai Hao Optical film
US20120039089A1 (en) * 2009-04-15 2012-02-16 3M Innovative Properties Company Optical construction and display system incorporating same
US20120038850A1 (en) * 2009-04-15 2012-02-16 3M Innovative Properties Company Optical film for preventing optical coupling

Family Cites Families (258)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
NO134790C (en) 1968-07-09 1984-03-22 Smith & Nephew Kleber ,; PRESSURE SENSITIVE, WATERPUME-PERMEABLE PRODUCT FOR SKIN USE BY HUMANS.
US4166147A (en) 1973-04-16 1979-08-28 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Shaped and fired articles of tio2
IE51473B1 (en) 1980-08-13 1986-12-24 Smith & Nephew Ass Polymer blend films,their preparation and use
US4418110A (en) 1982-06-21 1983-11-29 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Vapor-permeable retroreflective sheeting
US4542012A (en) 1982-07-02 1985-09-17 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Film-forming composition containing an antimicrobial agent and methods
US4554324A (en) 1982-09-16 1985-11-19 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Co. Acrylate copolymer pressure-sensitive adhesive composition and sheet materials coated therewith
US5064272A (en) 1985-11-18 1991-11-12 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Encapsulated-lens retroreflective sheeting and method of making
US4678695A (en) 1985-12-23 1987-07-07 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Encapsulated flattop retroreflective sheeting and method for producing the same
US5214119A (en) 1986-06-20 1993-05-25 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Block copolymer, method of making the same, dimaine precursors of the same, method of making such diamines and end products comprising the block copolymer
US4874228A (en) 1987-03-24 1989-10-17 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Back-lit display
US5066098A (en) 1987-05-15 1991-11-19 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Cellular encapsulated-lens high whiteness retroreflective sheeting with flexible cover sheet
CA1287458C (en) 1987-05-15 1991-08-13 Roger R. Kult Cellular, encapsulated-lens high whiteness retroreflective sheeting with flexible cover sheet
US4929866A (en) 1987-11-17 1990-05-29 Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd. Light emitting diode lamp
US4935665A (en) 1987-12-24 1990-06-19 Mitsubishi Cable Industries Ltd. Light emitting diode lamp
US5054885A (en) 1988-10-11 1991-10-08 Minnesota Mining And Manfuacturing Company Light fixture including a partially collimated beam of light and reflective prisms having peaks lying on a curved surface
DE3929955A1 (en) 1989-09-08 1991-03-14 Inotec Gmbh Ges Fuer Innovativ LIGHT SPOTLIGHTS
US5750134A (en) 1989-11-03 1998-05-12 Riker Laboratories, Inc. Bioadhesive composition and patch
US5270358A (en) 1989-12-28 1993-12-14 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Composite of a disperesed gel in an adhesive matrix
CZ14595A3 (en) 1992-07-22 1995-10-18 Unilever Nv Method of liquidation of surface unbound microorganisms
CA2104046C (en) 1992-10-05 1998-09-15 Yen-Lane Chen Adhesive compositions, wound dressings and methods
US5471371A (en) 1993-01-08 1995-11-28 Ford Motor Company High efficiency illuminator
JPH06349305A (en) 1993-06-04 1994-12-22 Stanley Electric Co Ltd Led lighting fixture for vehicle
US5450235A (en) 1993-10-20 1995-09-12 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Flexible cube-corner retroreflective sheeting
CA2178325A1 (en) 1993-12-21 1995-06-29 Andrew J. Ouderkirk Reflective polarizer with brightness enhancement
KR100344364B1 (en) 1993-12-21 2002-11-30 미네소타 마이닝 앤드 매뉴팩춰링 캄파니 Optical Polarizers and Display Devices
US5828488A (en) 1993-12-21 1998-10-27 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Co. Reflective polarizer display
EP0962807B1 (en) 1993-12-21 2008-12-03 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Multilayered optical film
EP0736196B1 (en) 1993-12-21 2002-07-17 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Reflective polarizer display
IT1267221B1 (en) 1994-04-20 1997-01-28 Seima Italiana Spa HEADLIGHT FOR MOTOR VEHICLES WITH LENS REFLECTOR
EP0795137B1 (en) 1994-11-29 1998-08-26 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Transparent decorative article having an etched appearing/prismatic image thereon
JP3670343B2 (en) 1995-06-16 2005-07-13 ミネソタ マイニング アンド マニュファクチャリング カンパニー Retroreflective structure and manufacturing method thereof
EP0835294B1 (en) 1995-06-26 2003-01-29 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Light diffusing adhesive
US5765940A (en) 1995-10-31 1998-06-16 Dialight Corporation LED-illuminated stop/tail lamp assembly
US5905826A (en) 1996-01-24 1999-05-18 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Co. Conspicuity marking system including light guide and retroreflective structure
US5825543A (en) 1996-02-29 1998-10-20 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Diffusely reflecting polarizing element including a first birefringent phase and a second phase
US5784197A (en) 1996-04-01 1998-07-21 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Ultra-flexible retroreflective sheeting with coated back surface
US5803086A (en) 1996-05-16 1998-09-08 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Linerless surgical incise drape
CA2253723C (en) 1996-05-16 2007-01-30 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Surgical incise drape
US6582103B1 (en) 1996-12-12 2003-06-24 Teledyne Lighting And Display Products, Inc. Lighting apparatus
US6473554B1 (en) 1996-12-12 2002-10-29 Teledyne Lighting And Display Products, Inc. Lighting apparatus having low profile
SE515697C2 (en) 1997-02-18 2001-09-24 Ericsson Telefon Ab L M Process for producing an optical fiber wrap film
DE19708295A1 (en) * 1997-02-28 1998-09-10 Nath Guenther Liquid light guide
EP2193754B1 (en) 1997-05-16 2013-07-03 Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company Surgical incise drape
JPH1115415A (en) 1997-06-16 1999-01-22 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Co <3M> Recursively reflecting sheet capable of emitting light by itself and manufacture thereof
EP0890503A1 (en) 1997-07-11 1999-01-13 IMS Industrial Micro System AG Tail light for vehicle
JPH1185073A (en) 1997-09-02 1999-03-30 Sasahara Hideki Display device
DE19739400B4 (en) 1997-09-09 2007-05-03 Busch & Müller KG Vehicle rear light, especially for bicycles
DE19744715C1 (en) 1997-10-10 1999-04-22 Daimler Chrysler Ag Lighting device for the rear of a vehicle
US6083856A (en) 1997-12-01 2000-07-04 3M Innovative Properties Company Acrylate copolymeric fibers
US6808658B2 (en) 1998-01-13 2004-10-26 3M Innovative Properties Company Method for making texture multilayer optical films
BR9906910A (en) 1998-01-13 2000-10-10 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Feeding block for making a multilayer optical film, and process for making a multilayer optical film
US6720387B1 (en) 1998-02-18 2004-04-13 3M Innovative Properties Company Hot-melt adhesive compositions comprising acidic polymer and basic polymer blends
DE19815963A1 (en) 1998-04-09 1999-10-14 Reitter & Schefenacker Gmbh Lights, in particular rear lights for motor vehicles
JPH11343118A (en) 1998-06-01 1999-12-14 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Co <3M> Titanium dioxide film, its production, article having the same, and photochemical cell provided with the same
JP4212153B2 (en) 1998-07-22 2009-01-21 日東樹脂工業株式会社 Combined light source device
US6266476B1 (en) 1998-08-25 2001-07-24 Physical Optics Corporation Optical element having an integral surface diffuser
US6096066A (en) 1998-09-11 2000-08-01 Light Sciences Limited Partnership Conformal patch for administering light therapy to subcutaneous tumors
DE19844715C2 (en) 1998-09-29 2000-12-21 Fer Fahrzeugelektrik Gmbh Vehicle light
US6280480B1 (en) 1998-10-30 2001-08-28 Meridian Automotive Systems, Inc. Indirect illumination taillamp assembly for a vehicle
DE19851174B4 (en) 1998-11-06 2006-04-13 Reitter & Schefenacker Gmbh & Co. Kg Signal light, in particular rear light, of vehicles, preferably motor vehicles
JP3026967B1 (en) 1998-12-18 2000-03-27 スタンレー電気株式会社 Vehicle lighting
US6280822B1 (en) 1999-01-11 2001-08-28 3M Innovative Properties Company Cube corner cavity based retroeflectors with transparent fill material
US6102559A (en) 1999-01-25 2000-08-15 Ford Motor Company Multi-function vehicle taillight system with unitary optic
US7364341B2 (en) 1999-02-23 2008-04-29 Solid State Opto Limited Light redirecting films including non-interlockable optical elements
EP1163307B1 (en) 1999-03-19 2004-06-02 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Wet surface adhesives
JP2000331508A (en) 1999-05-21 2000-11-30 Stanley Electric Co Ltd Led lamp and vehicular lighting fixture using led lamp for light source
US6972813B1 (en) 1999-06-09 2005-12-06 3M Innovative Properties Company Optical laminated bodies, lighting equipment and area luminescence equipment
EP1194496B1 (en) 1999-06-18 2004-11-17 3M Innovative Properties Company Wet-stick adhesives
US7046905B1 (en) 1999-10-08 2006-05-16 3M Innovative Properties Company Blacklight with structured surfaces
US6663978B1 (en) 2000-06-28 2003-12-16 3M Innovative Properties Company High refractive index pressure-sensitive adhesives
US6445866B1 (en) 1999-11-29 2002-09-03 Molex Incorporated Optical interconnection apparatus and method of fabricating same
AU2006500A (en) 1999-12-22 2001-07-03 Wim Hogervorst Tail light with narrow beam
JP4138195B2 (en) 2000-02-04 2008-08-20 スタンレー電気株式会社 Vehicle lighting
US6288842B1 (en) 2000-02-22 2001-09-11 3M Innovative Properties Sheeting with composite image that floats
KR20010091192A (en) 2000-03-13 2001-10-23 손영기 LED rearlamp or roomlamp
US6621973B1 (en) 2000-03-16 2003-09-16 3M Innovative Properties Company Light guide with protective outer sleeve
US6416201B1 (en) 2000-03-31 2002-07-09 3M Innovative Properties Company Illuminated sign with lamp masks for uniform illumination
US6595671B2 (en) 2000-05-10 2003-07-22 Maxime Lefebvre Rugged, waterproof LED array lighting system
US6569521B1 (en) 2000-07-06 2003-05-27 3M Innovative Properties Company Stretch releasing pressure sensitive adhesive tape and articles
EP1352269A2 (en) 2001-01-15 2003-10-15 3M Innovative Properties Company Multilayer infrared reflecting film with high and smooth transmission in visible wavelength region and laminate articles made therefrom
US6623667B2 (en) 2001-02-28 2003-09-23 3M Innovative Properties Company Method for continuous fabrication of structured surface light guides
US6568822B2 (en) 2001-04-06 2003-05-27 3M Innovative Properties Company Linear illumination source
WO2003002163A1 (en) 2001-06-29 2003-01-09 The Procter & Gamble Company Absorbent article
JP2003091250A (en) * 2001-09-18 2003-03-28 Konica Corp Fluorescent display device
US6869981B2 (en) 2001-09-21 2005-03-22 Corning Incorporated Optical fiber coatings with pressure sensitive adhesive characteristics
KR100905100B1 (en) 2001-09-26 2009-06-30 코닌클리케 필립스 일렉트로닉스 엔.브이. Illumination arrangement arranged to receive unpolarized light and emit polarized light, and display system
US7137718B2 (en) 2001-10-31 2006-11-21 3M Innovative Properties Company Automotive lamp
WO2003037504A1 (en) 2001-11-02 2003-05-08 Japan Techno Co., Ltd. Vibratory stirrer for sterilization and sterilizer and sterilization method employing vibratory stirrer
JP2003149642A (en) 2001-11-13 2003-05-21 Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Front light for liquid crystal
EP1453107A4 (en) 2001-11-16 2008-12-03 Toyoda Gosei Kk Light-emitting diode, led light, and light apparatus
TW582511U (en) 2001-12-12 2004-04-01 Chi Mei Optoelectronics Corp Lamp reflecting apparatus used in direct under type backlight module
US7132136B2 (en) 2001-12-14 2006-11-07 Eastman Kodak Company Stacked microvoided light diffuser
JP2006504116A (en) 2001-12-14 2006-02-02 ディジタル・オプティクス・インターナショナル・コーポレイション Uniform lighting system
JP4023777B2 (en) 2001-12-14 2007-12-19 スタンレー電気株式会社 LED lights for vehicles
US7090922B2 (en) 2001-12-18 2006-08-15 3M Innovative Properties Company Silicone priming compositions, articles, and methods
JP2003187613A (en) 2001-12-19 2003-07-04 Koito Mfg Co Ltd Sign lamp for vehicle
US6799880B2 (en) * 2001-12-31 2004-10-05 3M Innovative Properties Company Illumination device
JP4005377B2 (en) 2002-01-31 2007-11-07 本田技研工業株式会社 Vehicle taillight
JP3998999B2 (en) 2002-03-06 2007-10-31 株式会社小糸製作所 Vehicle lighting
US6939936B2 (en) 2002-04-25 2005-09-06 3M Innovative Properties Company Iodine/iodide-containing hot melt coatable adhesive, methods and uses therefor
US6660805B1 (en) 2002-05-16 2003-12-09 Lord Corporation Two-part adhesive: part A-monomer, toughener(s), optional adhesion promotor and reducing agent; part B-epoxy resin
US6858290B2 (en) 2002-05-29 2005-02-22 3M Innovative Properties Company Fluid repellent microporous materials
US6773154B2 (en) 2002-08-21 2004-08-10 North American Lighting, Inc. Automotive lighting device
US6793372B2 (en) 2002-09-03 2004-09-21 Guide Corporation Multiple reflector indirect light source lamp
JP3930021B2 (en) 2002-09-19 2007-06-13 三菱電機株式会社 Display device and electronic apparatus equipped with display device
US7248169B2 (en) 2002-10-08 2007-07-24 Nippon Carbide Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Recursive-reflective display devices
US6896381B2 (en) 2002-10-11 2005-05-24 Light Prescriptions Innovators, Llc Compact folded-optics illumination lens
DE10249113B4 (en) 2002-10-22 2010-04-08 Odelo Gmbh Vehicle lamp, in particular tail lamp, preferably for motor vehicles
JP4175543B2 (en) 2002-11-22 2008-11-05 本田技研工業株式会社 Vehicle tail lamp
TWI321683B (en) 2002-11-29 2010-03-11 Hon Hai Prec Ind Co Ltd Polarized light source system and liquid crystal display using the same
DE10302460A1 (en) 2003-01-23 2004-08-12 Bayerische Motoren Werke Ag Vehicle lamp and method for displaying different signal images of a vehicle lamp
FR2853392B1 (en) 2003-04-04 2006-06-16 Sli Miniature Lighting Sa REAR LIGHT, ESPECIALLY STOP LIGHT FOR MOTOR VEHICLE
US20040219846A1 (en) 2003-05-01 2004-11-04 Federal-Mogul World Wide, Inc. Composite biasable reflective sheet and sleeve
DE60315602T2 (en) 2003-05-12 2008-06-05 3M Innovative Properties Co., St. Paul Luminous license plate and thus equipped motor vehicle
JP4302444B2 (en) 2003-06-24 2009-07-29 本田技研工業株式会社 Tail light structure
US6897771B1 (en) 2003-07-19 2005-05-24 Pervaiz Lodhie Vehicle signal light fixture performing multiple signaling functions using an array of LEDs
US20060216523A1 (en) 2003-08-19 2006-09-28 Shunsuke Takaki Pressure-sensitive adhesive tape and pressure-sensitive adhesive composition for medical adhesive tape
JP2005078938A (en) 2003-08-29 2005-03-24 Ichikoh Ind Ltd Vehicular lighting fixture
EP1512583B2 (en) 2003-09-05 2014-03-05 3M Innovative Properties Company License plate for back illumination and method for making same
US20060285348A1 (en) 2003-09-22 2006-12-21 Valcamp David J Vehicular light assembly
US7052166B2 (en) 2003-09-30 2006-05-30 Osram Sylvania Inc. Light emitting diode optics
JP4402425B2 (en) 2003-10-24 2010-01-20 スタンレー電気株式会社 Vehicle headlamp
JP2007510041A (en) 2003-10-27 2007-04-19 アドヒーシブズ・リサーチ・インコーポレイテッド Poly (alkylene oxide) polymer pressure sensitive adhesive and tape formed therefrom
JP2005158362A (en) 2003-11-21 2005-06-16 Stanley Electric Co Ltd Lighting fixture for vehicle
JP3602123B1 (en) 2003-12-17 2004-12-15 日本光機工業株式会社 Traffic sign device
US7223005B2 (en) 2003-12-23 2007-05-29 Lamb David J Hybrid lightguide backlight
EP1700142A1 (en) 2003-12-30 2006-09-13 3M Innovative Properties Company Color shifting retroreflector and method of making same
JP4300123B2 (en) 2004-01-13 2009-07-22 スタンレー電気株式会社 LED lamp using light guide
GB2410116A (en) 2004-01-17 2005-07-20 Sharp Kk Illumination system and display device
US7249874B2 (en) 2004-01-23 2007-07-31 Kuhl Reflections, Inc. Vehicular lighting arrangement with infinity effect
CN1657816A (en) 2004-02-18 2005-08-24 王长平 LED type vehicle taillight
DE102004011600B4 (en) 2004-03-10 2011-07-28 odelo GmbH, 71409 Tail light of a vehicle
US7086765B2 (en) 2004-03-25 2006-08-08 Guide Corporation LED lamp with light pipe for automotive vehicles
EP1584518B1 (en) 2004-04-07 2007-10-17 3M Innovative Properties Company License plate assembly comprising light source and backlit license plate
JP2005302951A (en) 2004-04-09 2005-10-27 Toshiba Corp Semiconductor device package for power
WO2005100498A1 (en) 2004-04-16 2005-10-27 Riken Technos Corporation Pressure-sensitive adhesive sheet and releasing material
US7565054B2 (en) 2004-04-30 2009-07-21 Oy Modilis Ltd. Ultra thin lighting element
US20050254240A1 (en) 2004-05-12 2005-11-17 Lawrence Duwaine W Multifunction LED taillight
US7997771B2 (en) 2004-06-01 2011-08-16 3M Innovative Properties Company LED array systems
FR2872256B1 (en) 2004-06-24 2008-12-12 Valeo Vision Sa OPTICALLY GUIDED LIGHTING AND / OR SIGNALING DEVICE FOR MOTOR VEHICLE
JP2006030294A (en) 2004-07-12 2006-02-02 Nitto Denko Corp Method for manufacturing flexible optical waveguide
US7128452B2 (en) 2004-07-27 2006-10-31 Lucidity Enterprise Co. Ltd. Automobile compound taillight
US7255920B2 (en) 2004-07-29 2007-08-14 3M Innovative Properties Company (Meth)acrylate block copolymer pressure sensitive adhesives
JP4191658B2 (en) 2004-08-09 2008-12-03 株式会社小糸製作所 Vehicle lighting
JP2006059541A (en) 2004-08-17 2006-03-02 Ichikoh Ind Ltd Light guide and led light source unit equipped with it
WO2006026743A1 (en) 2004-08-31 2006-03-09 Fusion Optix, Inc. Enhanced light diffusing sheet
WO2006032002A1 (en) 2004-09-13 2006-03-23 Fusion Optix, Inc. High contrast optical path corrected screen
TWI242759B (en) 2004-10-19 2005-11-01 Ind Tech Res Inst Apparatus of LED flat light source and signal display
JP4453516B2 (en) 2004-10-22 2010-04-21 凸版印刷株式会社 Lighting device
JP4558450B2 (en) 2004-11-05 2010-10-06 本田技研工業株式会社 Vehicle lighting structure
JP4438722B2 (en) 2004-11-19 2010-03-24 ソニー株式会社 Backlight driving device, backlight driving method, and liquid crystal display device
US7719015B2 (en) 2004-12-09 2010-05-18 3M Innovative Properties Company Type II broadband or polychromatic LED's
US20060148915A1 (en) 2004-12-30 2006-07-06 Floyd Robert M Microporous materials and methods of making
JP2006227140A (en) * 2005-02-16 2006-08-31 Lecip Corp Edge light panel
US7113342B2 (en) 2005-02-24 2006-09-26 Pong & Huang International Co., Ltd. Composite structure for light diffusion
EP1856566A1 (en) 2005-03-09 2007-11-21 3M Innovative Properties Company Microreplicated article with defect-reducing surface
US20060216524A1 (en) 2005-03-23 2006-09-28 3M Innovative Properties Company Perfluoropolyether urethane additives having (meth)acryl groups and hard coats
US7275839B2 (en) 2005-04-05 2007-10-02 Osram Sylvania, Inc. Three color LED bulb
US20060226561A1 (en) 2005-04-08 2006-10-12 3M Innovative Properties Company Heat setting optical films
JP4589168B2 (en) 2005-04-13 2010-12-01 本田技研工業株式会社 Vehicle lamp structure
JP2006318718A (en) 2005-05-11 2006-11-24 Mi Seiko:Kk Led reflection member and its manufacturing method
US20060256572A1 (en) 2005-05-12 2006-11-16 Yu-Chu Lin Taillight socket structure
US7660040B2 (en) 2005-05-17 2010-02-09 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Diffuse reflective article
WO2006125174A2 (en) 2005-05-19 2006-11-23 3M Innovative Properties Company Thin internally illuminated sign
TWI281971B (en) 2005-05-30 2007-06-01 Automotive Res & Testing Ct A reflective LED head light
JP2007001522A (en) 2005-06-27 2007-01-11 Iseki & Co Ltd Door mounting structure for cabin
JP2007017522A (en) * 2005-07-05 2007-01-25 Lintec Corp Resin sheet for manufacturing planar optical waveguide
DE102005037680A1 (en) 2005-08-05 2007-02-15 Karl-Heinz Fischer Signaling unit e.g. tail light, for e.g. lorry, has rectangular housing arranged in central area of rear window, and light emitting diodes that are arranged in form of beemer logos, where diodes serve as illuminant for unit
JP5290755B2 (en) 2005-08-27 2013-09-18 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Lighting assembly and system
DE102006007101A1 (en) 2005-09-12 2007-03-22 Kompled Gmbh & Co. Kg Tail light assembly, especially for commercial vehicles
JP2007114271A (en) 2005-10-18 2007-05-10 Kojinsha:Kk Display device provided with enclosed lens type light-transmissive retroreflection sheet
JP2007123028A (en) 2005-10-27 2007-05-17 Stanley Electric Co Ltd Lighting fixture for vehicle
US7513941B2 (en) 2005-11-14 2009-04-07 3M Innovative Properties Company Pavement marking, reflective elements, and methods of making micospheres
US7560742B2 (en) 2005-11-28 2009-07-14 Magna International Inc. Semiconductor-based lighting systems and lighting system components for automotive use
GB2433637A (en) 2005-12-21 2007-06-27 3M Innovative Properties Co Semi-transparent retroreflective material
GB0602105D0 (en) 2006-02-02 2006-03-15 3M Innovative Properties Co License plate assembly
JP2007207667A (en) 2006-02-03 2007-08-16 Stanley Electric Co Ltd Lighting fixture
KR20070079689A (en) 2006-02-03 2007-08-08 삼성전자주식회사 Backlight assembly and liquid crystal display apparatus having the same
US20070191506A1 (en) 2006-02-13 2007-08-16 3M Innovative Properties Company Curable compositions for optical articles
JP4565654B2 (en) 2006-02-24 2010-10-20 スタンレー電気株式会社 Lamp
US20070223252A1 (en) 2006-03-24 2007-09-27 Junwon Lee Illumination apparatus and film
KR100754686B1 (en) 2006-03-28 2007-09-03 삼성전자주식회사 Keypad assembly
US7611251B2 (en) 2006-04-18 2009-11-03 3M Innovative Properties Company Retroreflective articles comprising olefinic seal films
US7950396B2 (en) 2006-04-28 2011-05-31 Ondine International Holdings Ltd. Treatment for otitis externa
US20090094111A1 (en) 2007-10-09 2009-04-09 Microsoft Corporation Advertising framework for wireless networks
US7241019B1 (en) 2006-05-17 2007-07-10 Lucidity Enterprise Co., Ltd. Reflective rear light for a truck
KR100809447B1 (en) 2006-05-19 2008-03-06 주식회사 케이.디.지 엔지니어링 The bulb of auto signal for using power led
DE102006023873A1 (en) 2006-05-19 2007-11-22 Busch & Müller KG Taillight for a two-wheeler
JP4953717B2 (en) 2006-05-19 2012-06-13 リンテック株式会社 Optical functional film bonding adhesive, optical functional film and method for producing the same
JP4654979B2 (en) 2006-05-30 2011-03-23 市光工業株式会社 Vehicle lighting
US20070279935A1 (en) 2006-05-31 2007-12-06 3M Innovative Properties Company Flexible light guide
US20080232135A1 (en) 2006-05-31 2008-09-25 3M Innovative Properties Company Light guide
JP4529946B2 (en) 2006-06-01 2010-08-25 市光工業株式会社 Vehicle lighting
US7830368B2 (en) 2006-06-06 2010-11-09 3M Innovative Properties Company Keypad with virtual image
JP2008003243A (en) 2006-06-21 2008-01-10 Fujifilm Corp Optical sheet, light source device, and display device
DE102006035503A1 (en) 2006-07-31 2008-02-07 Dr.Ing.H.C. F. Porsche Ag Tail light for vehicle, has illuminating regions for rear, brake and fog rear lights partially overlap each other such that some light emitting diodes are arranged in illuminating regions, where diodes of regions are controlled
EP2049365B1 (en) 2006-08-01 2017-12-13 3M Innovative Properties Company Illumination device
GB0615854D0 (en) 2006-08-10 2006-09-20 3M Innovative Properties Co Light guide for a lighting device
US20100028619A1 (en) 2006-09-11 2010-02-04 3M Innovative Properties Company Card with a tearable security laminate
EP1943551A2 (en) 2006-10-06 2008-07-16 Qualcomm Mems Technologies, Inc. Light guide
US7800825B2 (en) 2006-12-04 2010-09-21 3M Innovative Properties Company User interface including composite images that float
GB0625167D0 (en) 2006-12-18 2007-01-24 3M Innovative Properties Co System for illuminating a license plate
CN201021777Y (en) 2007-02-14 2008-02-13 佛山市国星光电股份有限公司 A novel combined LED car end lamp
JP4228026B2 (en) 2007-02-28 2009-02-25 日東電工株式会社 Backlight system and optical sheet with adhesive
DE102007010755A1 (en) 2007-03-06 2008-10-30 Osram Opto Semiconductors Gmbh Arrangement with a semiconductor chip and a light guide layer
GB0706289D0 (en) 2007-03-30 2007-05-09 3M Innovative Properties Co Illuminated license plate
WO2008127738A1 (en) 2007-04-16 2008-10-23 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Reflective article
KR101432567B1 (en) 2007-04-19 2014-08-21 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 Liquid crystal display device
CN101681053B (en) 2007-05-20 2012-03-21 3M创新有限公司 Recycling backlights with semi-specular components
EP2535766A3 (en) 2007-05-20 2013-05-01 3M Innovative Properties Company Asymmetric reflective film and backlight having a hollow cavity, which recycles the light
US9028108B2 (en) 2007-05-20 2015-05-12 3M Innovative Properties Company Collimating light injectors for edge-lit backlights
EP2487535A1 (en) 2007-05-20 2012-08-15 3M Innovative Properties Company Design parameters for backlights, which have a thin hollow cavity and recycle the light
KR101372849B1 (en) 2007-07-27 2014-03-10 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 Collimating light guide plate, diffusing unit, and display apparatus employing the same
WO2009011684A1 (en) 2007-09-07 2009-01-22 The Government Of The United States Of America, Asrepresented By The Secretary Of The Navy Nanoscale manganese oxide on ultraporous carbon nanoarchitecture
WO2009047933A1 (en) * 2007-10-09 2009-04-16 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Light control layer of backlight, backlight, liquid crystal display, and method of manufacturing light control layer of backlight
BRPI0816636A2 (en) 2007-10-11 2019-04-09 3M Innovative Properties Co microporous membranes having a relatively large average pore size and methods for producing them
KR100932304B1 (en) 2007-10-30 2009-12-16 제일모직주식회사 Light guide plate for backlight unit having an asymmetric prism on the back and liquid crystal display using the same
US8309650B2 (en) 2007-10-30 2012-11-13 3M Innovative Properties Company High refractive index adhesives
US9238762B2 (en) 2007-11-08 2016-01-19 3M Innovative Properties Company Optical adhesive with diffusive properties
US20110001901A1 (en) 2007-12-05 2011-01-06 Solomon Jeffrey L Dual lightguide
TW200928465A (en) 2007-12-18 2009-07-01 Mintek Thin Film Corp Light guide plate and backlight module
JP5400061B2 (en) 2007-12-27 2014-01-29 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Urea pressure sensitive adhesive
EP2252828A1 (en) 2008-02-22 2010-11-24 3M Innovative Properties Company Backlights having selected output light flux distributions and display systems using same
JP5416438B2 (en) 2008-03-11 2014-02-12 株式会社クラレ Light guide made of methacrylic resin composition
TW200938913A (en) 2008-03-13 2009-09-16 Kismart Corp A flat panel display capable of multi-sided viewings and its back light module
US20090229766A1 (en) 2008-03-14 2009-09-17 Aveldson Jason L Adhesive removal device
CN102015945B (en) 2008-03-14 2017-12-15 3M创新有限公司 Stretchable stripping adhesive tape
BRPI0906217A8 (en) 2008-03-14 2018-12-11 3M Innovative Properties Co Stretch Release Adhesives, Assembly, Method for Adhesively and Temporarily Bonding a Subtract to a Liquid Crystal Display and Stretch Release Adhesive Sheet
DE102008026445A1 (en) 2008-06-03 2009-12-10 Olympus Winter & Ibe Gmbh Method for testing the patency of an endoscope channel and endoscope washing machine therefor
JP5390604B2 (en) 2008-06-13 2014-01-15 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Collimated light engine
US20110090423A1 (en) 2008-06-13 2011-04-21 Wheatley John A Illumination device with progressive injection
CN102150071A (en) 2008-07-08 2011-08-10 3M创新有限公司 Optical elements for showing virtual images
JP5681104B2 (en) 2008-07-10 2015-03-04 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Retroreflective article and device having viscoelastic lightguide
TW201007647A (en) 2008-07-10 2010-02-16 3M Innovative Properties Co Retroreflective articles and devices having viscoelastic lightguide
KR20170038100A (en) 2008-08-08 2017-04-05 쓰리엠 이노베이티브 프로퍼티즈 컴파니 Lightguide having a viscoelastic layer for managing light
CN102124400B (en) 2008-08-19 2014-12-10 3M创新有限公司 Multi-layer optical articles
JP2012503077A (en) 2008-09-17 2012-02-02 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Optical adhesive with diffusion properties
US7995278B2 (en) 2008-10-23 2011-08-09 3M Innovative Properties Company Methods of forming sheeting with composite images that float and sheeting with composite images that float
JP5221531B2 (en) 2008-12-25 2013-06-26 株式会社クラレ Optical member made of acrylic block copolymer
EP2379660A1 (en) 2008-12-31 2011-10-26 3M Innovative Properties Company Stretch releasable adhesive tape
CN102325850B (en) 2008-12-31 2014-03-12 3M创新有限公司 Stretch releasable adhesive tape
BRPI1006654A2 (en) 2009-04-15 2016-02-10 3M Innovative Properties Co retroreflective optical constructions and optical films
JP2012526894A (en) 2009-05-15 2012-11-01 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Urethane pressure sensitive adhesive
US9480760B2 (en) 2009-06-25 2016-11-01 3M Innovative Properties Company Light-activated antimicrobial article and method of use
US8877125B2 (en) 2009-06-30 2014-11-04 3M Innovative Properties Company Light-activated antimicrobial articles and methods of use
BR112012003745A2 (en) 2009-08-21 2019-09-24 3M Innovantive Properties Company fabric lighting methods and products
CN102625677B (en) 2009-08-21 2016-05-18 3M创新有限公司 Alleviate method and the product of tissue injury with water imbibition stress distribution material
JP5801815B2 (en) 2009-10-24 2015-10-28 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Method for producing slanted nanovoided articles
JP2013508923A (en) 2009-10-24 2013-03-07 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Light source and display system incorporating the light source
JP6178076B2 (en) 2009-10-24 2017-08-09 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Diffuser with voids
CN102576100B (en) 2009-10-24 2016-05-04 3M创新有限公司 Gradient low index article and method
KR20120102062A (en) 2009-10-30 2012-09-17 쓰리엠 이노베이티브 프로퍼티즈 컴파니 Illumination device having remotely powered lightguide
WO2011068754A1 (en) 2009-12-04 2011-06-09 3M Innovative Properties Company Nano-porous adhesive tie layer
EP2523802A1 (en) 2010-01-13 2012-11-21 3M Innovative Properties Company Optical films with microstructured low refractive index nanovoided layers and methods therefor
US8917447B2 (en) 2010-01-13 2014-12-23 3M Innovative Properties Company Microreplicated film for attachment to autostereoscopic display components
JP5695085B2 (en) 2010-01-13 2015-04-01 スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー Lighting device with viscoelastic light guide
KR20120115568A (en) 2010-02-10 2012-10-18 쓰리엠 이노베이티브 프로퍼티즈 컴파니 Illumination device having viscoelastic layer
EP2609165A4 (en) 2010-08-26 2017-08-02 3M Innovative Properties Company Double-sided multi-layer adhesive

Patent Citations (100)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US2440584A (en) * 1944-06-19 1948-04-27 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Lenticular reflex reflector sheet and method of making the same
US2736721A (en) * 1952-10-08 1956-02-28 Optionally
US3718712A (en) * 1971-03-01 1973-02-27 Minnesota Mining & Mfg Pressure-sensitive adhesives based on cyclic terpene urethane resin
US4082426A (en) * 1976-11-26 1978-04-04 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Retroreflective sheeting with retroreflective markings
US4310509A (en) * 1979-07-31 1982-01-12 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Pressure-sensitive adhesive having a broad spectrum antimicrobial therein
US4584192A (en) * 1984-06-04 1986-04-22 Minnesota Mining & Manufacturing Company Film-forming composition containing an antimicrobial agent and methods of use
US4808471A (en) * 1985-03-01 1989-02-28 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Flat transparent top coat for retroreflective sheeting
US4737559A (en) * 1986-05-19 1988-04-12 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Co. Pressure-sensitive adhesive crosslinked by copolymerizable aromatic ketone monomers
US5738642A (en) * 1993-03-22 1998-04-14 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Carrier delivered dressing and method of manufacture
US5506279A (en) * 1993-10-13 1996-04-09 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Acrylamido functional disubstituted acetyl aryl ketone photoinitiators
US5882774A (en) * 1993-12-21 1999-03-16 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Optical film
US5510171A (en) * 1995-01-19 1996-04-23 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Durable security laminate with hologram
US6368699B1 (en) * 1995-06-26 2002-04-09 3M Innovative Properties Company Multilayer polymer film with additional coatings or layers
US5707130A (en) * 1995-12-21 1998-01-13 Reitter & Schefenacker Gmbh & Co. Kg Taillight for vehicles, especially for motor vehicles
US5867316A (en) * 1996-02-29 1999-02-02 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Multilayer film having a continuous and disperse phase
US6049649A (en) * 1996-03-28 2000-04-11 Enplas Corporation Surface light source device of side-light type
US6216699B1 (en) * 1996-06-12 2001-04-17 Medical Concepts Development, Inc. Antimicrobial containing solventless hot melt adhesive composition
US6523976B1 (en) * 1996-06-13 2003-02-25 Gentex Corporation Led assembly
US6179948B1 (en) * 1998-01-13 2001-01-30 3M Innovative Properties Company Optical film and process for manufacture thereof
US6352761B1 (en) * 1998-01-13 2002-03-05 3M Innovative Properties Company Modified copolyesters and improved multilayer reflective films
US6036340A (en) * 1998-03-03 2000-03-14 Ford Global Technologies, Inc. Dimpled manifold optical element for a vehicle lighting system
US6196704B1 (en) * 1998-04-25 2001-03-06 Reitter & Schefenacker Gmbh Light, especially tail light, for a motor vehicle
US7005394B1 (en) * 1998-07-10 2006-02-28 3M Innovative Properties Company Tackified thermoplastic-epoxy pressure sensitive adhesives
US6352359B1 (en) * 1998-08-25 2002-03-05 Physical Optics Corporation Vehicle light assembly including a diffuser surface structure
US6367950B1 (en) * 1998-08-27 2002-04-09 Stanley Electric Co., Ltd. Vehicle lamp fixture and method of use
US6033604A (en) * 1998-12-02 2000-03-07 3M Innovative Properties Company Method for molding light extraction structures onto a light guide
US6367941B2 (en) * 1999-02-24 2002-04-09 3M Innovative Properties Company Illumination device for producing predetermined intensity patterns
US6855386B1 (en) * 1999-03-19 2005-02-15 3M Innovative Properties Company Wet surface adhesives
US6530683B1 (en) * 1999-08-23 2003-03-11 Ichikoh Industries, Ltd. Vehicle lighting device using led light source
US6845212B2 (en) * 1999-10-08 2005-01-18 3M Innovative Properties Company Optical element having programmed optical structures
US6379016B1 (en) * 2000-02-16 2002-04-30 3M Innovative Properties Company Light guide with extraction structures
US7336422B2 (en) * 2000-02-22 2008-02-26 3M Innovative Properties Company Sheeting with composite image that floats
US7166686B2 (en) * 2000-06-28 2007-01-23 3M Innovative Properties Company High refractive index pressure-sensitive adhesives
US6851843B2 (en) * 2001-01-18 2005-02-08 Reitter & Schefenacker Gmbh & Co. Kg Light assembly, especially signal light, for motor vehicles
US7344284B2 (en) * 2001-01-23 2008-03-18 Donnelly Corporation Lighting system for a vehicle, with high-intensity power LED
US6851839B2 (en) * 2001-03-27 2005-02-08 Meridian Automotive Systems, Inc. Vehicular lamp assembly with a simplified structure and CHMSL and tail lamp incorporating the same
US20030034445A1 (en) * 2001-08-15 2003-02-20 Boyd Gary T. Light guide for use with backlit display
US6672746B2 (en) * 2001-08-30 2004-01-06 Koito Manufacturing Co., Ltd. Led-type vehicular lamp
US7030203B2 (en) * 2001-09-28 2006-04-18 3M Innovative Properties Company Water-in-oil emulsions with ethylene oxide groups, compositions, and methods
US6722777B2 (en) * 2001-10-05 2004-04-20 Schefenacker Vision Systems Germany Gmbh & Co. Kg Reflector for a light assembly, such as a taillight, a headlight, or an interior light, of a motor vehicle
US20050070976A1 (en) * 2001-11-17 2005-03-31 Samuel Ifor David William Therapeutic light-emitting device
US20070026167A1 (en) * 2001-12-14 2007-02-01 Bourdelais Robert P Microvoided light diffuser containing optical contact layer
US6848820B2 (en) * 2002-03-15 2005-02-01 Koito Manufacturing Co., Ltd. Vehicular lamp employing led light sources
US6991695B2 (en) * 2002-05-21 2006-01-31 3M Innovative Properties Company Method for subdividing multilayer optical film cleanly and rapidly
US6994461B2 (en) * 2002-07-19 2006-02-07 Pervaiz Lodhie LED lamp for vehicle signal light
US20060044825A1 (en) * 2002-12-06 2006-03-02 Sl Lcd Co., Ltd Lamp for vehicle
US7361474B2 (en) * 2003-02-24 2008-04-22 United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Veterans Affairs Serum macrophage migration inhibitory factor (MIF) as marker for prostate cancer
US7018061B2 (en) * 2003-04-25 2006-03-28 Hon Hai Precision Ind. Co., Ltd. Backlight module and light guide plate thereof
US20070006493A1 (en) * 2003-05-12 2007-01-11 Arnold Eberwein Illuminated license plate for vehicles and vehicle provided with the same
US7318663B2 (en) * 2003-07-02 2008-01-15 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Vehicle with lighting system for tail lights and license plate comprising light emitting diodes and optical waveguide
US7204628B2 (en) * 2003-08-05 2007-04-17 Koito Manufacturing Co., Ltd. Lighting device for vehicle
US7182494B2 (en) * 2003-09-04 2007-02-27 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. Rear lamp unit for vehicle
US20070031641A1 (en) * 2003-09-05 2007-02-08 3M Innovative Properties Company License plate for back illumination and method for making same
US7165959B2 (en) * 2003-09-09 2007-01-23 3M Innovative Properties Company Apparatus and method for producing two-sided patterned webs in registration
US20050052750A1 (en) * 2003-09-09 2005-03-10 King Vincent W. Microreplicated article
US20050058821A1 (en) * 2003-09-12 2005-03-17 3M Innovative Properties Company Microporous PVDF films and method of manufacturing
US7347600B2 (en) * 2003-10-31 2008-03-25 Valeo Vision Lighting module for a vehicle headlight
US7029152B1 (en) * 2004-01-23 2006-04-18 Kuhl Reflections, Inc. Vehicular lighting arrangement with infinity effect
US7347601B2 (en) * 2004-06-09 2008-03-25 Ichikoh Industries, Ltd. Vehicle lamp unit
US20060002126A1 (en) * 2004-06-24 2006-01-05 Koito Manufacturing Co., Ltd. Vehicular lamp
US20060028829A1 (en) * 2004-08-09 2006-02-09 Koito Manufacturing Co., Ltd. Vehicular marker lamp
US20060034094A1 (en) * 2004-08-11 2006-02-16 Koito Manufacturing Co., Ltd. Vehicular marker lamp
US20060035039A1 (en) * 2004-08-12 2006-02-16 3M Innovative Properties Company Silver-releasing articles and methods of manufacture
US20060056166A1 (en) * 2004-09-09 2006-03-16 Yeo Terence E Enhanced LCD backlight
US7341364B2 (en) * 2004-10-12 2008-03-11 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. Tail lamp structure for vehicles
US20060084780A1 (en) * 2004-10-18 2006-04-20 Hebrink Timothy J Modified copolyesters and optical films including modified copolyesters
US7322725B2 (en) * 2005-02-14 2008-01-29 Yamaha Hatsudoki Kabushiki Kaisha Light device for vehicle and vehicle provided with same
US7326448B2 (en) * 2005-02-17 2008-02-05 3M Innovative Properties Company Polymerizable oligomeric urethane compositions comprising nanoparticles
US7315418B2 (en) * 2005-03-31 2008-01-01 3M Innovative Properties Company Polarizing beam splitter assembly having reduced stress
US20070047080A1 (en) * 2005-08-31 2007-03-01 3M Innovative Properties Company Methods of producing multilayer reflective polarizer
US20070081254A1 (en) * 2005-10-11 2007-04-12 3M Innovative Properties Company Methods of forming sheeting with a composite image that floats and sheeting with a composite image that floats
US7160010B1 (en) * 2005-11-15 2007-01-09 Visteon Global Technologies, Inc. Light manifold for automotive light module
US20070243844A1 (en) * 2006-04-12 2007-10-18 Nokia Corporation Flexible optical illumination system
US20080049438A1 (en) * 2006-08-22 2008-02-28 Philips Lumileds Lighting Company, Llc LED Assembly for Rear Lamps in an Automobile
US20080049446A1 (en) * 2006-08-25 2008-02-28 Philips Lumileds Lighting Company, Llc Thin Backlight With Flipped Light Emitting Diode
US20080053800A1 (en) * 2006-08-30 2008-03-06 3M Innovative Properties Company Keypad light guide
US7481563B2 (en) * 2006-09-21 2009-01-27 3M Innovative Properties Company LED backlight
US20080074901A1 (en) * 2006-09-21 2008-03-27 3M Innovative Properties Company Led backlight
US20080080199A1 (en) * 2006-09-29 2008-04-03 Sassoon Charles I Combination LED lamp
US20080084518A1 (en) * 2006-10-06 2008-04-10 3M Innovative Properties Company Stereoscopic 3d liquid crystal display apparatus with structured light guide surface
US20100026727A1 (en) * 2006-10-06 2010-02-04 Qualcomm Mems Technologies, Inc. Optical loss structure integrated in an illumination apparatus
US7498535B2 (en) * 2006-10-30 2009-03-03 Square D Company Circuit breaker operator
US20090067151A1 (en) * 2007-09-06 2009-03-12 3M Innovative Properties Company Light guide with flexibility and durability
US20090105437A1 (en) * 2007-10-19 2009-04-23 3M Innovative Properties Company High refractive index pressure-sensitive adhesives
US20100048804A1 (en) * 2007-10-19 2010-02-25 3M Innovative Properties Company High refractive index pressure-sensitive adhesives
US20110020640A1 (en) * 2008-01-11 2011-01-27 Sherman Audrey A Stretch releasing optically clear pressure sensitive adhesive
US20110039099A1 (en) * 2008-02-21 2011-02-17 Sherman Audrey A Temporarily repositionable pressure sensitive adhesive blends
US20110064916A1 (en) * 2008-04-22 2011-03-17 Sherman Audrey A Method of making adhesive article
US20100046930A1 (en) * 2008-08-22 2010-02-25 Panasonic Corporation Recording and playback apparatus
US20110002662A1 (en) * 2008-08-22 2011-01-06 Panasonic Corporation Recording/reproducing device
US20110002593A1 (en) * 2008-08-22 2011-01-06 Panasonic Corporation Record-playback device
US20100046929A1 (en) * 2008-08-22 2010-02-25 Panasonic Corporation Recording and playback apparatus
US20100046931A1 (en) * 2008-08-22 2010-02-25 Panasonic Corporation Recording and playback apparatus
US20100046918A1 (en) * 2008-08-22 2010-02-25 Panasonic Corporation Recording and playback apparatus
US20100103521A1 (en) * 2008-10-22 2010-04-29 3M Innovative Properties Company Retroreflective sheeting
US20120026431A1 (en) * 2009-04-15 2012-02-02 Coggio William D Lightguide with optical film containing voids and blacklight for display system
US20120027945A1 (en) * 2009-04-15 2012-02-02 William Blake Kolb Process and apparatus for a nonovoided article
US20120038990A1 (en) * 2009-04-15 2012-02-16 Encai Hao Optical film
US20120039089A1 (en) * 2009-04-15 2012-02-16 3M Innovative Properties Company Optical construction and display system incorporating same
US20120038850A1 (en) * 2009-04-15 2012-02-16 3M Innovative Properties Company Optical film for preventing optical coupling

Cited By (94)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8950902B2 (en) 2007-10-09 2015-02-10 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Light emitting device with light mixing within a film
US20100214786A1 (en) * 2007-10-09 2010-08-26 Nichol Anthony J Light coupling into illuminated films
US20110227487A1 (en) * 2007-10-09 2011-09-22 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Light emitting display with light mixing within a film
US8128271B2 (en) 2007-10-09 2012-03-06 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Light coupling into films
US8714781B2 (en) 2007-10-09 2014-05-06 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Light coupling into illuminated films
US8167461B2 (en) 2007-10-09 2012-05-01 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Method of manufacturing a light emitting device
US8434909B2 (en) 2007-10-09 2013-05-07 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Light emitting display with light mixing within a film
US9851482B2 (en) 2008-07-10 2017-12-26 3M Innovative Properties Company Retroreflective articles and devices having viscoelastic lightguide
US9086535B2 (en) 2008-07-10 2015-07-21 3M Innovative Properties Company Retroreflective articles and devices having viscoelastic lightguide
US8651720B2 (en) 2008-07-10 2014-02-18 3M Innovative Properties Company Retroreflective articles and devices having viscoelastic lightguide
US9551475B2 (en) 2008-07-10 2017-01-24 3M Innovative Properties Company Retroreflective articles and devices having viscoelastic lightguide
US20110122494A1 (en) * 2008-07-10 2011-05-26 Sherman Audrey A Retroreflective articles and devices having viscoelastic lightguide
US9285531B2 (en) 2008-08-08 2016-03-15 3M Innovative Properties Company Lightguide having a viscoelastic layer for managing light
US8557378B2 (en) 2008-12-31 2013-10-15 3M Innovative Properties Company Stretch releasable adhesive tape
US8764262B2 (en) 2009-01-26 2014-07-01 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Illumination via flexible thin films
US8905610B2 (en) 2009-01-26 2014-12-09 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Light emitting device comprising a lightguide film
US8917962B1 (en) 2009-06-24 2014-12-23 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Method of manufacturing a light input coupler and lightguide
US8877125B2 (en) 2009-06-30 2014-11-04 3M Innovative Properties Company Light-activated antimicrobial articles and methods of use
US10080555B2 (en) 2009-08-21 2018-09-25 3M Innovative Properties Company Methods and products for reducing tissue trauma using water-absorbing stress-distributing materials
US10092366B2 (en) 2009-08-21 2018-10-09 3M Innovative Properties Company Products for reducing tissue trauma using water-resistant stress-distributing materials
US8758237B2 (en) 2009-08-21 2014-06-24 3M Innovative Properties Company Methods and products for illuminating tissue
US9304243B2 (en) 2010-01-13 2016-04-05 3M Innovative Properties Company Illumination device having viscoelastic lightguide
US9146342B2 (en) 2010-01-13 2015-09-29 3M Innovative Properties Company Illumination device having viscoelastic lightguide
US9239417B2 (en) 2010-02-10 2016-01-19 3M Innovative Properties Company Illumination device having viscoelastic layer
US9684120B2 (en) 2010-02-10 2017-06-20 3M Innovative Properties Company Optical article having viscoelastic layer
US9110200B2 (en) 2010-04-16 2015-08-18 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Illumination device comprising a film-based lightguide
US9028123B2 (en) 2010-04-16 2015-05-12 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Display illumination device with a film-based lightguide having stacked incident surfaces
US9103956B2 (en) 2010-07-28 2015-08-11 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Light emitting device with optical redundancy
US20120081637A1 (en) * 2010-09-30 2012-04-05 Global Lighting Technologies Inc. Backlight module and liquid crystal display
US8984785B2 (en) * 2010-11-05 2015-03-24 Samsung Display Co., Ltd. Display device with decorative filled groove
US20120110881A1 (en) * 2010-11-05 2012-05-10 Sung Ku Kang Display device
US8777473B2 (en) 2010-12-17 2014-07-15 3M Innovative Properties Company Light device
US8885995B2 (en) 2011-02-07 2014-11-11 Morgan Solar Inc. Light-guide solar energy concentrator
US9645304B2 (en) 2011-03-09 2017-05-09 Flex Lighting Ii Llc Directional front illuminating device comprising a film based lightguide with high optical clarity in the light emitting region
US20140360578A1 (en) * 2011-05-13 2014-12-11 Anthony J. Nichol Solar energy system including a lightguide film
US10737110B2 (en) 2011-11-09 2020-08-11 John Stephan Light therapy apparatus
US11273323B2 (en) 2011-11-09 2022-03-15 John Stephan Light therapy apparatus
WO2013095117A3 (en) * 2011-12-16 2013-09-12 Dqm B.V. Nederland Device and method to illuminate objects
NL2007980C2 (en) * 2011-12-16 2013-06-18 Dqm B V Nederland Device and method to illuminate objects.
US8657479B2 (en) * 2012-03-21 2014-02-25 Morgan Solar Inc. Light guide illumination devices
US8328403B1 (en) 2012-03-21 2012-12-11 Morgan Solar Inc. Light guide illumination devices
US11229499B2 (en) 2012-09-24 2022-01-25 Invuity, Inc. Methods and apparatus for controlling optical properties of light
WO2014078188A1 (en) 2012-11-13 2014-05-22 3M Innovative Properties Company Optical stack including light extraction layer and polymer dispersed liquid crystal layer
US11442213B2 (en) 2013-03-12 2022-09-13 Azumo, Inc. Film-based lightguide with extended coupling lightguide region
US9566751B1 (en) 2013-03-12 2017-02-14 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Methods of forming film-based lightguides
US9690032B1 (en) 2013-03-12 2017-06-27 Flex Lighting Ii Llc Lightguide including a film with one or more bends
US9798072B2 (en) * 2013-03-15 2017-10-24 Cree, Inc. Optical element and method of forming an optical element
US20150370000A1 (en) * 2013-03-15 2015-12-24 Cree, Inc. Optical Element and Method of Forming an Optical Element
US9908413B2 (en) * 2013-04-11 2018-03-06 Denso Corporation Vehicle display device
US20160052392A1 (en) * 2013-04-11 2016-02-25 Denso Corporation Vehicle display device
US9208704B2 (en) 2013-11-05 2015-12-08 3M Innovative Properties Company Hybrid self illuminated and actively back lit signage for printed graphics
US9070312B2 (en) 2013-11-05 2015-06-30 3M Innovative Properties Company Hybrid self illuminated and actively back lit signage for printed graphics
US20150309238A1 (en) * 2014-01-26 2015-10-29 Beijing Boe Optoelectronics Technology Co., Ltd. A backlight module and a display device
US9904001B2 (en) 2014-03-18 2018-02-27 3M Innovative Properties Company Marketing strip with viscoelastic lightguide
US10962352B2 (en) * 2014-03-20 2021-03-30 3M Innovative Properties Company Sheet and structural deformation-evaluating article
US20180356211A1 (en) * 2014-03-20 2018-12-13 3M Innovative Properties Company Sheet and structural deformation-evaluating article
US10871671B2 (en) 2014-05-23 2020-12-22 Eyesafe, Llc Light emission reducing compounds for electronic devices
US11686968B2 (en) 2014-05-23 2023-06-27 Eyesafe Inc. Light emission reducing compounds for electronic devices
US10642087B2 (en) 2014-05-23 2020-05-05 Eyesafe, Llc Light emission reducing compounds for electronic devices
US10495795B2 (en) 2014-05-23 2019-12-03 Eyesafe, Llc Light emission reducing compounds for electronic devices
US10901125B2 (en) 2014-05-23 2021-01-26 Eyesafe, Llc Light emission reducing compounds for electronic devices
US10647032B2 (en) 2014-07-18 2020-05-12 3M Innovative Properties Company Multilayer optical adhesives and methods of making same
US9862124B2 (en) 2014-07-18 2018-01-09 3M Innovative Properties Company Multilayer optical adhesives and methods of making same
US20160060955A1 (en) * 2014-08-27 2016-03-03 Yin-An Hsieh Retractable light-diffusing module and light-diffusing structure thereof
US20180031754A1 (en) * 2015-12-22 2018-02-01 Wuhan China Star Optoelectronics Technology Co., Ltd. Light Guide Plate, Backlight Module And Liquid Crystal Display
US11708510B2 (en) * 2016-01-15 2023-07-25 3M Innovative Properties Company Optical adhesive
US10619015B2 (en) 2016-02-24 2020-04-14 3M Innovative Properties Company Modification of siloxane polyoxamide copolymers with ultraviolet light
WO2017147229A1 (en) 2016-02-24 2017-08-31 3M Innovative Properties Company Modification of siloxane polyoxamide copolymers with ultraviolet light
US11458329B2 (en) 2016-07-27 2022-10-04 Z2020, Llc Componentry and devices for light therapy delivery and methods related thereto
US10974644B2 (en) * 2016-09-19 2021-04-13 Lear Corporation Vehicle seat including illuminated feature
US10953792B2 (en) * 2016-11-09 2021-03-23 Lisa Dräxlmaier GmbH Optical conductor and lighting system
US20200262343A1 (en) * 2016-11-09 2020-08-20 Lisa Dräxlmaier GmbH Optical Conductor and Lighting System
US10965854B2 (en) * 2017-03-06 2021-03-30 Gelsight, Inc. Surface topography measurement systems
CN113272693A (en) * 2018-08-30 2021-08-17 阿祖莫公司 Film-based front light with angularly variable diffuser film
US20220033689A1 (en) * 2018-09-28 2022-02-03 Nitto Denko Corporation Double-sided adhesive layer-equipped optical laminate
US11891549B2 (en) 2018-09-28 2024-02-06 Nitto Denko Corporation Double-sided adhesive layer-equipped optical laminate
US11126033B2 (en) 2018-11-28 2021-09-21 Eyesafe Inc. Backlight unit with emission modification
US10955697B2 (en) 2018-11-28 2021-03-23 Eyesafe Inc. Light emission modification
US11592701B2 (en) 2018-11-28 2023-02-28 Eyesafe Inc. Backlight unit with emission modification
US11347099B2 (en) 2018-11-28 2022-05-31 Eyesafe Inc. Light management filter and related software
US11810532B2 (en) 2018-11-28 2023-11-07 Eyesafe Inc. Systems for monitoring and regulating harmful blue light exposure from digital devices
WO2020123539A1 (en) * 2018-12-11 2020-06-18 Flex Lighting Ii, Llc Front illumination lightguide with a diffusely reflective release liner
US11416074B1 (en) 2019-01-11 2022-08-16 Apple Inc. Electronic devices having flexible light guides
US20210024196A1 (en) * 2019-07-25 2021-01-28 Gulfstream Aerospace Corporation Aircraft, interior panels for aircfraft, and methods for making interior panels
US11513274B2 (en) 2019-08-01 2022-11-29 Azumo, Inc. Lightguide with a light input edge between lateral edges of a folded strip
US10971660B2 (en) 2019-08-09 2021-04-06 Eyesafe Inc. White LED light source and method of making same
US10998471B2 (en) 2019-08-09 2021-05-04 Eyesafe Inc. White LED light source and method of making same
US11060691B2 (en) * 2019-11-19 2021-07-13 GM Global Technology Operations LLC Light bar and exterior lighting assembly for an automotive vehicle comprising the same
US20210148538A1 (en) * 2019-11-19 2021-05-20 GM Global Technology Operations LLC Light bar for an exterior lighting assembly
US20220113455A1 (en) * 2020-10-13 2022-04-14 Lacks Enterprises, Inc. Decorative clear or translucent panel, trim, or lens with texture on opposite sides
WO2022098871A1 (en) * 2020-11-05 2022-05-12 Berry Global, Inc. Multilayer film
US11845242B2 (en) 2020-11-05 2023-12-19 Berry Global, Inc. Multilayer film
US20220404539A1 (en) * 2021-06-18 2022-12-22 Hella Saturnus Slovenija d.o.o. Illuminated cover for electromagnetic transmitter and receiver
WO2023022526A1 (en) * 2021-08-19 2023-02-23 엘지이노텍 주식회사 Optical member, lighting device and vehicle lamp having same

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2011527818A (en) 2011-11-04
US20170227702A1 (en) 2017-08-10
CN102124384B (en) 2016-10-12
KR20110041507A (en) 2011-04-21
CN102124384A (en) 2011-07-13
US10228507B2 (en) 2019-03-12
KR20160105527A (en) 2016-09-06
WO2010005655A3 (en) 2010-03-11
JP5457447B2 (en) 2014-04-02
WO2010005655A2 (en) 2010-01-14
EP2313800A4 (en) 2014-03-19
EP2313800A2 (en) 2011-04-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US10228507B2 (en) Light source and optical article including viscoelastic lightguide disposed on a substrate
US9285531B2 (en) Lightguide having a viscoelastic layer for managing light
US9684120B2 (en) Optical article having viscoelastic layer
US9851482B2 (en) Retroreflective articles and devices having viscoelastic lightguide
US9551475B2 (en) Retroreflective articles and devices having viscoelastic lightguide
US9904001B2 (en) Marketing strip with viscoelastic lightguide

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: 3M INNOVATIVE PROPERTIES COMPANY, MINNESOTA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:SHERMAN, AUDREY A.;MEIS, MICHAEL A.;SCHAFFER, KEVIN R.;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20110114 TO 20110302;REEL/FRAME:026067/0738

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- AFTER EXAMINER'S ANSWER OR BOARD OF APPEALS DECISION